717859
2
Verklein
Vergroot
Pagina terug
1/432
Pagina verder
CF5001
User Manual
Recycled paper is used for the inside pages of this manual.
Thank you very much for your purchase of the CF5001.
This Manual deals with making copies, correct handling of the machine, and
precautions for safety. Please read before copying.
In order to maintain a satisfactory copying performance, please keep this
Manual readily available for reference in the rear pocket of the machine.
ENERGY STAR
®
Program
The ENERGY STAR Program has been established
to encourage the widespread and voluntary use of
energy-efficient technologies that reduce energy
consumption and prevent pollution. As an
ENERGY
STAR Partner, we have determined that this product
meets the
ENERGY STAR guidelines for energy
efficiency grounding it on the following features.
Auto Low Power
This function conserves energy by lowering the set temperature of the fixing
unit. In the standard setting, Auto Low Power operates automatically when 15
minutes have elapsed after completion of the last copy, with the copier remaining
in the ready to copy state during that time.
The time period for the Auto Low Power function can be set for 5 minutes, 10
minutes, 15 minutes, 30 minutes, 60 minutes, 90 minutes, 120 minutes, or 240
minutes. See p. 2-19 for details.
Automatic Shut-Off
This function achieves further energy conservation by partially turning OFF the
power supply, thereby reducing energy consumption to 20 W or less. In the
standard setting, Automatic Shut-Off follows Auto Low Power, operating
automatically when 90 minutes have elapsed after completion of the last copy,
with the copier remaining in the ready to copy state during that time.
The time period for the Automatic Shut-Off function can be set for 30 minutes,
60 minutes, 90 minutes, 120 minutes or 240 minutes. See p. 2-19 for details.
Automatic Duplex Copying
To reduce paper consumption, use this function to make double-sided (duplex)
copies, automatically.
We recommend that you utilize the Auto Low Power function, the Automatic
Shut-Off function, and the Automatic Duplex Copying function.
Copyright © 2000 GoAhead Software, Inc. All rights Reserved.
65AN97100-01
i
Contents
Contents
Features of the CF5001
Legal Restrictions on Copying
Basic
Section 1: Safety Information
Caution Labels and Indicators ....................................................... 1-2
Requirements for Safe Use............................................................ 1-6
Power Source .................................................................................... 1-6
Environment....................................................................................... 1-7
Precautions for Routine Handling .................................................... 1-10
Regulations.................................................................................. 1-13
CE Marking (Declaration of Conformity) .......................................... 1-13
Laser Safety..................................................................................... 1-13
Internal Laser Radiation................................................................... 1-14
Laser Safety Label ........................................................................... 1-17
Ozone Release ................................................................................ 1-18
Section 2: Machine Information
Machine Configuration................................................................... 2-2
External Machine Items ..................................................................... 2-2
Internal Machine Items....................................................................... 2-4
Standard/Optional Equipment............................................................ 2-5
Control Panel Layout ......................................................................... 2-6
Basic Screen...................................................................................... 2-8
FN-120/FN-9 Finisher (with PK-5 Punch Kit)................................... 2-10
Cover Inserter D............................................................................... 2-12
C-208 Large Capacity Cassette....................................................... 2-13
TMG-3 Trimming Unit ...................................................................... 2-14
Turning On the Power Switch ...................................................... 2-16
To Turn On the Power ..................................................................... 2-16
To Turn Off the Power ..................................................................... 2-18
Reducing the Power in Standby Mode (Auto Low Power)............... 2-19
Shutting Off Automatically (Auto Shut-Off) ...................................... 2-19
Shutting Off / Reducing the Power Manually ................................... 2-20
Entering an EKC Password (EKC)................................................... 2-21
Contents (continued)
ii
Loading Paper.............................................................................. 2-22
Loading Paper in Tray 1 ,2, and 3....................................................2-23
Loading Paper in Multi-Sheet Bypass Tray......................................2-26
Loading Paper in LCT (C-208) .........................................................2-27
Loading Tabbed Sheets in Tray 1, 2, or 3........................................2-30
Loading Tabbed Sheets in LCT (C-208) ..........................................2-31
Loading Tabbed Sheets in Multi-Sheet Bypass Tray .......................2-32
Section 3: Copying Operations
Selecting Colour Mode................................................................... 3-2
Positioning Originals ...................................................................... 3-4
Positioning Originals in RADF............................................................3-4
Positioning Original on Platen Glass..................................................3-8
Setting Print Quantity ...................................................................3-10
To Set Print Quantity........................................................................3-10
To Change Print Quantity.................................................................3-10
Setting Job During Warm-up........................................................ 3-11
To Stop Scanning/Printing ........................................................... 3-13
Selecting Paper Size.................................................................... 3-14
To Select Paper Size Automatically (APS) ......................................3-14
To Specify Desired Paper Size (AMS) .............................................3-16
Copying Using Special Paper (Multi-Sheet Bypass Tray) ..................3-18
Selecting Magnification Ratio (Lens Mode).................................. 3-22
To Copy in 1.000 Magnification Mode..............................................3-22
To Change Magnification Ratio (Fixed Magnification / Zoom Mode)3-23
Making Double-Sided Copies (1a2, 2a2) ................................... 3-25
Using RADF .....................................................................................3-25
Using Platen Glass...........................................................................3-28
Making Single-Sided Copies from Double-Sided Originals (2
a
1) .................. 3-31
To Scan Originals into Memory (Store Mode).............................. 3-33
To Set Next Copying Job (Reserve) ............................................ 3-35
To Check/Control Jobs in Progress (Job Status Screen) ...................3-38
Output Mode for Machine without Finisher .................................. 3-41
Output Mode for Machine with Finisher ....................................... 3-45
Selecting Binding Mode ............................................................... 3-52
Section 2: Machine Information (continued)
Contents (continued)
iii
Section 4: Helpful Functions
Making Sample Copy (Proof Copy) ............................................... 4-2
Checking Feature Selections / Proof Copying (Check Mode) ....................4-4
Interrupt Copying ........................................................................... 4-8
Storing Job Conditions (Job Memory: Job Store) ........................ 4-11
Recalling Stored Job Settings (Job Memory: Job Recall).................. 4-14
Recalling Previous Job Settings .................................................. 4-15
Displaying Screen for Operation Guide (Help Mode)................... 4-16
To Display Help Screen from Basic Screen..................................... 4-16
To Display Help Screen from Other Screens................................... 4-18
Section 5: Troubleshooting
When “Call for Service” Message Is Displayed.............................. 5-2
Limited Use of the Copier in Trouble ................................................. 5-3
Clearing Mishandled Paper............................................................ 5-4
When “JAM” Appears on Folder Key (Or Arrow Key Flashes) .......................... 5-6
When “ADD PAPER” Appears on Folder Key (Or Arrow Key Flashes) .....................5-8
When “Memory Full” Message Is Displayed (Memory Overflow) ...................... 5-9
Memory Overflow in Current Job ....................................................... 5-9
Memory Overflow in Reserve Job.................................................... 5-10
When Power OFF/ON Screen Is Displayed................................. 5-11
Troubleshooting Tips ................................................................... 5-12
Section 6: Machine Specifications
Main Body Specifications............................................................... 6-2
Main Body .......................................................................................... 6-2
Option Specifications ..................................................................... 6-4
AFR-20 Duplexing Document Feeder................................................ 6-4
FN-120/FN-9 Finisher ........................................................................ 6-4
Cover Inserter D................................................................................. 6-5
TMG-3 Trimming Unit ........................................................................ 6-5
PK-5 Punch Kit................................................................................... 6-6
C-208 Large Capacity Cassette......................................................... 6-6
Others ................................................................................................ 6-6
Contents (continued)
iv
Advanced
Section 7: Colour Image Adjustment
About Colours ................................................................................ 7-2
RGB and CMYK Models ....................................................................7-2
HSB Model.........................................................................................7-3
Colour Copy Quality ....................................................................... 7-4
Modifying Colours ..............................................................................7-4
Reproducing Images ........................................................................7-11
What Is Image Detection?................................................................7-12
Applying Filters.................................................................................7-13
Improving Colour Copy Quality ........................................................7-14
Selecting Density Level and Whitening the Background(Copy Density)...........................7-15
To Adjust Copy Density / Background Whiteness............................7-15
Setting Density Shift.........................................................................7-17
Changing Colours Using RGB and HSB Values (Colour Adjustment)..................... 7-19
Modifying RGB Value.......................................................................7-19
Modifying HSB Value .......................................................................7-21
Changing Colours Using CMYK Value (Colour Balance Adjustment) ..................... 7-24
Selecting Line Screen, Dot Screen, or High Compression (Screen Setting) ....................7-26
Adjusting Sharpness and Contrast / Selecting Gloss Mode......................7-29
Making Fine Adjustment in Image Detection (Image Judge) ....................7-32
Specifying Original Type (Original Image/Type in Special Original) ........................ 7-34
Section 8: Advanced Information
Programmed Shut-Off (Weekly Timer)........................................... 8-2
Rotation.......................................................................................... 8-4
Vertical/Horizontal Zoom Mode...................................................... 8-5
Making Folded Booklet (Fold / Stitch & Fold)................................. 8-8
Punching File Holes in Copies (Punch)........................................ 8-11
Output Three-Folded Copies (Three-Fold)................................... 8-14
Making Trimmed Booklets (Trimming) ......................................... 8-16
Cover Sheet Feeding ...................................................................8-19
Off-Line Finishing ......................................................................... 8-22
Contents (continued)
v
Section 9: Special Original
Specifying Original Direction.......................................................... 9-2
Copying Non-Standard Size Originals (Original Form)........................ 9-4
Copying Mixed Size Originals (Mixed Original).............................. 9-6
Copying Z-Folded Originals (Z-Folded Original)............................ 9-8
Scanning Thin/Thick Originals in RADF (Original Thickness) ..................9-10
Section 10: Applications
To Display Application Selection Screen ..................................... 10-2
Inserting Sheets and Covers (Sheet/Cover Insertion) ....................... 10-3
Locating Title Pages on the Right Side (Chapter)........................ 10-7
Lay Out Several Pages onto One Sheet (Combination) .................. 10-10
Making a Multiple Page Signature Booklet (Booklet)....................... 10-13
Inserting Images into Printed Sets (Image Insert)...................... 10-17
Dividing an Image into Right and Left Pages (Dual Page) .....................10-20
Programming Different Settings for an Output Job (Program Job) ........................10-24
Dividing an Image for Enlarged Copy (Multi-Page Enlargement)...........................10-27
Erasing Outside of the Original (Non-Image Area Erase)................ 10-30
Reversing Colour in Image (Reverse Image).........................................................10-32
Repeating Selected Image Area (Repeat: Vert./Horiz. Mode)................10-34
Repeating Automatically or Selecting RepeatingTimes (Repeat: AUTO/ Repeat Mode) .................................... 10-37
Eliminating Copy Marks Along Borders (Frame/Fold Erasure)...................... 10-40
Copying Image in the Centre of Copy Paper (AUTO Layout).................10-43
Adjusting Position of Copy Image (Image Shift) ........................ 10-45
Reducing Images to Create Binding Margin (Reduce&Shift)..................10-48
Printing Stamp, Page, Date/Time onto Copies (Stamp) .................. 10-51
Printing Watermark onto Copies (Stamp) .................................. 10-58
Overlaying an Image onto Each Page Copied in the Job (Overlay).......................10-62
Storing an Overlay Image in HDD / Overlaying Image Stored in HDD (Overlay Memory) .................................. 10-65
Contents (continued)
vi
Section 11: Network Function
To Use Web Utilities..................................................................... 11-2
To Display Information on Machine.............................................. 11-4
To Display Current Machine Status (Job Status) ......................... 11-5
Setting E-Mail Transmission Function.......................................... 11-7
Setting E.K.C. Function................................................................11-9
Setting Scan Transmission Function.......................................... 11-19
Transmitting/Editing Machine Setting File.................................. 11-23
Section 12: Paper and Original Information
Paper Information......................................................................... 12-2
Paper Weight ...................................................................................12-2
Tray/ Exit Tray Capacity...................................................................12-4
Paper Size........................................................................................12-6
Special Paper in Multi-Sheet Bypass Tray.......................................12-8
To Store Copy Paper .......................................................................12-8
Original Information...................................................................... 12-9
Platen Glass Originals......................................................................12-9
RADF Originals ..............................................................................12-10
Section 13: Maintenance & Supplies
Adding Toner................................................................................ 13-2
Inserting a New Staple Cartridge into FN-120/FN-9 Finisher....................13-7
Empty Waste Basket of PK-5 Punch Kit .................................... 13-10
Empty Waste Basket of TMG-3 Trimming Unit .......................... 13-12
Exchanging Toner Recovery Box............................................... 13-14
Cleaning Image Scanning Section ............................................. 13-16
Cleaning the Platen Glass..............................................................13-16
Cleaning the RADF Platen Guide Cover........................................ 13-16
Cleaning the Platen Cover .............................................................13-17
Checking Copy Count ................................................................ 13-18
To Display the Counter List Screen ...............................................13-18
To Print the Counter List ................................................................13-19
Periodic Maintenance................................................................. 13-20
To Check the PM Counter..............................................................13-20
Contents (continued)
vii
Section 14: Key Operator Mode
An Outline of the Key Operator Mode.......................................... 14-2
How to Access the Key Operator Mode........................................... 14-2
[1] System Initial Setting .............................................................. 14-4
[1] Date & Time Setting.................................................................... 14-4
[2] Language Select Setting............................................................. 14-6
[3] IP Address Setting ...................................................................... 14-7
[4] E-Mail Transmission Setting ....................................................... 14-8
[2] Copier Initial Setting.............................................................. 14-10
[3] User Setting Mode ................................................................ 14-11
[1] User Lens Mode Ratio Setting .................................................. 14-11
[4] EKC (Electronic Key Counter) Function Setting ................... 14-12
How to Access the EKC Setting Mode........................................... 14-13
[1] E.K.C. Data Edit........................................................................ 14-14
[2] E.K.C. All Count Reset.............................................................. 14-17
[3] E.K.C. Function Setting............................................................. 14-18
[4] Scanner Function Setting.......................................................... 14-19
[5] Lock/Delete Job Memory ...................................................... 14-20
[6] Paper Type / Special Size Set .............................................. 14-21
[1] Paper Type / Special Size Set .................................................. 14-21
[2] Paper Type Set (Bypass).......................................................... 14-23
[7] Panel Contrast / Key Sound Adjustment............................... 14-24
[8] Key Operator Data Setting.................................................... 14-25
[9] Weekly Timer ........................................................................ 14-26
How to Access the Weekly Timer Setting Mode ............................ 14-27
[1] Weekly Timer On/Off Setting .................................................... 14-28
[2] Timer Setting............................................................................. 14-29
[3] Timer Action On/Off Setting ...................................................... 14-31
[4] Lunch Hour Off Setting ............................................................. 14-32
[5] Timer Interrupt Password Setting ............................................. 14-33
[10] Control Panel Adjustment ................................................... 14-34
[11] Tray Auto Select Setting ..................................................... 14-35
[12] Power Save Setting ............................................................ 14-36
[13] Memory Switch Setting ....................................................... 14-37
[14] Machine Management List Print ......................................... 14-43
[15] Call Remote Centre ............................................................ 14-44
[16] Finisher Adjustment ............................................................ 14-45
Contents (continued)
viii
[17] Front & Back Density Setting .............................................. 14-47
[18] Scan Transmission Setting ................................................. 14-48
[19] Non-Image Area Erase Setting ........................................... 14-50
[20] AE Adjustment .................................................................... 14-51
[21] Execute Adjustment Operation ........................................... 14-52
[22] Magnification Adjustment.................................................... 14-53
[23] Timing Adjustment .............................................................. 14-54
[24] Centring Adjustment............................................................ 14-56
[25] Printer Gamma Sensor Adjustment .................................... 14-57
Index
Section 14: Key Operator Mode (continued)
ix
Features of the CF5001
AE - Automatic Exposure
Automatically adjusts exposure to compensate for quality of the original.
AMS - Automatic Magnification Selection
Automatically selects an appropriate magnification ratio when Paper Size is selected
manually. Automatically selected when the AMS key is touched.
APS - Automatic Paper Selection
Automatically selects copy paper size to match the original documents.
ATS - Automatic Tray Switching
Automatically switches tray to allow copying to continue without interruption if the
selected tray empties while copying is in progress.
Auto Layout
The original image on the platen glass or in the document feeder is copied and
centred on a sheet.
Auto Low Power
Automatically lowers the power after a specified period of copier inactivity.
Auto Reset
Automatically resets to auto mode defaults after a specified period of copier
inactivity.
Auto Shut-Off
Automatically shuts off the main power after a specified period of copier inactivity.
Booklet
Creates a multiple page signature booklet copied on both sides of paper in 1a2 or
2a2 copy mode.
Chapter
Starts chapter pages on the right side (front pages) of the finished document. Only
duplex mode (1a2) is compatible with this feature.
Colour Mode
Copies full-coloured originals or makes single-coloured copies, and also adjusts
image quality of the copies.
Combination
Copies a fixed number (2, 4, or 8) of pages onto one sheet of copy paper to create a
draft copy of a multi-page report at the same time as saving paper.
Copy Density
Manually selects up to 9 density levels.
Copy Mode
Selects the desired simplex mode (1a1 or 2a1); or duplex mode (1a2 or 2a2).
Counter List
Displays on the screen and prints the following data: total counter of the machine,
copier counter, print counter and the date when the counter started.
Features of the CF5001 (continued)
x
Density Shift
Shifts each of nine density levels in four density modes (Auto, Text, Photo, Map) to
three levels lighter or three levels darker.
Dual Page
Copies both pages of an open book or A3/B4 size sheet separately onto two A4/B5
size sheets in 1a1 mode or separately onto each side of one A4/B5 size sheet in
1a2 mode. You can use the Dual Page mode with the Front or Front/Back cover
mode. The cover page(s) will be scanned and copied normally before image division
is performed on the other pages.
Frame/Fold Erasure
Erases border and/or fold image area using Frame (1 - 300 mm), Fold (1 - 99 mm), or
Frame & Fold.
Image Insert
Stores pages in memory from the platen glass, and inserts the pages into a
document copied from the document feeder.
Image Shift
Creates or removes a binding margin at the top, bottom, right and left edges (shift
amount from 0 ~ 250 mm, in 1 mm increments); reduces image to prevent image
loss (reduce & shift amount from 0 ~ 250 mm, in 1 mm increments).
Interrupt Copying
Interrupts copying-in-progress to perform an urgent copy, using any of the copier
features for the interrupt job.
Job Memory
Programs up to 30 jobs and recalls each job by job number, as needed. All
compatible platen glass functions can be programmed into Job Memory directly after
they are selected.
Job Status
Displays the Job Status Screen to view the current machine status, changes the
operation order of reserve jobs, deletes the unused reserve job, or displays the
previous job list.
Lens Mode (Fixed, Zoom)
Selects fixed ratios, four reduction, four enlargement, and three user-set ratios.
Zoom ratios can be selected from 25.0% ~ 400.0% in 0.1% increments.
Machine Status Confirmation
Displays the current machine status on LCD for confirmation.
Manual Shut-off
Shuts off the machine power when pressing [POWER SAVER ON/OFF] on the
control panel.
Mixed Original
Copies mixed size originals from the document feeder in APS or AMS mode. APS
automatically selects the paper size of each original. AMS mode allows you to select
one paper size for all originals.
Features of the CF5001 (continued)
xi
Multi-Page Enlargement
Makes an enlarged copy, made up of several copied pages divided and enlarged
from an original image.
Network Function by Web Browser
When the machine is connected to a PC over a network, uses a web browser on the
PC to check the machine or job information, and to perform the Key Operator
settings concerning the network environment.
Non-Image Area Erase
When copying from the platen glass when the document cover is open, copies only
the image area and not the exposed area of glass, which would otherwise copy as
black.
Non STD Size for Multi-Sheet Bypass Tray
Enters the special paper size to be loaded on the Multi-sheet bypass tray using the
touch screen keypad in order to avoid paper misfeed.
Non STD Size for Original
Identifies the special original size which the CF5001 cannot detect, in order to select
the optimal paper size for copying or printing.
Original Image
Enhances photo image in PHOTO mode, regular image in TEXT/PHOTO mode, text
image in TEXT mode, coloured image with small text in MAP mode.
Original Type
Improves the image quality by specifying the printed original type.
Output Mode for Machine with FN-120/FN-9 Finisher Installed:
Non-Sort, Sort, Staple-Sort, and Group modes using the primary (main) tray
Non-Sort Face Down exit, Non-Sort Face Up exit, Group Face Down exit, and
Group Face Up exit modes using the secondary (sub) tray
Fold and Stitch & Fold modes using the booklet tray (FN-9 only)
Selects an output tray and output mode on the Output Mode popup menu.
Output for Machine with no Finisher Installed:
Non-sort, Rotation sort, Group, and Rotation group modes are available in
combination with Face down or Face up exit.
Selects an output mode on the Output Mode popup menu.
Output for FN-120/FN-9 Finisher with Cover Inserter D Installed:
Cover Sheet mode
Off-Line Finishing mode
For details, see Section 8: Advanced Information.
Overlay
Scans an original image and overlays it on the pages of another document. For
example, you may want to incorporate a page heading, graphic design or logo into
the pages of your document.
Overlay Memory
Same as for Overlay except the overlay image is stored in memory.
Features of the CF5001 (continued)
xii
Paper Capacity
Total 1,750 sheets, including three 500-sheet trays and a 250-sheet Multi-sheet
bypass tray.
Total 4,250 sheets, including 2,500-sheet optional large capacity tray.
Platen Memory
Scans documents into memory from the platen glass and/or the document feeder
and inserts the pages into another document copied from the document feeder. If an
incompatible function is selected in this mode, the latter function will not be selected,
and an Error message will be displayed.
Power Saver
Automatically turns off all but nominal power supply after a specified period of copier
inactivity, for optimal efficiency. Power is returned after a brief warm up period by
pressing [POWER SAVER ON/OFF] on the control panel.
Program Job
Scans documents into memory while designating different copy conditions for each
original, then prints all the documents collectively.
Proof Copy
To ensure correct output before running multiple copies, run a proof copy by pressing
[PROOF COPY] on the control panel or touching PROOF COPY on the Check
Screen.
Punch Mode for FN-120/FN-9 Finisher with PK-5 Punch Kit Installed:
Punches four holes in output copies.
Repeat
Selects the horizontal image area across the page, and repeats it down the page as
many times as the repeat width setting (10 ~ 150 mm) permits in manual or auto.
Reserve
Scans in subsequent copy jobs while the CF5001 is busy printing or copying.
Reverse Image
Reverses the positive image to negative image or vice versa in the selected colour
mode.
Rotation
Rotates the image before copying when the portrait/landscape orientation of the
original is different from the orientation of the copy paper.
Rotation Exit (Rotation Sort / Rotation Group)
When no Finisher is installed, Rotation Exit alternately switches the horizontal and
vertical orientation of each sorted set as it outputs to the exit tray. Be sure to load
both A4 and A4R in separate trays (including the Multi-sheet bypass tray) before
selecting this feature.
Sheet/Cover Insertion
Insert up to 30 blank or copied sheets from any tray including the Multi-sheet bypass
tray, or inserts blank or copied front and back covers from any tray including the
Multi-sheet bypass tray to enhance the presentation of multi-page documents.
Features of the CF5001 (continued)
xiii
Stamp
Prints watermark, regular stamp, date/time, page number, and numbering onto the
output copies to enhance the presentation and usefulness of the copies.
Staple
Selects the stapling position and number of staples.
STD Size (Special)
Detects the standard paper sizes which cannot normally be detected when loaded in
a main body tray or Multi-sheet bypass tray.
Tab Paper
Copies onto tabbed sheets from tabbed originals, allowing the image on the tab part
of the original to be printed on the same part of the tabbed copy paper.
Three-Fold Mode for Machine with FN-9 Finisher Installed:
Folds A4 or 8.5”x11”R output copies in three.
Trimming Mode for FN-9 Finisher with TMG-3 Trimming Unit Installed:
Trim the end of folded or stitched & folded booklets.
Weekly Timer
Can be set according to the needs of each work environment. Turns main body
power Off/On daily or weekly, during lunch time, on holidays, and also enables the
Timer Interrupt mode, which allows temporary use of the machine even when the
machine is in the daily, weekly, or holiday Off mode.
Wide Size Paper
Copies onto paper slightly larger than the specified regular size.
Z-Folded Original
This feature sets the RADF to accept Z-folded originals.
xiv
Legal Restrictions on Copying
Certain types of documents must never be copied with the purpose or intent to pass
copies of such documents off as the originals.
The following is not a complete list, but is meant to be used as a guide to responsible
copying.
<Financial Instruments>
Personal checks
•Travelers checks
Money orders
Certificates of deposit
Bonds or other certificates of indebtedness
Stock certificates
<Legal Documents>
Food stamps
Postage stamps (canceled or uncanceled)
Checks or drafts drawn by government agencies
Internal revenue stamps (canceled or uncanceled)
Passports
Immigration papers
Motor vehicle licenses and titles
House and property titles and deeds
<General>
Identification cards, badges, or insignias
Copyrighted works without permission of the copyright owner
You are prohibited under any circumstances to copy domestic or foreign currencies,
or works of art without permission of the copyright owner.
When in doubt about the nature of a document, consult with legal counsel.
Basic
1
Section 1:
Safety Information
Precautions for Installation and Use
Caution Labels and Indicators.......................................... 1-2
Requirements for Safe Use .............................................. 1-6
Regulations..................................................................... 1-13
1-2
Caution Labels and Indicators
The caution labels and indicators are attached to the machine areas, as shown
below, where you are advised to pay special attention to avoid any dangerous
situations or serious injury.
High temperature!
CAUTION
Température élevée!
ATTENTION
¡Temperatura alta!
¡Temperatura alta!
PRECAUCION
Heisse Oberfläche!
Alta temperatura!
ATTENZIONE
PRECAUCION
VORSICHT
High temperature!
Température élevée!
Alta temperatura!
CUIDADO
ATTENTION
CAUTION
High temperature!
High temperature!
CAUTION
Température élevée!
Température élevée!
ATTENTION
¡Temperatura alta!
¡Temperatura alta!
PRECAUCION
Alta temperatura!
CUIDADO
CAUTION
ATTENTION
PRECAUCION
CUIDADO
Heisse Oberfläche!
Alta temperatura!
ATTENZIONE
PRECAUCION
VORSICHT
ATTENTION
CAUTION
ATTENZIONE
ATTENTION
CAUTION
VORSICHT
PRECAUCION
The fixing unit is very
hot.
To avoid getting burned
DO NOT TOUCH.
DO NOT put your hand
between the main body
and developing fixing unit;
otherwise you may be
injured.
The conveyance fixing
unit is heavy.
Use care and draw it out
gently; otherwise you
may be injured.
DO NOT put your hand between the
main body and developing fixing
unit; otherwise you may be injured.
(Right side of the fixing unit)
(Top surface of
the fixing unit)
(Inside of the fixing unit)
CAUTION
CAUTION
CAUTION
CAUTION
Caution Labels and Indicators (continued)
1-3
DO NOT throw the toner
recovery box into a fire. If it
is thrown into a fire, the
toner may ignite and cause
a dangerous situation.
To avoid any unexpected
injury, DO NOT put your hand
into the holes (3 places) on
the bottom plate of the LCT.
DO NOT INSERT
your finger into
the two RADF
hinge portions;
otherwise you
may be injured.
(Rear side of the RADF)
(Inside of the LCT)
(Right rear side
of the Main body)
CAUTION
WARNING
CAUTION
Caution Labels and Indicators (continued)
1-4
CAUTION
CAUTION
CAUTION
Inside the lower paper
exit outlet is the roller
drive unit. DO NOT put
your hand into it;
otherwise you may be
injured.
Use care after opening the
paper exit outlet. DO NOT put
your hand into it; otherwise
you may be injured.
(Finisher with Cover inserter)
To avoid injury, DO NOT
put your hand on top of
the printed sheets.
Be sure to hold both sides
of the printed sheets when
removing them, and DO
NOT leave your hand on
the printed sheets while
the primary (main) tray
goes up.
DO NOT insert your
finger into the bottom
of the upper part of the
feeder when returning
to its original position;
otherwise you may be
injured.
CAUTION
Caution Labels and Indicators (continued)
1-5
Burns or injury may occur from touching the areas detailed in the
caution labels and caution indicators. Do not remove caution labels
or indicators. If any caution label or caution indicator is soiled,
please clean to make legible. If you cannot make them legible, or if
the caution label or indicator is damaged, please contact your
service representative for replacement labels.
The following indicators are used on the caution labels or in this manual to
categorize the level of safety cautions.
DANGER:
Action highly liable to cause death or serious injury.
WARNING:
Action liable to cause death or serious injury.
CAUTION:
Action liable to cause minor injury, machine trouble or physical damage.
If you find any of these indicators when removing jammed paper, adding toner, or
reading the manual, be sure to follow the information.
If the safety cautions in the manual become illegible due to soilage, etc.,
please procure a new copy from your service representative.
1-6
Requirements for Safe Use
To ensure your safe use of the machine, the following describes the precautions you
are required to observe without fail for the power source of the machine and during
installation and routine handling. Be sure to read and observe them.
Power Source
CAUTION: Plug Socket
A plug socket is limited in capacity. Use only a power source with the correct rating
for the machine; otherwise, hazardous situations such as smoking or overheating
may occur.
Avoid multiple connections in the same outlet. Do not use multiple outlet adaptors.
CAUTION: Power Plug and Cord
Be sure to insert the power plug firmly into the power socket. Otherwise an
accident may occur as a result of smoking or overheating. If the inserted power
plug is loose in the socket, even after it has been positively inserted, disconnect
the plug and contact your electrical contractor.
For plug cable equipment, the socket-outlet shall be installed near the equipment
and shall be easily accessible.
Do not bend or crush the power cord. If your copier power cord is bent or damaged
in any way, contact your service representative immediately. Do not attempt to
repair it yourself, and do not continue to operate the copier. A damaged power cord
may result in overheating, a short circuit, or fire.
Do not bundle or coil the power cord of the copier. Otherwise an accident may
occur as a result of overheating or fire.
CAUTION: Connecting Multiple Loads to One Socket Outlet Prohibited
Never connect multiple loads to one socket outlet using a multi-outlet extension cord
or branched socket. Otherwise an accident may occur as a result of overheating or
fire.
CAUTION: Extension Cord
An extension cord must never be used with this machine.
Requirements for Safe Use (continued)
1-7
Environment
CAUTION: Prevention of Fire
Do not install near flammable materials,
curtains and volatile combustibles, that can
catch or cause fire.
CAUTION: Prevention of Short Circuit
Do not install the copier where it could be
splashed with rain water, or water from a tap,
to avoid a short circuit.
CAUTION: Temperature and Humidity
Keep away from direct sunlight, heat
sources such as stoves, cool air from an air
conditioner and hot air from a heater.
Avoid any environment that is outside the
range shown below:
10 to 30°C in temperature
10 to 80% in humidity
CAUTION: Ventilation
Keep the installation place well-ventilated.
Keep away from dust or corrosive gases.
These materials may cause poor image
quality.
During the use of machine, the machine
generates ozone in an insufficient amount to cause any hazard to the human body.
However, if the machine is used in a poorly ventilated room, many copies are
made, or more than one copier is used at the same time, an odor may be detected.
Ensure adequate ventilation for a comfortable working environment.
CAUTION: Vibration
Do not install on a floor which is subject to
vibration or is not level.
CAUTION: Transportation
Be sure to contact your service representative
when moving or transporting the machine. If you
move the machine with the Hard disk drive or
Memory unit installed, machine trouble may be
caused by vibration.
Requirements for Safe Use (continued)
1-8
CAUTION: Installation Space
Allow sufficient space for facilitating copy operation, changing parts, and periodic
inspection. Leave an adequate space behind the machine to let hot air out from the
rear fan.
760
315
1275
1591
1591
1475
200
1021 1021
570
100 100
889
120
950
1959
470
CF5001 + OC-2 (Front) CF5001 + OC-2 (Right side)
Unit: mm Unit: mm
760656
100
410
1701
1901
85
760
315
1275
1619
1619
1619
1475
200
200
1021
1021
1021
158
440
440
100
100
889
120
950
1959
499
CF5001 + AFR-20 (Front)
Unit: mm Unit: mm
CF5001 + AFR-20 (Right side)
CF5001 + AFR-20 + FN-120 (Front)
Unit: mm
100
158
Requirements for Safe Use (continued)
1-9
Finisher primary (main) tray of FN-120/FN-9 Finisher gradually goes down
while printed materials output. DO NOT allow any object to interfere with the
operation of the tray on the left side of the finisher, as any interference may
cause damage to the finisher.
760
656
949
410
1280
3162
3462
85
712
150 150
760
656
100
100
410
600
2213
889
120
950
1619
1619
1619
2413
1959
85
712
1021
1021
1021
158
440
440
499
450
CF5001 + AFR-20 + FN-9
+ Cover Inserter D + C-208 (Front)
CF5001 + AFR-20 + C-208 (Right Side)
CF5001 + AFR-20 + FN-9 + Cover Inserter D
+ C-208 + FN-120/FN-9 + TMG Kit A + TMG-3 (Front)
Unit: mm
Unit: mm
Unit: mm
158
Requirements for Safe Use (continued)
1-10
Precautions for Routine Handling
WARNING: Toner Recovery Box
DO NOT THROW the toner recovery box into a fire. If it is thrown into a fire, the toner
may ignite and cause a dangerous situation.
CAUTION: Actions in Response to Troubles
If the Service Call screen is displayed and copier operations cannot be continued
anymore, stop the operation to prevent any unexpected accident. Write down the
report code as stated on the 2nd line of the message, then switch off the copier
and disconnect from the power socket. Contact your service representative and
inform them of the report code.
• Do not touch the high temperature parts indicated with CAUTION labels or
described in the manual.
Do not touch the inside of the machine for any other purpose than removing
jammed paper or adding toner.
If machine repair is necessary, be sure to contact your service representative.
Never attempt to repair it by yourself.
If any abnormal sound, smell or smoke comes from the machine, immediately stop
using it, turn off the power switch, disconnect the power plug and contact your
service representative.
If the breaker trips or the fuse blows, turn off the power switch, reset the breaker or
the fuse, and turn on the machine. If the same situation occurs again, contact your
service representative.
Ensure the replacement fuse conforms with the rating of the power source. Never
use a fuse with an incorrect rating.
CAUTION: Prevention of Fire
Do not use volatile combustibles, such as thinner or alcohol, near the machine.
CAUTION: Prohibition of Machine
Modification
Do not modify or remove any parts by yourself.
Requirements for Safe Use (continued)
1-11
CAUTION: Prevention of Machine Troubles
Do not drop small metallic objects, such as paper
clips or staples, inside the machine.
Do not place any heavy or hard objects such as a
vase, books or ornaments on the machine.
CAUTION: Recommendation of Periodic
Check
Be sure to periodically check the following points:
(1) The main cord or the power plug does not generate abnormal heat.
(2) The power plug is not inserted loosely or the cord is not cut or scratched.
(3) The grounding wire is correctly connected.
(4) The power plug or the power outlet is not covered with dust.
If you find anything abnormal in the above items, stop using the machine and contact
your service representative.
CAUTION: Toner
Keep the toner cartridge away from children. The toner is nontoxic; however if you
inhale or contact with eyes by accident, flush with water and seek medical advice.
Do not throw the empty toner cartridge into a fire. If it is thrown into a fire the toner
may ignite and cause a dangerous situation.
CAUTION: Paper
Check paper to be sure it conforms to the specifications outlined in Section 12.
Do not use paper with staples or paper that conducts electricity (silver, carbon,
etc.), otherwise an accident may occur as a result of fire.
To avoid machine trouble, do not use heat-sensitive paper, coloured transparency,
or paper specifically designed for ink-jet printers, such as photo-paper.
CAUTION: Power Saver and Weekly Timer
In Power Saver mode the copier is still connected to the main power supply and
power is still applied to certain areas of the machine. To avoid any unexpected
troubles turn the power OFF when not using the copier for long periods of time.
When the Weekly Timer function is operating, turning power OFF will disable the
function.
CAUTION: Inside the Booklet Mode Outlet
Inside the Booklet mode outlet is the roller drive unit. DO NOT put your hand into it,
when removing the folded or stitched & folded sheet; otherwise you may be injured.
CAUTION: Finisher Paper Exit Outlet
To avoid injury when stapling large size copies, DO NOT put your hand into the open
Paper Exit Outlet.
Requirements for Safe Use (continued)
1-12
CAUTION: Fixing Unit
The internal fixing unit is very hot. To avoid getting burned, DO NOT TOUCH. Be
careful when withdrawing the fixing unit.
WARNING: Drum Unit
The internal drum unit generates a high voltage.
To avoid an electrical shock, DO NOT TOUCH.
CAUTION: LCT Bottom Plate
To avoid any unexpected injury, DO NOT put your hand into the holes (3 places) on
the bottom plate of the LCT.
CAUTION: Disposal of Copier
Do not dispose of this copier yourself. Contact your service representative, who can
arrange for its safe disposal.
If you change the place of installation, please contact your service representative.
CAUTION: Paper Capacity for the Exit Tray
The exit tray capacity is max. 150 sheets (90 g/m
2
paper). If a copy run of more than
150 is required, be sure to remove the copies from the exit tray before the maximum
capacity is reached. Failure to do so will cause the copier to jam.
CAUTION: FN-120/FN-9 Finisher Paper Capacity
The FN-120 Finisher is equipped with two exit trays, and FN-9 Finisher is equipped
with three exit trays.
Select an exit tray and output mode on the Output Mode popup menu.
To prevent paper misfeed, do not exceed the paper capacity of the Finisher.
When the total number of copies in the copy run exceeds the capacity stated in
Section 12, be sure to unload the exit tray while the copier is still copying. Failure to
do so will cause the copier to jam.
CAUTION: FN-120/FN-9 Finisher Primary (Main) Tray
When printed materials are removed from the primary (main) tray of the Finisher, the
tray goes up automatically. To avoid injury, DO NOT put your hand on top of the
printed sheets. Be sure to hold both sides of the printed sheets when removing them,
and DO NOT leave your hand on the printed sheets while the primary tray goes up.
1-13
Regulations
CE Marking (Declaration of Conformity)
This product complies with the following EU directives:
89/336/EEC, 73/23/EEC and 93/68/EEC directives.
This declaration is valid for the area of the European Union.
Laser Safety
This is a digital machine which operates by means of a laser. There is no possibility
of danger from the laser, provided the machine is operated according to the
instructions in this manual.
Since radiation emitted by the laser is completely confined within protective housing,
the laser beam cannot escape from the machine during any phase of user operation.
This machine is certified as a Class 1 laser product. This means the machine does
not produce hazardous laser radiation.
Regulations (continued)
1-14
Internal Laser Radiation
Maximum radiation power: 2.02 mW
Wavelength: 645-660 nm
This product employs a Class IIIb Laser Diode that emits an invisible laser beam.
The Laser Diode and Scanning Polygon Mirror are incorporated in the print head
unit.
The print head unit is NOT A FIELD SERVICE ITEM.
Therefore, the print head unit should not be opened under any circumstances.
x 4
Regulations (continued)
1-15
For the United States
CDRH regulation
This machine is certified as a Class 1 Laser product under the Radiation
Performance Standard according to the Food, Drug and Cosmetic Act of 1990.
Compliance is mandatory for Laser products marketed in the United States and is
reported to the Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food
and Drug Administration of the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services
(DHHS). This means that the device does not produces hazardous laser radiation.
The label shown on page 2-16 indicates compliance with the CDRH regulations and
must be attached to laser products marketed in the United States.
This is a semiconductor laser. The maximum power of the laser diode is 7 mW and
the wavelength is 645-660 nm.
For European Users
This is a semiconductor laser. The maximum power of the laser diode is 7 mW and
the wavelength is 645-660 nm.
For Denmark Users
Dansk: Dette er en halvlederlaser. Laserdiodens højeste styrke er 7 mW og bølgelængden
er 645-660 nm
.
CAUTION:
Use of controls, adjustments or performance of procedures other than
thosespecified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
CAUTION:
Use of controls, adjustments or performance of procedures other than those
specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
ADVARSEL
Usynlig laserstråling ved åbning, når sikkerhedsafbrydere er ude af
funktion. Undgå udsættelse for stråling. Klasse 1 laser produkt der opfylder
IEC60825 sikkerheds kravene.
Regulations (continued)
1-16
For Finland, Sweden Users
Tämä on puolijohdelaser. Laserdiodin suurin teho on 7 mW ja aallonpituus on 645-
660 nm.
Det här är en halvledarlaser. Den maximala effekten för laserdioden är 7 mW och
glängden är 645-660 nm.
For Norway Users
Dette en halvleder laser. Maksimal effekt till laserdiode er 7 mW og bølgelengde er
645-660 nm.
LOUKAN 1 LASERLAITE
KLASS 1 LASER APPARAT
VAROITUS!
Laitteen Käyttäminen muulla kuin tässä käyttöohjeessa mainitulla tavalla saattaa
altistaa käyttäjän turvallisuusluokan 1 ylittävälle näkymättömälle lasersäteilylle.
VARNING!
Om apparaten används på annat sätt än i denna bruksanvisning specificerats,
kan användaren utsättas för osynlig laserstrålning, som överskrider gränsen för
laserklass 1.
VARO!
Avattaessa ja suojalukitus ohitettaessa olet alttiina näkymättömälle
lasersäteilylle. Älä katso säteeseen.
VARNING!
Osynlig laserstrålning när denna del är öppnad och spärren är urkopplad.
Betrakta ej strålen.
ADVERSEL
Dersom apparatet brukes på annen måte enn spesifisert i denne
bruksanvisning, kan brukeren utsettes for unsynlig laserstråling som
overskrider grensen for laser klass 1.
Regulations (continued)
1-17
Laser Safety Label
A laser safety label is attached to the outside of the machine as shown below.
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
APPAREIL A RAYONNEMENT
LASER DE CLASSE 1
LASER KLASSE 1 PRODUKT
KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
1-6-1, Marunouchi, Chiyoda-ku, Tokyo, Japan
MANUFACTURED: KHK
THIS PRODUCT COMPLIES WITH 21 CFR
CHAPTER I, SUBCHAPTER J
Regulations (continued)
1-18
Ozone Release
NOTE
= Locate the Machine in a Well Ventilated Room =
A negligible amount of ozone is generated during normal operation of this machine.
An unpleasant odor may, however, be created in poorly ventilated rooms during
extensive machine operations. For a comfortable, healthy, and safe operating
environment, it is recommended that the room well ventilated.
REMARQUE
= Placer l’appareil dans une pièce largement ventilée =
Une quantité d’ozone négligable est dégagée pendant le fonctionnement de
l’appareil quand celui-ci est utilisé normalement. Cependant, une odeur désagréable
peut être ressentie dans les pièces dont l’aération est insuffisante et lorsque une
utilisation prolongée de l’appareil est effectuée. Pour avoir la certitude de travailler
dans un environnement réunissant des conditions de confort, santé et de sécurité, il
est préférable de bien aérer la pièce ou se trouve l’appareil.
2
Section 2:
Machine Information
Machine Configuration, Turning On
the Power and Loading Paper
Machine Configuration...................................................... 2-2
Turning On the Power Switch ......................................... 2-16
Loading Paper ................................................................ 2-22
2-2
Machine Configuration
External Machine Items
1 AFR-20 Duplexing
document feeder (option)
10 Tray 3
3 Work table
8 Tray 4 (C-208 Large
capacity cassette) (option)
11 Tray 2
12 Tray 1
13 Front door
2 OC-2 Original cover
(option)
4 Key counter
(option)
14 FN-120 Finisher
(option)
15 FN-9 Finisher (option)
16 Trimming kit A (option)
17 TMG-3 Trimming unit
(option)
18 Cover inserter D
(option)
19 Power switch
20 LCD Touch screen
21 Control panel
5 Toner access door
9 Right side door
6 Toner recovery box
7 Multi-sheet
bypass tray
Machine Configuration (continued)
2-3
1 RADF (AFR-20 Duplexing Document Feeder) (option) automatically feeds
multiple originals one at a time to the platen glass for copying. AFR-20 appears
as RADF in the screen message.
2 OC-2 Original cover (option) covers documents to be copied and holds them in
place.
3Work table provides a convenient workspace for documents both before and
after copying.
4 Key counter (option) manages the number of copies made on the machine.
5 Toner access door opens to replenish the black toner or colour toner.
6 Toner recovery box opens to replace the filled toner box with new one.
7 Multi-sheet bypass tray opens to use copy paper of the other size or type than
those loaded in the main body trays or LCT.
8 Tray 4 (C-208 Large capacity cassette) (option) holds 2,500 sheets (90 g/m
2
paper) from 13”x19” to B5. C-208 appears as LCT in the screen message.
9 Right side door opens to allow removal of mishandled paper.
10 Tray 3 (universal tray) is user-adjustable and holds 500 sheets (90 g/m
2
paper)
from 13”x19” to A5R.
11 Tray 2 (universal tray) is user-adjustable and holds 500 sheets (90 g/m
2
paper)
from 13”x19” to A5R.
12 Tray 1 (universal tray) is user-adjustable and holds 500 sheets (90 g/m
2
paper)
from 13”x19” to A5R.
13 Front door opens to allow removal of mishandled paper.
14 FN-120 Finisher (option) sorts, staple-sorts, or groups copies into finished
sets.
15 FN-9 Finisher (option) sorts, staple-sorts, or groups copies into finished sets.
FN-9 also folds or staples & folds copies into booklet-styled sets, or folds max. 3
copies in three.
16 Trimming kit A (option) connects the finisher and trimming unit.
17 TMG-3 Trimming unit (option) trims the end of booklet.
18 Cover inserter D (option) loads cover sheet paper and feeds the sheet as
cover to the sorted sets, used in combination with FN-120/FN-9 Finisher.
19 Power switch turns copier power On/Off when pressed.
20 LCD Touch screen displays interactive operation screens.
21 Control panel controls copier operations and displays messages as required.
Machine Configuration (continued)
2-4
Internal Machine Items
1 Lever A can be moved to withdraw the conveyance fixing unit for removal of
mishandled paper.
2 Fixing unit fuses the toner onto the copy paper.
3 Main power switch used only by service representative turns machine power
on/off when pressed.
4 Total counter indicates the total number of prints made.
5 Black print counter indicates the total number of the black prints made.
1 Lever A
2 Fixing unit
3 Main power
switch
4 Total counter
5 Black print counter
Machine Configuration (continued)
2-5
Standard/Optional Equipment
256MB Memory unit
HDD-7 Hard disk drive
Printer controller
(Fiery S300 50C-K)
Cover inserter D
PK-5 Punch kit
OC-2 Original cover
AFR-20 Duplexing document feeder
Key counter
Work table
FN-120 Finisher
FN-9 Finisher
CF5001
main body
TMG-3 Trimming unit
C-208 Large
capacity cassette
TMG kit A
Machine Configuration (continued)
2-6
Control Panel Layout
1 CONTRAST ADJUSTMENT DIAL can be turned to adjust the touch panel
contrast.
2 LCD TOUCH SCREEN displays machine and copying status, help information,
interactive screens, and touch keys for selecting all functions.
3 CHECK displays a screen showing all settings that are selected for the current
job.
4HELP displays a screen with help for the currently selected function, or to
access the Key Operator Mode Screen.
5 KEYPAD enters numeric values.
6 PRINTER switches the machine operation mode to printer. (This key does not
function at present.)
7 SCANNER switches the machine operation mode to scanner.
8COPY switches the machine operation mode to copy.
9TIMER lights when the timer function is set.
10 INTERRUPT stops copying in progress to allow copying from the platen glass.
11 POWER SAVER ON/OFF activates power-saving mode for times when the
copier is inactive, or activates Timer Interrupt mode when Weekly Timer
function is active.
12 STOP stops the copying sequence; deletes the stored memory.
13 PROOF COPY outputs a single set of copies to confirm whether the current
settings are selected properly.
14 START activates copying or scanning.
15 [C] (CLEAR QTY.) allows resetting of print quantity.
16 [P] (COUNTER) displays the Counter Screen or accesses programming modes
for setting special functions.
17 AUTO RESET restores copier to automatic mode settings or to Key Operator
settings.
12 45671110983
121319 18 14151617
Machine Configuration (continued)
2-7
18 JOB MEMORY displays screens for selecting job store/job recall functions.
19 ACCESS sets the machine to allow copying only when the EKC password is
entered.
The touch screen of the control panel is covered with glass. Do not
drop heavy objects on the glass or put excess weight or pressure on
it, otherwise the glass may be scratched or break to cause injury.
When the Call for Service Screen (p. 5-2) is displayed, be sure to
contact your service representative immediately.
The control panel of this machine can be slightly lowered to three angled positions
to ensure easy access by anyone, regardless of the physical or positional status of
the operator. Your authorized service representative can make this setting for you.
Machine Configuration (continued)
2-8
Basic Screen
1 Folder keys:
FREE JOB is selected to specify a copy job conditions.
When scanning starts, FREE JOB changes to SCAN JOB, then changes to
PRINT JOB when the machine starts printing.
FREE JOB at the right side of SCAN JOB or PRINT JOB can be touched to
specify a reserve job conditions. Up to 9 reserve jobs can be set. The arrow
keys at the right side of folder keys are used to scroll.
2 Word icons:
ADD TONER icon is displayed when toner supply becomes low. The toner
colour to be supplied is indicated by a letter; C (cyan), M (magenta), Y (yellow),
or K (black).
Printer icon indicates the machine status when operating as a printer.
3 Graphic icons:
Original direction icon indicates the original direction specified on the Special
Original popup menu.
Image adjust icon indicates the enhance mode specified on the Special
Original popup menu.
Rotation icon is displayed when Rotation automatically functions.
Toner recovery box icon is displayed when replacement of the toner recovery
box is due.
PM icon is displayed when preventive maintenance is due.
4 Message area displays the machine status and procedure required at that
time.
1 Folder keys 9 Memory indicator
10 STATUS key
2 Word icons 8 Count/Set indicator
11 IMAGE ADJUST key
15 STORE key
16 Lens mode area
17 Paper size area19 Colour mode area
18 Copy mode area20 Output mode keys
21 Output icon area
12 SPECIAL ORIGINAL key
13 APPLICATION key
14 ROTATION OFF key
3 Graphic icons
5 Reserve job
6 Original count
4 Message area
7 TYPE/SIZE key
Machine Configuration (continued)
2-9
5 Reserve job counts the reserve jobs already specified.
6 Original count counts the original pages placed in the document feeder as
they are scanned.
7 TYPE/SIZE key appears when the Bypass key is selected, and is touched to
specify the type and size of the paper loaded in the Multi-sheet bypass tray.
8 Count/Set indicator indicates the print quantity entered from the control panel
keypad, and also indicates the print count on the left of the set count while
printing.
9 Memory indicator indicates the remaining memory available for the next
operation.
10 STATUS key is touched to view the current job status, to change the printing
order of reserve jobs, or to cancel printing a reserve job.
11 IMAGE ADJUST key is touched to display five sorts of the Image Adjustment
Setting Screens to adjust the image quality.
12 SPECIAL ORIGINAL key is touched to specify the condition of originals to be
scanned.
13 APPLICATION key is touched to select various application functions.
14 ROTATION OFF key is touched to release the Rotation function.
15 STORE key is touched to store scanned images into memory.
16 Lens mode area is used to select the desired magnification ratio.
17 Paper size area is used to select the desired paper size or APS.
18 Copy mode area is used to select the copy mode (1a1, 1a2, 2a1, or 2a2).
19 Colour mode area is used to specify the desired colour mode (single colour,
black, full colour, or auto).
20 Output mode keys are used to specify the desired output mode.
21 Output icon area displays the appropriate output icon according to the
selected output mode.
Machine Configuration (continued)
2-10
FN-120/FN-9 Finisher (with PK-5 Punch Kit)
1 Finisher door opens to the internal Finisher to allow clearing mishandled paper,
replenishing staples, and emptying waste basket of Punch kit.
2Booklet tray (FN-9 Finisher only) holds sets output in Fold mode, Stapling &
Fold mode, or Three-fold mode.
3 Primary (Main) tray holds sets output in Non-sort mode, Sort mode (offset),
Staple-sort mode, or Group mode (offset).
4 Secondary (Sub) tray holds sets output in Sort mode or Group mode with face
down/up mode.
1 Finisher door1 Finisher door
2 Booklet tray
(FN-9 Finisher only)
3 Primary
(Main) tray
3 Primary
(Main) tray
4 Secondary
(Sub) tray
4 Secondary
(Sub) tray
FN-9 Finisher
FN-120 Finisher
Machine Configuration (continued)
2-11
1 Entrance lever opens downward to remove mishandled paper.
2 PK-5 Punch kit (option) punches file holes in the output copies.
3 Cover sheet conveyance lever opens to remove mishandled paper.
4 Sub tray conveyance lever opens to remove mishandled paper.
5 Stacker conveyance lever opens to remove mishandled paper.
6 Lower lever opens to remove mishandled paper.
7 Stacker unit knob can be turned to ease removal of mishandled paper from
the Stacker unit.
8 Stacker unit folds or stitches & folds copies into booklet-styled sets, and also
folds max. 3 copies in three.
9 Waste basket (option) holds waste paper punched out.
10 Stacker unit handle withdraws unit to allow removal of mishandled paper and
replacement of staple cartridge.
11 Cartridge housing holds staple cartridge to be replaced when supplying
staples.
1 Entrance lever
1 Entrance lever
2 PK-5
Punch kit
(option)
3 Cover sheet
conveyance
lever
3 Cover sheet
conveyance
lever
4 Sub tray
conveyance lever
6 Lower lever
7 Stacker unit
knob
8 Stacker unit
9 Trash basket
(option)
11 Cartridge housing
10 Stacker unit handle
4 Sub tray
conveyance lever
5 Stacker
conveyance
lever
FN-9 Finisher
with PK-5 Punch kit
FN-120 Finisher
Machine Configuration (continued)
2-12
Cover Inserter D
1 Cover inserter control panel controls cover inserter operations.
2 Upper unit release lever can be moved to slide the upper unit of cover inserter
for removal of mishandled paper.
3 Upper tray guide plates hold cover sheets to fix the position.
4Upper tray holds cover sheets for use in cover sheet output mode.
5Lower tray holds cover sheets for use in cover sheet output mode or a copied
set in manual stapling/punching/three-fold mode.
6 Lower tray guide plates hold cover sheets to fix the position.
1 Cover inserter
control panel
3 Upper tray guide plates
4 Upper tray
5 Lower tray
6 Lower tray
guide plates
2 Upper unit release lever
Machine Configuration (continued)
2-13
C-208 Large Capacity Cassette
1 LCT lever can be moved downward to ease removal of mishandled paper.
2 LCT top door opens to allow paper loading or removal of mishandled paper.
3 LCT left side door opens to allow removal of mishandled paper.
4 Paper loading button is pressed to lower the bottom plate to allow loading
paper.
5 Paper feed roller conveys the copy paper to the main body.
6 LCT paper guides hold copy paper to fix the position.
7 LCT paper guide knobs can be turned to move or fix the LCT paper guide.
8 Rear stopper fixes the rear end of copy paper.
9 Rear stopper knobs can be turned to move or fix the rear stopper.
10 LCT bottom plate goes up automatically when paper supply becomes low, and
goes down when the paper loading button is pressed.
2 LCT top door
3 LCT left side door
10 LCT bottom plate
8 Rear stopper
9 Rear stopper
knob
7 LCT paper guide knobs
6 LCT paper guides
5 Paper feed roller
4 Paper loading button
1 LCT lever
Machine Configuration (continued)
2-14
TMG-3 Trimming Unit
1 Front-right cover opens to allow removal of mishandled paper.
2 Front door opens to allow removal of mishandled paper or waste paper.
3 Trimmer stacker holds sets output in Trimming mode.
4 Trimmer unit tray slides to the left side each time a trimmed booklet is delivered.
5 Trimmer stacker cover opens to allow you to take out the finished sets.
6TMG kit A connects the Finisher and Trimming unit.
7 FN-9 Finisher allows the Trimming unit to be installed.
DO NOT place heavy objects on the trimmer stacker or apply any weight on it,
and DO NOT use it for storage.
Excessive weight applied to the inside or outside of the trimmer stacker will
damage the equipment.
5 Trimmer stacker cover
6 TMG kit A
7 FN-9 Finisher
4 Trimmer unit tray
2 Front door
1 Front-right cover
3 Trimmer stacker
Machine Configuration (continued)
2-15
1 Trimmer unit knob can be turned to ease removal of mishandled paper.
2 Waste basket holds waste paper cut off from the booklets.
3 Trimmer pressure release lever opens to allow removal of mishandled paper.
2 Wast basket
1 Trimmer unit knob
3 Trimmer pressure
release lever
2-16
Turning On the Power Switch
To Turn On the Power
1. Turn ON the power switch.
The power switch is located on the left side of the control panel.
The main power switch is located on the upper-left side of the internal main
body. Be sure not to use the main power switch in usual operation.
2. The Wake-up Screen and Warm-up Screens will be displayed.
A few seconds after the Wake-up Screen appears in the LCD touch screen,
seven types of Warm-up Screens will be displayed in succession for
approx. 7.0 minutes.
Turning On the Power Switch (continued)
2-17
You can set reserve jobs while the machine is warming up. Touch the LCD
screen to change the Warm-up Screen to the Basic Screen, then check that
the message “Ready to copy reserve” is displayed on the Basic Screen. See
p. 3-11 to p. 3-12.
3. The Basic Screen will be displayed.
The message on the Basic Screen will inform you that copying job is now
available.
When the initial settings are changed by the Key Operator, the modified
conditions will be displayed on the Basic Screen.
When “Enter E.K.C. password” is displayed, enter your password to use the
machine.
When “Set the key counter” is displayed, insert the key counter to its inlet
on the right side of the main body.
Turning On the Power Switch (continued)
2-18
To Turn Off the Power
1. Turn OFF the power switch.
The power switch is located on the left side of the control panel.
The touch screen and all the LEDs on the control panel will go out.
Be sure not to use the main power switch in usual operation.
When the machine is under control of the Weekly Timer function, turning off
the power switch will deactivate the function.
Turning On the Power Switch (continued)
2-19
Reducing the Power in Standby Mode (Auto Low Power)
This function automatically lowers the power after a specified period (initially 15
minutes) of copier inactivity. The LCD screen will go off.
The Auto Low Power function can be set to 5 minutes/ 10 minutes/ 15 minutes/
30 minutes/ 60 minutes/ 90 minutes/ 120 minutes/ 240 minutes in the Key
Operator mode. For information about the Key Operator setting, see p. 14-36.
To start a copying job, press any key on the control panel.
The Auto low power will be released and the LCD screen recovers usual brightness.
If the Auto Shut-Off function activates at the same time, the power will be
turned off without the LCD screen becoming dark.
The LCD screen will not go off during a duplex copying job or when the
Jam Position Screen is displayed.
Shutting Off Automatically (Auto Shut-Off)
This function automatically shuts off the power after a specified period (initially 90
minutes) of copier inactivity.
To start a copying job, press [POWER SAVER ON/OFF].
The copying operation will become available.
The Auto shut-off can be set for 30 minutes/ 60 minutes/ 90 minutes/ 120
minutes/ 240 minutes in the Key Operator mode. For information about the
Key Operator setting, see p. 14-36.
When “Timer interrupt mode / Enter password” is displayed after pressing
[POWER SAVER ON/OFF], see p. 8-2 and follow the procedure to
continue.
Turning On the Power Switch (continued)
2-20
Shutting Off / Reducing the Power Manually
Follow the procedure below to shut off the power manually.
The machine is initially set to activate the Manual Shut-Off function. The
Manual Low Power can be selected in the Key Operator setting. See p. 14-37
to p. 14-42.
1. Press [POWER SAVER ON/OFF] for one second or longer,
then release it.
If Manual Low Power is selected in the Key Operator setting, the machine
automatically activates the Low Power mode before releasing [POWER
SAVER ON/OFF].
2. The Shut-Off mode will be activated.
The [POWER SAVER ON/OFF] LED will be lit and all other LEDs and the
LCD screen will be turned off.
Be sure to press [POWER SAVER ON/OFF] for one second or longer,
otherwise the following message will be displayed and the Shut-Off (Low
Power) mode will not be activated.
To release the mode, press [POWER SAVER ON/OFF].
The machine will be available for copying operation.
Press POWER SAVER more than one second,
then release it for shut off mode
Press POWER SAVER continuously more
than one second for low power mode
Turning On the Power Switch (continued)
2-21
Entering an EKC Password (EKC)
The Electronic Key Counter (EKC) allows the Key Operator to monitor all copying
activities by controlling EKC password accounts. Copy quantity limits for specific
accounts can be set.
The EKC is not factory-set. An EKC password is required only when the EKC is
activated, a User Password is assigned, and “Enter E.K.C. password” is displayed on
the touch screen.
Copying will be available by following procedure:
For details of the EKC setting, see p. 14-12 to p. 14-19.
1. Enter EKC password.
Enter your 8-digit EKC password, using the keypad.
To set an EKC password, see p. 14-14 to p. 14-16.
If an invalid EKC password is entered, continue by entering the correct
password.
2. Press [START].
Your current copy count and copy limit will be displayed for 3 sec.
3. Start a copying job.
When the message changes to “Ready to copy”, copying job is available on
the machine.
When your copy count reaches the copy limit, the message “Copy limit
reached” will be displayed. In that case, contact the Key Operator to reset your
copy limit.
4. Press [ACCESS].
The initial state will be restored, with the message “Enter E.K.C. password”
displayed on the screen.
Current count / limit
018888/025000
2-22
Loading Paper
A paper indicator is shown on each tray key of the Basic Screen to indicate the paper
level (six levels are provided: ) of the tray. (The Multi-sheet bypass
tray displays only ” when paper in the tray becomes empty.)
When paper supply in a tray becomes low, the indicator “ ” appears on the tray
key, and then it changes to “ ” when paper in that tray becomes empty and the
tray key blinks on the screen.
Follow the procedure below to supply the empty tray with copy paper.
Each tray key displays a paper type and a number which indicates the paper
weight to be loaded. The following paper types are provided:
Normal, Recycled, Coloured, High Q, Coated, Colour sp, Tab paper, Exclusive A
to D
The numbers corresponding to the paper weight are:
1: 64~74 g/m
2
2: 75~80 g/m
2
3: 81~105 g/m
2
4: 106~162 g/m
2
5: 163~209 g/m
2
6: 210~256 g/m
2
(for LCT and Multi-sheet bypass tray only)
Key Operator can change this setting. See p. 14-21 to p. 14-22 for the main
body trays and the LCT. See p. 3-18 to p. 3-21 for the Multi-sheet bypass tray.
Be sure to load only the paper type and weight set for the tray.
Using paper with punch holes, copy result may not be satisfactory due to
the hole positions.
Loading Paper (continued)
2-23
Loading Paper in Tray 1 ,2, and 3
1. Withdraw tray 1, 2, or 3, and open the paper feed roller.
Do not withdraw the tray forcibly; otherwise you may be injured.
Withdraw the tray completely until the green line appears at the left rear side
of the tray. Otherwise, the paper feed roller may not open or machine trouble
may be caused.
To load the same size as loaded before, proceed to step 4.
If changing the paper size, proceed to the next step.
2. Adjust the position of the side guide plate.
Pull up the lock lever at the front, then slide the side guide plate to the
desired position.
See the size indication on the bottom plate of the tray to determine the
position of the side guide plate.
Push down the lock lever firmly until it clicks in position in order to fix the
side guide plate.
1
2
1
22
2
3
Loading Paper (continued)
2-24
Be sure to fix the side guide plate in position according to the size indication
on the tray bottom plate so that the machine can detect the correct paper size.
3. Adjust the position of the rear stopper.
To slide the rear stopper to the right, hold it at the upper part and slide it
while pressing down slightly.
On the other hand, hold the rear stopper at the lower part to slide it to the
left.
Be sure to press down the rear stopper when moving it to the right, and also
be sure to hold it at the lower part when moving it to the left. Do not move the
rear stopper forcibly, otherwise it may be damaged.
4. Place paper on the tray.
Load paper aligning it to the right side of the tray, then align the rear stopper
to the paper.
Be sure that the rear guide plate is securely aligned to the paper; otherwise
machine trouble may occur.
Do not load above the limit indicated on the side guide plate.
1
2
Loading Paper (continued)
2-25
5. When paper is seated properly, close the paper feed roller.
6. Gently push in the tray until it locks into place.
The indicator “” on the tray key will change to “”.
Do not clam the tray into the main body; otherwise machine trouble may be
caused.
Loading Paper (continued)
2-26
Loading Paper in Multi-Sheet Bypass Tray
When using the Multi-sheet bypass tray, specify the paper type to be loaded on the
tray at the same time. See p. 3-18 to p. 3-21 for details.
1. Open the Multi-sheet bypass tray located on the right side of
the copier.
2. Load copy paper, and adjust the paper guides to the paper size.
Stack paper up to 250 sheets 90 g/m
2
. When loading special paper, do not
exceed the limit indicated on the paper guides, otherwise paper misfeed
may occur.
Do not load paper of the weight less than 64 g/m
2
, otherwise paper
misfeed may occur.
The OHP film or ink-jet paper is not available on this machine. Do not load
the transparency film or ink-jet paper on the Multi-sheet bypass tray.
3. When copying is completed, close the Multi-sheet bypass tray.
Loading Paper (continued)
2-27
Loading Paper in LCT (C-208)
Be sure to load only the paper type and weight set for the LCT. Key Operator
can change this setting. See p. 14-21 to p. 14-22.
1. Open the LCT top door.
The LCT bottom plate will go up.
Without the power turned on, the LCT bottom plate will not function. Be sure to
turn on the power switch before loading paper in the LCT.
To load the same size as loaded before, proceed to step 3.
If changing the paper size, proceed to the next step.
2. Adjust the position of the LCT paper guides and rear stopper.
(1) Turn the four LCT paper guide knobs and two rear stopper knobs
counterclockwise to loosen them.
Loading Paper (continued)
2-28
(2) Move the upper part of the two LCT paper guides to the appropriate
positions according to the size indication, then turn the LCT paper
guide knobs (two for each) clockwise to fix the guides.
(3) Move the position of the rear stopper to the appropriate positions
according to the size indication on the bottom plate, then turn the two
rear stopper knobs clockwise to fix the rear stopper.
3. Press the paper loading button once, then load the paper into the
LCT.
The LCT bottom plate will go down.
Loading Paper (continued)
2-29
4. Repeat the step 3 until the bottom plate will not go down any more.
Do not load above the limit indicated on the LCT paper guides.
Be sure that the rear stopper is correctly positioned according to the paper
size to be loaded; otherwise machine trouble may occur.
5. Close the LCT top door.
Loading Paper (continued)
2-30
Loading Tabbed Sheets in Tray 1, 2, or 3
When TAB is displayed on the tray key of the Basic Screen, follow the procedure
below to supply the tray with tabbed sheets.
The tray paper type can be specified in the Key Operator setting. For details,
see p. 14-21 to p. 14-22.
The tab extension width must be 12.5 mm or less.
1. Withdraw tray 1, 2, or 3.
2. Open the paper feed roller.
3. Place the tabbed sheets on the tray as illustrated above.
4. Move the green levers (located at the front and the left side) to the
edge of the paper.
5. Close the paper feed roller, then push in the tray until it locks into
place.
3 FINISHED SETS
ONE FINISHED SET
Example: 9 Tabbed sheets loaded in position for 3 finished sets.
Example: 3 Tabbed sheets loaded in position for one finished set.
Section 3
Management
3rd TAB
2nd TAB
1st TAB
Printed
side
Section 1
Introduction
Section 1
Introduction
Section 1
Introduction
1st TAB
2nd TAB
3rd TAB
2nd TAB
3rd TAB
Section 1
Introduction
1st TAB
Section 3
Management
Section 3
Management
Section 3
Management
Printed
side
3rd TABS
2nd TABS
1st TABS
Rear
Front
Rear
Front
Loading Paper (continued)
2-31
Loading Tabbed Sheets in LCT (C-208)
The tab extension width must be 12.5 mm or less.
To load the tabbed sheets into LCT, contact your service representative to
position the rear stopper for the paper size to be loaded.
1. Open the LCT top door.
2. Press the paper loading button to lower the LCT bottom plate.
3. Load the tabbed sheets into the LCT as illustrated above.
4. Close the LCT top door.
Section 1
Introduction
Section 1
Introduction
Section 1
Introduction
Section 1
Introduction
Section 1
Introduction
Section 1
Introduction
Section 1
Introduction
Section 1
Introduction
ONE FINISHED SET
THREE FINISHED SETS
Example: 3 Tabbed sheets loaded in position for one finished set.
Example: 9 Tabbed sheets loaded in position for 3 finished sets.
Printed
side
Printed
side
1st TAB
1st TAB
1st TAB
1st TAB
2nd TAB
2nd TAB
2nd TAB
2nd TAB
3rd TAB
3rd TAB
3rd TAB
3rd TAB
Rear
Front
Rear
Front
Loading Paper (continued)
2-32
Loading Tabbed Sheets in Multi-Sheet Bypass Tray
The tab extension width must be 12.5 mm or less.
1. Open the Multi-sheet bypass tray located on the right side of
the copier.
2. Load tabbed sheets as illustrated above.
3. Adjust the paper guides to the paper size.
4. Specify the paper type as TAB for the Multi-sheet bypass tray.
See p. 3-18 to p. 3-21 for specifying the paper type of the Multi-sheet bypass
tray.
3 FINISHED SETS
ONE FINISHED SET
Example: 9 Tabbed sheets loaded in position for 3 finished sets.
Example: 3 Tabbed sheets loaded in position for one finished set.
Section 1
Introduction
3rd TAB
2nd TAB
1st TAB
Printed
side
Section 1
Introduction
Section 1
Introduction
Section 1
Introduction
1st TAB
2nd TAB
3rd TAB
2nd TAB
3rd TAB
Section 1
Introduction
1st TAB
Section 1
Introduction
Section 1
Introduction
Section 1
Introduction
3rd TABS
2nd TABS
1st TABS
Printed
side
Rear
Front
Rear
Front
3
Section 3:
Copying Operations
How to Make a Basic Copy
Selecting Colour Mode ..................................................... 3-2
Positioning Originals......................................................... 3-4
Setting Print Quantity ..................................................... 3-10
Setting Job During Warm-up .......................................... 3-11
To Stop Scanning/Printing .............................................. 3-13
Selecting Paper Size ...................................................... 3-14
Copying Using Special Paper (Multi-Sheet Bypass Tray)
... 3-18
Selecting Magnification Ratio (Lens Mode).................... 3-22
Making Double-Sided Copies (1a2, 2a2)...................... 3-25
Making Single-Sided Copies from Double-Sided Originals (2
a
1)
.3-31
To Scan Originals into Memory (Store Mode) ................ 3-33
To Set Next Copying Job (Reserve) ............................... 3-35
To Check/Control Jobs in Progress (Job Status Screen)
.... 3-38
Output Mode for Machine without Finisher..................... 3-41
Output Mode for Machine with Finisher.......................... 3-45
Selecting Binding Mode.................................................. 3-52
3-2
Selecting Colour Mode
The following four colour modes are available:
AUTO mode detects whether the scanned original is coloured or black-and-white
image, and automatically selects either FULL COLOUR mode or BLACK mode for
copying.
FULL COLOUR mode makes full-coloured copies whether the original image is
coloured or not.
BLACK mode makes black-and-white copies whether the original image is coloured
or not.
SINGLE COLOUR mode copies in one colour to be selected from red, green, blue,
magenta, cyan, or yellow.
The FULL COLOUR mode is initially selected. Follow the procedure below to change
the Colour mode.
Specification for Colour Mode
A colour mode is incompatible with another colour mode.
Incompatible with AUTO: Tab Paper, Fold/Stitch&Fold/Trimming (with Booklet
selected), Combination, Booklet, Overlay, Overlay Memory
Incompatible with FULL COLOUR: Tab Paper
Incompatible with SINGLE COLOUR: Tab Paper
The colour adjustment function is provided on this machine. See Section 7:
Colour Adjustment.
Some adjustments cannot be made in the BLACK mode and SINGLE COLOUR
mode.
Incompatible with BLACK: Hue/Saturation/Brightness in Colour Adjust, Colour
Balance, Any function except Auto in Screen, Colour/Text of Image Judge in
Others, Original Type in Special Original
Incompatible with SINGLE COLOUR: Hue/Saturation/Brightness in Colour
Adjust, Colour Balance, Colour/Text of Image Judge in Others, Original Type
in Special Original
1. Touch a mode key under the COLOUR MODE on the Basic
Screen to select the desired Colour mode.
When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then
press [AUTO RESET].
Selecting Colour Mode (continued)
3-3
FULL COLOUR is already highlighted when the initial settings are restored.
The initial settings may have been altered by Key Operator. See p. 14-10 for
details.
Selecting SINGLE COLOUR will display the popup menu to specify a
colour.
Touch the desired colour key, then touch OK.
The selected colour will be indicated under the COLOUR MODE indication
of the Basic Screen, with the SINGLE COLOUR key highlighted.
Touch CANCEL to restore the previous setting.
2. Select additional copy conditions, as desired.
If the colour adjustment is desired, see Section 7: Colour Adjustment.
3. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.
See p. 3-10 for details on setting print quantity.
4. Position original(s).
See p. 3-4 to p. 3-9 for details on positioning originals.
5. Press [START].
3-4
Positioning Originals
Set the originals in the RADF or on the platen glass to copy.
Positioning Originals in RADF
The document feeder (RADF) automatically feeds up to 100 originals directly to the
platen area, starting with the top sheet. The RADF should only be used for
unstapled, smooth, flat originals.
See p. 12-10 for details of the original sizes available in the RADF.
Positioning originals in Normal mode
1. Arrange originals in order.
2. Position original(s) FACE UP in the document feeder tray.
Place two-sided originals with page one FACE UP.
The direction of the originals should conform to the Original direction icon
displayed at the upper left corner of the Basic Screen.
Up to 100 originals can be set at a time.
The copy result may not be satisfactory if the originals are set in wrong
direction. Be sure that the originals are set in the same direction as
indicated by the Original direction icon, especially when making double-
sided copies or using Staple, Stitch&Fold, Fold, or Booklet mode. See p. 9-
2 to p. 9-3 for details.
Be sure not to use unsuitable RADF originals. See p. 12-9 for details.
Do not set more than 100 originals or over the limit indicated on the paper
guides; otherwise a paper misfeed will occur to cause damage to the
originals.
Before placing originals in the tray, be sure the document feeder is closed fully.
Once closed, do not open the document feeder, otherwise the selected copy
conditions may be altered automatically.
Positioning Originals (continued)
3-5
3. Adjust paper guides.
Positioning Originals (continued)
3-6
Positioning originals in Mixed original mode
Mixed size originals can be copied together from the document feeder.
To use the Mixed original mode, see procedure on p. 9-6 to p. 9-7.
See p. 12-10 for available combinations of mixed originals.
1. Arrange originals in order.
Arrange the mixed size originals as illustrated below.
2. Position mixed originals FACE UP, aligned with the left rear side of
the document feeder tray.
Place two-sided originals with page one FACE UP.
Up to 100 originals can be set at a time.
Be sure not to use unsuitable RADF originals. See p. 12-9 for details.
Do not set more than 100 originals or over the limit indicated on the paper
guides; otherwise a paper misfeed will occur to cause damage to the
originals.
Before placing originals in the tray, be sure the document feeder is closed fully.
Once closed, do not open the document feeder, otherwise the selected copy
conditions may be altered automatically.
3. Adjust paper guides.
Setting
direction
To the
depth
To the left
Positioning Originals (continued)
3-7
Positioning originals in Z-Folded original mode
Z-Folded original mode detects the folded original size without using the size
detection sensor of the RADF.
To use the Z-Folded original mode, see procedure on p. 9-8 to p. 9-9.
See p. 12-11 for available sizes of folded originals.
1. Arrange originals in order.
2. Position original(s) FACE UP in the document feeder tray.
Place two-sided originals with page one FACE UP.
Up to 100 originals can be set at a time.
Be sure not to use unsuitable RADF originals. See p. 12-9 for details.
Do not set more than 100 originals or over the limit indicated on the paper
guides; otherwise a paper misfeed will occur to cause damage to the
originals.
Before placing originals in the tray, be sure the document feeder is closed fully.
Once closed, do not open the document feeder, otherwise the selected copy
conditions may be altered automatically.
3. Adjust paper guides.
Positioning Originals (continued)
3-8
Positioning Original on Platen Glass
Use the platen glass when originals are not suitable for use with the document
feeder, e.g., when size is incompatible, or when originals are folded, stapled, torn, or
in generally poor condition.
1. Raise the document feeder or original cover.
2. Place original FACE DOWN in the left rear corner.
The direction of the original should conform to the Original direction icon
displayed at the upper left corner of the Basic Screen.
The copy result may not be satisfactory if the original is set in wrong direction.
Be sure that the original is set in the same direction as indicated by the
Original direction icon, especially when making double-sided copies or using
Staple, Stitch&Fold, Fold, or Booklet mode. See p. 9-2 to p. 9-3 for details.
3. Gently close the document feeder or original cover to prevent the
original from shifting on the glass.
When selecting Dual Page, Non-Image Area Erase, AUTO mode in Repeat,
or AUTO Layout, DO NOT CLOSE the document feeder. For details on each
function, see Section 10.
Positioning Originals (continued)
3-9
Do not place too heavy originals, or do not press strongly when
thick original is placed and is under pressure of RADF; otherwise
the glass may be broken and you may be injured.
3-10
Setting Print Quantity
This section describes how to set or change print quantity.
To Set Print Quantity
The copier is initially set to copy the original set in amounts determined by the print
quantity setting, then outputs sorted sets.
1. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel
keypad.
Entered quantity will be displayed on the touch panel.
To Change Print Quantity
Follow the procedure below to change the print quantity that has been already
entered.
1. Press [C (CLEAR QTY.)].
The quantity displayed on the touch panel will return to 1.
2. Enter the correct quantity.
Entered quantity will be displayed on the touch panel.
3-11
Setting Job During Warm-up
While the copier is warming up after power is turned on, select copy conditions and
start scanning so that the copier may start printing immediately when the copier
engine is ready.
1. Turn on the power switch of the machine.
A few seconds after the Wake-up Screen appears in the LCD touch screen,
seven types of Warm-up Screens display in succession.
See p. 2-16 to p. 2-17 for details on turning on the power switch.
2. Touch the LCD panel to change the Warm-up Screen to the Basic
Screen.
Check that the message “Ready to copy reserve” is displayed on the Basic
Screen.
3. Set the desired copying conditions, and enter the print quantity.
See p. 3-10 for details on setting print quantity.
4. Position original(s) FACE UP in the RADF or FACE DOWN on the
platen glass.
See p. 3-4 to p. 3-9 for details on positioning originals.
Setting Job During Warm-up (continued)
3-12
5. Press [START].
The original for the job will be scanned, and the highlighted FREE JOB
folder key will change to SCAN JOB.
When scanning is completed, SCAN JOB will change to RESERVE JOB,
and the next FREE JOB becomes active.
6. If setting more than one reserve job, touch the next FREE JOB to
highlight it.
7. Set the desired copying conditions, enter the print quantity,
position original(s), then press [START].
Up to 9 reserve jobs can be prepared.
Copying on the reserve job will start automatically after completing the
warm-up.
The Job Status Screen allows you to alter the output order of the reserve
jobs or to delete the reserve job. See p. 3-38 ~ p. 3-40.
If all three reserve job keys are used, touch the active FREE JOB
key at the far right to scroll.
See p. 3-35 ~ p. 3-37.
To stop printing, press [STOP]. See p. 3-13 for details.
3-13
To Stop Scanning/Printing
Follow the procedure below to stop scanning or printing.
1. Touch to highlight SCAN JOB or PRINT JOB to be
suspended.
2. Press [STOP].
The current machine operation of the selected job will be suspended.
If wrong job is suspended, touch CONTINUE on the popup menu immediately,
select the correct job, then press [STOP] to suspend it.
3. Touch EXIT to cancel the job.
All the data of the selected job will be deleted.
To restart the suspended job, touch CONTINUE on the popup menu.
3-14
Selecting Paper Size
To select an appropriate paper size for getting your desired copy result, use APS
(Automatic Paper Selection), or select paper size manually on the touch screen, as
required.
To Select Paper Size Automatically (APS)
APS detects the size of originals placed on the RADF or platen glass and
automatically selects and feeds copy paper of the same size, or selects an
appropriate size according to the magnification ratio selected.
APS is not available when using non-standard size or wide size paper.
1. Touch to highlight APS under the PAPER SIZE on the Basic
Screen.
2. Select additional copy conditions, as desired.
3. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.
See p. 3-10 for details on setting print quantity.
4. Position original(s).
See p. 12-9 to p. 12-11 for the original sizes detectable from the RADF or
on the platen glass.
Detectable original sizes can be changed from AB sizes to inch sizes, only
A sizes, or AB sizes and inch sizes mixed. See p. 14-37 to p. 14-42.
See p. 3-4 to p. 3-9 for details on positioning originals.
Key Operator can deactivate APS when the original is set in the RADF or
on the platen glass. See p. 14-37 to p. 14-42.
5. Press [START].
Scanned image will be printed on the paper size automatically selected.
Selecting Paper Size (continued)
3-15
If the appropriate copy paper is not loaded in any tray, no copying will be
performed, and a message will prompt you to load the appropriate paper.
Copy result may not be satisfactory due to the Rotation function. In this
case, turn the function OFF manually. See. p. 8-4.
See the table below for the relation of original size, magnification ratio and
copy paper size.
Original size
A3 B4 A4R
B5R
A4
B5
A5RA5 B6R
0.250 - 0.433
0.434 - 0.500
0.501 - 0.578
0.579 - 0.612
0.613 - 0.707
0.708 - 0.816
0.817 - 0.866
0.867 - 1.000
1.001 - 1.154
1.155 - 1.156
1.157 - 1.224
1.225 - 1.414
1.415 - 1.634
1.635 - 1.731
1.732 - 2.000
2.001 - 4.000
0.250 - 0.433
0.434 - 0.500
0.501 - 0.578
0.579 - 0.612
0.613 - 0.707
0.708 - 0.816
0.817 - 0.866
0.867 - 1.000
1.001 - 1.154
1.155 - 1.156
1.157 - 1.224
1.225 - 1.414
1.415 - 1.634
1.635 - 1.731
1.732 - 2.000
2.001 - 4.000
Paper size Paper size
Magnification
Magnification
B4
A5
(
A5R
)
A5
(
A5R
)
A5
(
A5R
)
B6R
B6R
B4
B6R
B6R
B6R
B6R
A3
B5R
(
B5
)
A4R
(
A4
)
A4R
(
A4
)
A4R
(
A4
)
A4R
(
A4
)
A4R
(
A4
)
A4
(
A4R
)
A4
(
A4R
)
A4
(
A4R
)
A5R
(
A5
)
A5R
(
A5
)
A5R
(
A5
)
A5R
(
A5
)
A5R
(
A5
)
A5R
(
A5
)
A4R
(
A4
)
A3
B5R
(
B5
)
B5R
(
B5
)
B4
A3
B5R
(
B5
)
B4
A3
B5
(
B5R
)
A3
B5
(
B5R
)
A3
A3
A3
A3
B4
B4
B6R
B6R
B5R
(
B5
)
B6R
B5R
(
B5
)
B5
(
B5R
)
Selecting Paper Size (continued)
3-16
To Specify Desired Paper Size (AMS)
When a paper size is specified on the touch screen, an appropriate reduction or
enlargement ratio will be selected automatically according to the original size
detected from the RADF or the platen glass.
Wide paper size can be specified when AMS is in use.
In this case, the same magnification ratio as that of the standard size will be
selected automatically.
1. Touch a tray key on the Basic Screen to select the desired
paper size.
Selected tray key will be highlighted, and under the LENS MODE the AMS
key will also be highlighted.
If copying in 1.000 (100%) magnification mode and specifying a paper size,
see p. 3-22.
2. Select additional copy conditions, as desired.
3. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.
See p. 3-10 for details on setting print quantity.
4. Position original(s).
See p. 12-9 to p. 12-11 for the original sizes detectable from the RADF or
on the platen glass.
See p. 3-4 to p. 3-9 for details on positioning originals.
5. Press [START].
Scanned image will be printed on the specified paper size in the magnification
ratio automatically selected.
Selecting Paper Size (continued)
3-17
Copy result may not be satisfactory due to the Rotation function. In this
case, turn the function OFF manually. See. p. 8-4.
See the table below for the relation of original size, copy paper size, and
magnification ratio automatically selected.
Original size
Paper size
A3
1.000
0.865
0.707
0.500
0.612
0.433
0.498
0.352
0.431
B4
1.154
1.000
0.816
0.577
0.706
0.500
0.576
0.407
0.498
A4R
1.414
1.224
1.000
0.707
0.865
0.613
0.705
0.498
0.610
A4
1.000
0.865
0.707
1.000
0.613
0.865
0.498
0.705
0.431
B5R
1.632
1.412
1.154
0.817
1.000
0.708
0.813
0.576
0.703
B5
1.156
1.000
0.817
1.154
0.708
1.000
0.576
0.813
0.498
A5R
2.000
1.733
1.414
1.000
1.224
0.867
1.000
0.705
0.865
A5
1.414
1.224
1.000
1.414
0.867
1.224
0.705
1.000
0.610
B6R
2.308
2.000
1.632
1.154
1.412
1.000
1.154
0.813
1.000
A3
B4
A4R
A4
B5R
B5
A5R
A5
B6R
3-18
Copying Using Special Paper (Multi-Sheet Bypass Tray)
Use the Multi-sheet bypass tray to copy using special (non-standard) paper.
Select the special paper type and weight from the selections previously specified by
the Key Operator, then select the size to be loaded on the Multi-sheet bypass tray,
as described below.
OHP film or ink-jet paper cannot be used on this machine. DO NOT load the
OHP films and ink-jet papers into the Multi-sheet bypass tray.
8.5”x11”R and B6R sizes (unavailable in Tray 1 to 4) can be used in the Multi-
sheet bypass tray. Also, 210~256 g/m
2
paper can be used in the Multi-sheet
bypass tray.
To specify the combinations of special paper type and weight to be
selected for the Multi-sheet bypass tray, see p. 14-23.
To specify the special paper type, weight and size in Tray 1 to 4 to be used
on a regular basis, see p. 14-21 to p. 14-22.
1. Open the Multi-sheet bypass tray, and load the copy paper.
See p. 2-26 for further details of loading procedure.
For the specifications of paper in the Multi-sheet bypass tray, see p. 12-2 to p.
12-8.
2. Touch the Multi-sheet bypass tray key in the PAPER SIZE area of
the Basic Screen to highlight it.
The TYPE/SIZE key will appear under the bypass tray key, APS will be
deselected, and AMS will be highlighted on the Basic Screen.
3. Touch TYPE/SIZE.
The Paper Type/Size popup menu will be displayed.
Copying Using Special Paper (Multi-Sheet Bypass Tray)
(continued)
3-19
4. Select the paper type and weight.
To select the paper type and weight:
Select the desired one out of the six keys on the menu to highlight it.
If the desired paper type and weight cannot be found on the popup menu,
specify it in the Key Operator mode. See p. 14-23 for details.
When selecting Tab Paper as the special paper type to copy onto the
tabbed paper including the tab part, specify the original paper type as Tab
Paper on the Special Original popup menu. See p. 9-4 to p. 9-5.
If no paper type and weight indication is needed, touch the highlighted key
to clear the selection of the six keys.
The selected paper type and number indicating the paper weight will
appear on the bypass tray key of the Basic Screen.
5. Specify the paper size.
When using a standard size, touch STD size to highlight it.
When using a special size, specify the paper size as follows.
Copying Using Special Paper (Multi-Sheet Bypass Tray)
(continued)
3-20
To select the STD size (special):
Touch STD size (special) to display the popup menu, then use arrow keys
to scroll to the desired size.
To select the Non STD size
Touch Non STD size to display the popup menu, touch the vertical or
horizontal size key to highlight it, then use the keypad on the popup menu
to enter the vertical/horizontal size, or use arrows to scroll to that number.
To select the Wide size paper:
Copying Using Special Paper (Multi-Sheet Bypass Tray)
(continued)
3-21
Touch Wide size paper to display the popup menu, use arrow keys to scroll
to the desired wide size, then touch Lead edge or Rear edge to select the
paper dimensions corresponding to the wide paper sizes entered.
Touch Input size to display the Input Size popup menu, touch the vertical
or horizontal size key to highlight it, then use the keypad on the popup
menu to enter the vertical/horizontal size, or use arrow keys to scroll to that
number.
The entered number should fall within the range from the vertical/horizontal
size of the standard size corresponding to the selected wide size, to a
maximum of 330 mm/487 mm.
When selecting Wide size paper, be sure to specify the actual size of the wide
size paper to be loaded. Wide paper size information is not initially input in this
machine.
6. Touch OK.
The Basic Screen will be restored. The bypass tray key shows the specified
size, paper type and the number indicating paper weight, and is highlighted
along with the TYPE/SIZE key.
When the STD size (special) or Wide size paper is selected, the size specified
on the popup menu will be indicated on the bypass tray key.
When Non STD size is selected, the SPECIAL indication will appear instead.
7. Select additional copy conditions, as desired.
8. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.
See p. 3-10 for details on setting print quantity.
9. Position original(s) FACE UP in the document feeder or FACE
DOWN on the platen glass.
See p. 3-4 to p. 3-9 for details on positioning originals.
See p. 9-4 to p. 9-5 for details on positioning non-standard size or tabbed
paper originals.
10. Press [START].
3-22
Selecting Magnification Ratio (Lens Mode)
When the copier is turned ON, the magnification ratio is set to 1.000 (100%)
automatically on the Basic Screen.
Follow each procedure described in this section to select the desired magnification
ratio.
To Copy in 1.000 Magnification Mode
Follow this procedure to make a 100% copy of the original image.
1. Close the RADF securely, then press [AUTO RESET].
The initial settings are restored. Check that APS is highlighted to indicate
that the 1.000 magnification is selected.
The initial settings may be altered by the Key Operator. See p. 14-10.
2. Select additional copy conditions, as desired.
Specifying paper size will release 1.000 magnification and set AMS
automatically. In this case, touch 1:1 to highlight it again.
3. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.
See p. 3-10 for details on setting print quantity.
4. Position original(s).
See p. 3-4 to p. 3-9 for details on positioning originals.
5. Press [START].
Selecting Magnification Ratio (Lens Mode) (continued)
3-23
To Change Magnification Ratio (Fixed Magnification / Zoom Mode)
Use the 8 preset ratios (0.500, 0.707, 0.816, 0.866, 1.154, 1.224, 1.414, 2.000) and
3 user preset ratios to increase or decrease magnification in fixed amounts, or use
the Zoom mode to reduce or enlarge the copied original image in 0.1% (0.001)
increments.
Specification for Fixed Magnification / Zoom Mode
Incompatible Conditions: AMS, Repeat mode in Repeat, Reduce & Shift in
Image Shift
See p. 8-5 to p. 8-7 for Vertical/Horizontal Zoom mode.
1. Touch ZOOM on the Basic Screen.
The popup menu for changing magnification ratio will be displayed.
When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then
press [AUTO RESET].
2. Specify the desired magnification ratio.
To select a preset or user preset ratio:
Touch the desired preset or userset ratio key in the RE area to highlight it,
then touch OK.
To restore the previous setting, touch CANCEL.
The selected ratio will be displayed on the Basic Screen.
Selecting Magnification Ratio (Lens Mode) (continued)
3-24
To specify a zoom ratio:
Touch the Vertical/Horizontal zoom key in the ZOOM area to highlight it.
Use the keypad on the popup menu to enter the desired magnification ratio,
then touch OK.
The selected ratio will be displayed on the Basic Screen.
The magnification ratio should be a 4-digit number. Start with 0 if the
magnification ratio is under 1.000.
If an incorrect ratio is entered, continue by entering the correct ratio.
Use the upper arrow (c) to enlarge, or the lower arrow (d) to reduce the
ratio in 0.1% (0.001) increments.
To restore the previous setting, touch CANCEL.
3. Select additional copy conditions, as desired.
4. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.
See p. 3-10 for details on setting print quantity.
5. Position original(s).
See p. 3-4 to p. 3-9 for details on positioning originals.
6. Press [START].
3-25
Making Double-Sided Copies (1a2, 2a2)
The Basic Screen is initially set to 1-1 copy mode to make single-sided copies from
single-sided originals.
Follow the procedure below to make double-sided copies from the originals scanned
from the document feeder or from the platen glass.
Using RADF
Select the copy mode according to the original type (single-sided or double-sided).
Specifications for Double-Sided Copying Using RADF
See p. 12-9 for the information on unsuitable RADF originals.
Incompatible Conditions: Face Up, Multi-Page Enlargement, Non-Image Area
Erase, Verti./Horiz. mode or Auto mode of Repeat, AUTO Layout, Storing
Image in Overlay Memory
1. Touch 1
a
2 or 2
a
2 on the Basic Screen to highlight it.
When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then
press [AUTO RESET].
Double-sided original
Duplex copy
Duplex copy
Single-sided original
2-2 Copying
1-2 Copying
Front
Front
Front
Front
Front
Back
Back
Back
Back
Back
Front
Front
Front
Front
Front
Back
Back
Back
Front
Front
Front
Front
Front
Back
Back
Back
Front
Front
Front
Front
Front
Back
Back
Back
Making Double-Sided Copies (1a2, 2a2) (continued)
3-26
2. Check the original set direction.
The Original direction icon is located at the upper left corner of the Basic
Screen.
To change the original set direction, touch SPECIAL ORIGINAL on the
Basic Screen to display the Special Original popup menu, then touch the
desired original direction key to highlight it.
Touch OK to return to the Basic Screen.
3. Select the binding mode.
Touch OUTPUT MENU on the Basic Screen to display the Output Mode
popup menu, then touch the desired binding mode key to highlight it.
Selecting TOP BIND will make copies upside down on the reverse side, while
RIGHT&LEFT BIND copies normally.
Touch OK to return to the Basic Screen.
Making Double-Sided Copies (1a2, 2a2) (continued)
3-27
4. Select additional copy conditions, as desired.
Some incompatible conditions may automatically release the selected copy
mode. In this case, arrange the settings so that they are compatible with the
selected copy mode.
5. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.
See p. 3-10 for details on setting print quantity.
6. Position originals FACE UP in the document feeder according to
the original direction.
See p. 3-4 to p. 3-7 for details on positioning originals.
Use RADF store mode (p. 3-33 to p. 3-34) when the original count exceeds
100.
7. Press [START].
The machine starts to scan originals, then prints duplex copies when ready
for output.
Press [STOP] to suspend the scanning or printing job. See p. 3-13 for details.
When the finisher / trimmer unit / paper exit tray capacity is
exceeded due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets
as they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur.
Making Double-Sided Copies (1a2, 2a2) (continued)
3-28
Using Platen Glass
Use the platen glass to scan originals unsuitable for the document feeder.
Specification for Double-Sided Copying Using Platen Glass
Use the Platen store mode.
See p. 12-9 for the information on unsuitable RADF originals.
Incompatible Conditions: Face Up, Image Insert, Multi-Page Enlargement,
Storing Image in Overlay Memory
1. Check the original set direction.
The Original direction icon is located at the upper left corner of the Basic
Screen.
To change the original set direction, touch SPECIAL ORIGINAL on the
Basic Screen to display the Special Original popup menu, then touch the
desired original direction key to highlight it.
Touch OK to return to the Basic Screen.
2. Select the binding mode.
Touch OUTPUT MENU on the Basic Screen to display the Output Mode
popup menu, then touch the desired binding mode key to highlight it.
Making Double-Sided Copies (1a2, 2a2) (continued)
3-29
Selecting TOP BIND will make copies upside down on the reverse side, while
RIGHT&LEFT BIND copies normally.
Touch OK to return to the Basic Screen.
3. Position original FACE DOWN on the platen glass according to the
original direction, then close the document feeder or original
cover.
Be sure to start from the first page.
See p. 12-9 for paper sizes detectable on the platen glass.
See p. 3-8 for details on positioning originals.
• Use Non-Image Area Erase to prevent the black copy marks to be
produced when scanning the original with the document feeder or original
cover open. See p. 10-30 to p. 10-31.
4. Touch 1a2 on the Basic Screen to highlight it.
The STORE key will be automatically highlighted on the screen.
DO NOT press [AUTO RESET] at this point, otherwise the platen mode will be
released to disable the copier from scanning the original placed on the platen
glass.
3
1
2
3
1
2
1
2
3
1
2
3
Copies
Binding mode
Making Double-Sided Copies (1a2, 2a2) (continued)
3-30
5. Select additional copy conditions, as desired.
Some incompatible conditions may automatically release the selected copy
mode. In this case, arrange the settings so that they are compatible with the
selected copy mode.
6. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.
See p. 3-10 for details on setting print quantity.
7. Press [START] to scan.
The front side image of the double-sided copy will be scanned into memory.
8. Replace the original on the platen glass with the back side image
original, then press [START].
Repeat this step until all originals are scanned.
Memory indicator on the upper right of the Basic Screen allows you to
check the remaining memory.
To delete the scanned data without printing, press [STOP]. See p. 3-13 for
details.
9. After all originals are scanned, touch STORE to exit the Store
mode.
STORE will no longer be highlighted.
10. Press [START] to print.
All the data in memory will be output.
Press [STOP] to suspend the printing job. See p. 3-13 for details.
When the finisher / trimmer unit / paper exit tray capacity is
exceeded due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets
as they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur.
3-31
Making Single-Sided Copies from Double-Sided Originals (2
a
1)
Use RADF and select 2-1 copy mode to make single-sided copies from double-sided
originals.
Specification for Single-Sided Copying from Double-Sided Originals
See p. 12-9 for the information on unsuitable RADF originals.
Incompatible Conditions: Fold/Stitch&Fold/Trimming (with Booklet selected),
Tab Paper, Chapter, Booklet, Multi-Page Enlargement, Non-Image Area
Erase, Repeat (except 2/4/8 Repeat), AUTO Layout, Storing Image in Overlay
Memory
1. Touch 2
a
1 on the Basic Screen to highlight it.
When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then
press [AUTO RESET].
2. Select additional copy conditions, as desired.
3. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.
See p. 3-10 for details on setting print quantity.
4. Position originals FACE UP in the document feeder.
See p. 3-4 to p. 3-7 for details on positioning originals.
Use RADF store mode (p. 3-33 to p. 3-34) when the original count exceeds
100.
Double-sided original
Simplex copy
2-1 Copying
Front
Front
Front
Front
Front
Back
Back
Back
Back
Back
Back
Back
Back
Making Single-Sided Copies from Double-Sided Originals (2
a
1)
(continued)
3-32
5. Press [START].
The machine starts to scan originals, then prints simplex copies when
ready for output.
Press [STOP] to suspend the scanning or printing job. See p. 3-13 for details.
When the finisher / trimmer unit / paper exit tray capacity is
exceeded due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets
as they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur.
3-33
To Scan Originals into Memory (Store Mode)
Store mode allows you to scan all the originals first, then to start a continuous
printing job.
Use RADF store mode to scan a large amount of originals.
Use Platen store mode for originals that cannot be fed through the document feeder
due to thickness, size or condition.
These two modes can be used in combination.
RADF tray capacity is 100; however, more than 100 originals can be scanned
into memory using RADF store mode.
Specification for Store Mode
Incompatible with RADF store mode: Image Insert, Storing image in Overlay
Memory
1. Make copying selections, as desired.
When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then
press [AUTO RESET].
2. Touch STORE on the Basic Screen to highlight it.
3. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.
See p. 3-10 for details on setting print quantity.
4. Position original(s).
Using platen glass:
Place original FACE DOWN. Start scanning from the first page.
When Dual Page, Non-Image Area Erase, Auto detection mode of Repeat, or
AUTO Layout is selected, keep the RADF open throughout the scanning
procedure.
To Scan Originals into Memory (Store Mode) (continued)
3-34
Using RADF:
Position originals with page one FACE UP. Up to 100 originals can be
loaded.
If the number of originals exceeds 100, divide them into blocks not
exceeding 100 sheets and load them beginning with the block with the first
page.
Be sure to check the original direction according to the Original direction
icon displayed at the upper left corner of the Basic Screen.
The copy result may not be satisfactory if the originals are set in wrong
direction. Be sure that the originals are set in the same direction as indicated
by the Original direction icon, especially when making double-sided copies or
using Staple, STITCH&FOLD, Fold, or Booklet mode. See p. 9-2 to p. 9-3 for
details.
See p. 3-4 to p. 3-9 for details on positioning originals.
5. Press [START] to scan.
Repeat steps 4 and 5 until all originals are scanned.
Memory indicator on the upper right of the Basic Screen allows you to
check the remaining memory.
To delete the scanned data without printing, press [STOP]. See p. 3-13 for
details.
See p. 5-9 to p. 5-10 if memory overflow occurs.
Should memory overflow occur frequently, it is recommended that you contact
your service representative to expand the memory capacity in your machine.
6. Touch STORE to exit the Store mode.
STORE will no longer be highlighted.
7. Press [START].
All the data in memory will be output.
Press [STOP] to suspend the scanning or printing job. See p. 3-13 for details.
When the finisher / trimmer unit / paper exit tray capacity is
exceeded due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets
as they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur.
3-35
To Set Next Copying Job (Reserve)
The Reserve function allows you to set up a new job while a current job is in process.
When the current job is finished, the Reserve job starts printing immediately.
Specifications for Reserve
Job settings: Max. 10 (current job plus 9 reserve jobs)
When the current job is in Store mode, Image Insert, or Dual Page, the reserve
job setting will be available after the copier starts to print the current job.
Incompatible Conditions: Interrupt copying, Scanning in Store mode, Proof
copy, Storing image in Overlay Memory
1. Press [START] to start scanning/printing for the current job.
FREE JOB will become active to show that the reserve job setting is now
available.
2. Touch FREE JOB to highlight it.
The Reserve Job Setting Screen will be displayed.
On the Reserve Job Setting Screen, all keys on the LCD and control panel
will function for the reserve job.
3. Select copy conditions for the reserve job, as desired.
When trouble occurs while setting the reserve job, the PRINT or SCAN JOB
key on the Basic Screen will change to JAM or ADD PAPER key. See p. 5-6
to p. 5-8.
To Set Next Copying Job (Reserve) (continued)
3-36
4. Position original(s) after completing the scan for the current job.
See p. 3-4 to p. 3-9 for details on positioning originals.
To cancel the reserve job, touch STATUS on the Basic Screen to display the
Job Status Screen. See p. 3-38 to p. 3-40 for details.
5. Press [START] to start scanning for the reserve job.
Up to 10 jobs (current job included) can be set.
When setting more than one reserve job, the next reserve job setting will be
available after the copier starts to scan for the previous reserve job.
To set the fourth copying job, touch the active FREE JOB key at the far right
to scroll to the next reserve setting screen. Another three reserve job
settings (04-06) will be available.
To Set Next Copying Job (Reserve) (continued)
3-37
To set the seventh copying job, touch the active FREE JOB key at the far
right to scroll to the next reserve setting screen.
The number of reserve jobs including current job will be indicated in the
middle of the message area.
When completed, the Basic Screen for the current printing job will be
restored.
To scroll to the next/previous screen, touch the arrow keys displayed at the
right side of the folder keys.
When trouble occurs on a reserve job which is not currently displayed on the
screen, the arrow key to scroll to that job will blink. See p. 5-6 to p. 5-8.
6. Copying of the reserve job will start automatically after completing
the current job.
When the finisher / trimmer unit / paper exit tray capacity is
exceeded due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets
as they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur.
3-38
To Check/Control Jobs in Progress (Job Status Screen)
The Job Status Screen allows you to perform the following functions.
Confirm machine status Change order of reserve job
Delete reserve job View previous job list
View noncomplete job list
Not only the copy reserve jobs but the print jobs made in Printer mode can
also be checked and controlled on this screen.
1. Touch STATUS on the Basic Screen.
The Job Status Screen will be displayed.
Check the current status of the machine.
See p. 3-40 for details of the screen.
2. Perform the desired setting on the screen.
To change the order of reserve job:
Touch to highlight the desired reserve job key, then touch JOB PRIORITY.
The highlighted reserve job is advanced by one in printing order unless the
job preceding the selected one is already in progress.
If more than six jobs are entered, use the page down arrow key at the lower
left corner of the screen to scroll to the desired job.
To clear reserve job:
Touch to highlight the
desired reserve job key,
then touch JOB
CLEAR.
Touch YES to clear the
highlighted reserve job,
or NO to cancel.
To Check/Control Jobs in Progress (Job Status Screen)
(continued)
3-39
To check user name (print jobs only):
Touch USER NAME
CHECK to display the
User Name Check
Screen.
Check the user name
indicated on the right
side of the job number
and operation mode.
Touch OK to return to
the Job Status Screen.
To display previous job
list:
Touch PREVIOUS JOB
LIST to display the
Previous Job List
Screen.
Touch to scroll to
the next page. Up to 16
previous jobs (4 pages)
can be displayed.
Touch to return to the previous page.
Touch OK to return to the Job Status Screen.
To display noncomplete
job list:
Touch NONCOMPLETE
JOB LIST to display the
Noncomplete Job List
Screen.
Touch to scroll to
the next page. Up to 16
noncomplete jobs (4
pages) can be
displayed.
Touch to return to the previous page.
Touch OK to return to the Job Status Screen.
3. Touch OK on the Job Status Screen.
The Basic Screen will be restored.
To Check/Control Jobs in Progress (Job Status Screen)
(continued)
3-40
Contents of Job Status Screen
NO. : Displays the No. (01-99) for each job assigned to the machine.
MODE: Displays the machine’s current mode of operation. Three modes are
listed below.
COPIER
PRINTER
SCANNER
STATUS: Displays the current status of the machine for each job.
READY : Ready to use in each mode
INTERRUPT : Interrupting the previous job
ERROR : Error in each mode
PRINTING : Printing in each mode
NO PAPER : No paper in copy/print mode
STOP : Stop in each mode
RESERVE : Ready to reserve
JAM : Jam in each mode
TOTAL PAGE(s): Displays the number of scanned pages for each job. (0 to
9999)
PAGE(s) TO GO: Displays the remaining copy count of the job.
0 to 9999 (The number exceeding 9999 will be displayed as
9999^.)
Copy count = No. of scanned pages x Print quantity
MINUTE(s) TO GO: Displays the time (in minutes) required for completing the job.
Exceeding 999 minutes: 999^
Shorter than 1 minute: <1
Other: The following message will be displayed on the bar when the
reserved job does not exist.
RESERVED JOB DOES NOT EXIST
3-41
Output Mode for Machine without Finisher
This section describes the output modes for a copier without the Finisher.
The Non-sort mode is initially selected.
1 Non-sort mode copies the original set in amounts determined by the print
quantity setting, then outputs sorted sets normally.
2 Rotation sort mode rotates every other sorted sets by 90° upon exit, provided
the same paper size is loaded in two trays, one tray with paper loaded in portrait
orientation and the other tray with paper loaded in landscape orientation, e.g., A4
and A4R.
3 Group mode copies each original page in amounts determined by the print
quantity setting, then outputs grouped sets normally.
4 Rotation group mode
rotates every other grouped set by 90° upon exit, provided
the same paper size is loaded in two trays, one tray with paper loaded in portrait
orientation and the other tray with paper loaded in landscape orientation, e.g., A4
and A4R.
Using Face up mode in combination with the above four modes, simplex copies exit
face up on the exit tray.
3
2
1
Originals
Face down
rotation sort
Face down
group
Face down
rotation group
Face down
non-sort (default)
Face up
rotation sort
Face up
group
Face up
rotation group
Face up
non-sort
Example:
3-set copies
Output Mode for Machine without Finisher (continued)
3-42
Specification for Output Modes without Finisher
Incompatible with Group mode: Proof Copy, Sheet/Cover Insertion, Chapter,
Combination, Booklet, Image Insert, Program Job, Repeat, AUTO Layout,
Non-Image Area Erase, Stamp (Numbering)
Incompatible with Rotation Group mode: Proof Copy, Mixed Original, Z-Folded
Original, Non STD Size (FULL AREA), Sheet/Cover Insertion, Chapter,
Combination, Booklet, Image Insert, Dual Page, Program Job, Repeat, AUTO
Layout, Non-Image Area Erase, Stamp (Numbering), Overlay
Incompatible with Rotation Sort mode: Mixed Original, Sheet/Cover Insertion,
Booklet, Repeat, AUTO Layout, Non-Image Area Erase
1. Load copy paper.
When using Rotation sort or Rotation group mode, load the same paper
size into two trays in different orientation.
Do not release the Rotation function.
When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then
press [AUTO RESET].
2. Select the desired output mode.
To select Face down non-sort mode:
Confirm that OUTPUT MENU is not highlighted on the Basic Screen.
Face down non-sort mode is initially selected. Key Operator can change the
initial output mode. See p. 14-10.
To select Group, Rotation group, Rotation sort or Face up mode:
Touch OUTPUT MENU on the Basic Screen to display the Output Mode
popup menu, then touch the desired mode key to highlight it.
To use Face up mode in combination, simply touch FACE UP to highlight it.
Output Mode for Machine without Finisher (continued)
3-43
3. Touch OK on the Output Mode popup menu.
The Basic Screen will be restored with the output icon indicating the Output
mode currently selected.
To uch CANCEL on the Output Mode popup menu to restore the previous
setting.
Touch RECALL STANDARD to restore the initial setting.
See the next page for details of the output icons displayed on the Basic
Screen.
4. Select additional copy conditions, as desired.
5. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.
The exit tray capacity is 120 sheets. Be sure that the capacity is not exceeded.
See p. 3-10 for details on setting print quantity.
6. Position original(s) FACE UP in the document feeder or FACE
DOWN on the platen glass.
See p. 3-4 to p. 3-9 for details on positioning originals.
7. Press [START].
Press [STOP] to suspend the scanning or printing job. See p. 3-13 for details.
When the paper exit tray capacity is exceeded due to the print
quantity selected, remove the copied sets as they exit; otherwise,
mishandled paper will occur.
Output Mode for Machine without Finisher (continued)
3-44
Output Icons on the Basic Screen
Non-sort Rotation sort Group Rotation group
Non-sort Rotation sort Group Rotation group
Face Down
Face Up
3-45
Output Mode for Machine with Finisher
Finisher FN-120/FN-9 is equipped with a primary (main) and a secondary (sub) exit
trays. Without using any optional equipment, each exit tray provides the output
modes as described below.
Primay (Main) Tray:
1 Non-sort mode simply means that the offset-stacker finisher modes are not
selected. Copies will be stacked upon exit without being offset by sorted sets.
2 Sort mode outputs multiple copies of the original set, having each sorted set
offset by 30mm upon exit.
3 Staple mode offsets and staples each sorted set. Up to 50 sheets (or within 5mm
thick) can be stapled.
4Group mode groups together multiple copies of each original and offsets the sets
by 30mm upon exit.
Using Face up mode in combination with the above four modes, simplex copies exit
face up on the exit tray.
4
1
2
3
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
4
4
4
3
3
3
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
Example:
Make 3 copied sets
from 4 original sheets
Offset by 30mm
1 oblique
staple
Offset by 30mm
2 staples
Group
Staple-sortSortNon-sort
Output Mode for Machine with Finisher (continued)
3-46
Secondary (Sub) Tray:
1 Face down non-sort exit outputs simplex copies and odd numbered duplex
copies face down, without offsetting the sorted sets.
2 Face down group exit outputs multiple copies of each original face down,
without offsetting the grouped sets upon exit.
3 Face up non-sort exit outputs simplex copies and odd numbered duplex copies
face up, without offsetting the sorted sets.
4 Face up group exit outputs multiple copies of each original face up, without
offsetting the grouped sets upon exit.
The copier is initially set to output to Primary (main) tray in Sort mode.
Follow the procedure on the next page to change the output mode, as desired.
See Section 8 for the output modes using Finisher options.
Specification for Output Modes with Finisher
Incompatible with Sort mode: Using platen glass (unless Image Insert, Dual
Page, or Platen store mode is used), Fold, Stitch & Fold, Three-Fold,
Trimming,
Incompatible with Staple mode: Using platen glass (unless Image Insert, Dual
Page, or Platen store mode is used), Fold, Stitch & Fold, Three-Fold, Trimming
Using excessively curled paper or some types of thin paper in Staple mode
may cause poor results in arrangement of the stapled sets.
Incompatible with Group mode: 1a2 or 2a2 mode using platen glass (unless
Platen store mode is used), Proof Copy, Fold, Stitch & Fold, Three-Fold,
Trimming, Sheet/Cover Insertion, Chapter, Combination, Booklet, Image
Insert, Repeat
Example:
Make 3 copied sets
Face down
non-sort
Face up
non-sort
Face up
group
Face down
group
1
2
3
Output Mode for Machine with Finisher (continued)
3-47
Incompatible with Group using Secondary (sub) tray: 1a2 or 2a2 mode using
platen glass (unless Platen store mode is used), Proof Copy, Fold, Stitch &
Fold, Three-Fold, Trimming, Punch, Cover sheet feeding, Sheet/Cover
Insertion, Chapter, Combination, Booklet, Image Insert, Repeat
Incompatible with Face Up exit: 1a2 or 2a2 mode using platen glass, Fold,
Stitch & Fold, Three-Fold, Trimming, Cover sheet feeding
1. Close the RADF securely, then press [AUTO RESET].
Check that the Sort mode icon is displayed and the OUTPUT MENU key is
highlighted in the OUTPUT area.
Key Operator can change the initial output mode. See p. 14-10.
2. Select the desired output mode.
To set output to the Primary (main) tray (except Staple): proceed to the
next step.
To set Staple mode: proceed to step 4.
To set output to the Secondary (sub) tray: proceed to step 5.
3. Touch OUTPUT MENU to display the Output Mode popup menu,
then touch MAIN TRAY to highlight it.
To select Non-sort mode, deselect all the keys in the OUTPUT<MAIN
TRAY> area.
To select Sort mode, touch SORT to highlight it.
To select Group mode, touch GROUP to highlight it.
To select Face up mode, touch FACE UP in the SURFACE area to
highlight it. The Face up mode is compatible with Non-sort, Sort and Group
modes.
Using Face up mode and Non-sort or Sort mode in combination, the sorted
copies will be output in the reverse order of the originals.
Touch OK on the Output Mode popup menu to return to the Basic Screen.
OUTPUT MENU will be highlighted, and the output icon of the selected
output mode will be displayed in the OUTPUT area.
Proceed to step 6.
See p. 3-50 for details of the output icons displayed on the Basic Screen.
Output Mode for Machine with Finisher (continued)
3-48
4. To set Staple-sort mode:
(1) Touch STAPLE on the Basic Screen to highlight it.
The staple position icon will be displayed in the output icon area.
To change the staple position, proceed to the next step.
Proceed to step (3), if the present setting is desired.
(2) Touch OUTPUT MENU on the Basic Screen to display the Output
Mode popup menu, touch the desired staple position key, then touch
OK.
The Basic Screen will be restored, with the selected staple position
icon displayed.
When making double-sided copies, select the desired binding mode on the
Output Mode popup menu. See p. 3-52 for details of the binding mode.
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
Staple position
Binding mode
Output Mode for Machine with Finisher (continued)
3-49
(3) Check the original set direction with the Original direction icon at the
upper left corner of the Basic Screen.
To change the original set direction, touch SPECIAL ORIGINAL on the
Basic Screen to display the Special Original popup menu, touch the
desired original set direction key, then touch OK to return to the Basic
Screen.
Proceed to step 6.
5. Touch OUTPUT MENU to display the Output Mode popup menu,
then touch SUB TRAY to highlight it.
To select Face down non-sort mode, deselect both FACE UP and GROUP.
To select Face up non-sort mode, touch FACE UP to highlight it.
To select Face down group mode, touch GROUP to highlight it.
To select Face up group mode, touch FACE UP and GROUP to highlight
them.
Touch OK to restore the Basic Screen. OUTPUT MENU will be highlighted,
and the output icon of the selected output mode will be displayed in the
OUTPUT area.
See p. 3-50 to p. 3-51 for details of the output icons displayed on the Basic
Screen.
6. Select additional copy conditions, as desired.
7. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.
See p. 12-4 to p. 12-5 to be sure that the finisher capacity is not exceeded.
Output Mode for Machine with Finisher (continued)
3-50
See p. 3-10 for details on setting print quantity.
8. Position original(s).
See p. 3-4 to p. 3-9 for details on positioning originals.
9. Press [START].
Press [STOP] to suspend the scanning or printing job. See p. 3-13 for details.
Finisher primary (main) tray of Finisher FN-120/FN-9 gradually goes down
while printed materials output. DO NOT allow any object to interfere with the
operation of the tray on the left side of the finisher, as any interference may
cause damage to the finisher.
When the finisher exit tray capacity is exceeded due to the print
quantity selected, remove the copied sets as they exit; otherwise,
mishandled paper will occur.
Output Icons on the Basic Screen
Non-sort Sort (offset) Group (offset)
Non-sort Sort (offset) Group (offset)
Primary (Main) tray: Face up
Primary (Main) tray: Face down
Output Mode for Machine with Finisher (continued)
3-51
Left 1 posi. Right 1 posi. Left 2 posi. Up 2 posi.
Primary (Main) tray: Staple-Sort
Non-sort GroupNon-sort Group
Secondary (Sub) tray: Face down
Secondary (Sub) tray: Face up
3-52
Selecting Binding Mode
When copying in 1a2 or 2a2 mode, specify the binding mode on the Output Mode
popup menu to obtain the desired copy result.
Right & Left bind: Normal duplex copies
Top bind: Duplex copies arranged upside down on the reverse side
1. Touch OUTPUT MENU to display the Output Mode popup
menu.
2. Touch to highlight the desired binding mode key.
3. Touch OK to return to the Basic Screen.
3
1
2
3
1
2
1
2
3
1
2
3
CopiesBinding mode
4
Section 4:
Helpful Functions
How to Use Helpful Functions
Making Sample Copy (Proof Copy) .................................. 4-2
Checking Feature Selections / Proof Copying (Check Mode)
.... 4-4
Interrupt Copying.............................................................. 4-8
Storing Job Conditions (Job Memory: Job Store)........... 4-11
Recalling Stored Job Settings (Job Memory: Job Recall)
... 4-14
Recalling Previous Job Settings ..................................... 4-15
Displaying Screen for Operation Guide (Help Mode) ..... 4-16
4-2
Making Sample Copy (Proof Copy)
Use Proof copy to produce a sample of the copied set before making multiple copies.
This is a convenient and cost effective way of viewing the results of the following
copying selections.
Copying conditions using Store mode Booklet
Sheet/Cover Insertion • Image Insert
Chapter • Dual Page
Combination • Program Job
Specifications for Proof Copy
Proof copy is available when using RADF or Platen store mode for multiple
originals.
Proof copy is not compatible with Group or Rotation group output mode.
1. Select the desired copy conditions and enter the desired
print quantity.
When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then
press [AUTO RESET].
2. Position original(s).
See p. 3-4 to p. 3-9 for details on positioning originals.
3. Press [PROOF COPY] on the control panel.
A sample copy will be output, and the Check Screen will be displayed.
Press [STOP] to suspend the proof copying. In this case, the scanned
image data will not be deleted from memory.
You cannot change or release selections that appeared dimmed after proof
copying.
Making Sample Copy (Proof Copy) (continued)
4-3
If the copy result is satisfactory, proceed to step 5.
If any setting changes are required, refer to p. 4-6 under the next heading.
4. Repeat proof copying until the copy result becomes satisfactory.
5. Change the print quantity, as required.
Proof copy can be performed as needed, until the print quantity amount on the
Basic Screen reaches zero.
If required, change the print quantity on the Basic Screen.
6. Press [START].
If the print quantity is not changed, the copier will output the rest, minus the
sample sets.
When the finisher / trimmer unit / paper exit tray capacity is
exceeded due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets
as they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur.
4-4
Checking Feature Selections / Proof Copying (Check Mode)
Use the Check mode to confirm copying selections before starting print operation.
In this mode, use Proof copy to produce a sample of the copied set before making
multiple copies. This is a convenient and cost effective way of viewing the results of
the following copying selections.
Copying conditions using Store mode Booklet
Sheet/Cover insertion • Image insert
Chapter • Dual Page
Combination • Program job
Specifications for Check Mode and Proof Copy
Proof copy is available when using RADF, or Platen store mode for multiple
originals.
Proof copy is unavailable with Group output mode.
1. Select the desired copy conditions and enter the desired
print quantity.
When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then
press [AUTO RESET].
2. Position original(s).
See p. 3-4 to p. 3-9 for details on positioning originals.
3. Press [CHECK] on the control panel.
Checking Feature Selections / Proof Copying (Check Mode)
(continued)
4-5
The Check Screen will be displayed.
Tray Setting Check Screen
Touch the lower arrow key to scroll to the next screen in order as shown
above. Touching the upper arrow key will resume the previous screen.
Touch TrayConfirm to display the Tray Setting Check Screen.
Verify all the settings made for the current job.
• If settings are OK, proceed to step 8.
• If a sample copy is needed, proceed to step 6.
• If making any setting change from the Check Screen, proceed to the next
step.
• If releasing any setting from the Check Screen, proceed to step 5.
Checking Feature Selections / Proof Copying (Check Mode)
(continued)
4-6
4. To change the settings:
Touch the desired copying condition key on the Check Screen to highlight it.
Any key that cannot be highlighted indicates that the copying condition
cannot be changed from the Check Screen.
Touch CHANGE SETTING.
The LCD will display an appropriate screen to change the copying condition
selected.
Selecting a basic copying condition key will display the Basic Screen.
Selecting a Special Original Mode key will display the Special Original
popup menu.
Selecting an Image Adjust Mode key will display the Change Image
Adjustment Setting Screen.
When BOOK MARK has been checked on a subsequent screen, selecting
the mode key will jump to that screen.
Selecting an Application Mode key will display the Change Application
Selection Screen.
When BOOK MARK has been checked on a subsequent screen, selecting
the application function key will jump to that screen. See p. 10-2 for details.
CHANGE SETTING will not function for the following application functions,
however they can be released by touching RELEASE SETTING: Program
Job, Non-Image Area Erase, Reverse Image, AUTO Layout, Overlay.
Change the setting as desired, then restore the Check Screen to return to
the checking steps.
From the Basic Screen, press [CHECK] to return to the Check Screen.
From the Special Original popup menu, Change Image Adjustment Setting
Screen or Change Application Selection Screen, touch OK to return to the
Check Screen.
When making a set or sample copy, proceed to step 6.
To start printing without proofcopying, proceed to step 8.
5. To release the settings:
Touch the desired copying condition key on the Check Screen to highlight it,
then touch RELEASE SETTING.
The confirmation screen will appear on the Check Screen.
Touch YES to cancel the function, or NO to restore.
If making a sample copy, proceed to the next step.
To start printing, proceed to step 8.
Checking Feature Selections / Proof Copying (Check Mode)
(continued)
4-7
6. Press [PROOF COPY] on the control panel or touch PROOF COPY
on the Check Screen.
A sample copy will be output.
•Press [STOP] to suspend the proof copying. In this case, the scanned
image data will not be deleted from memory.
You cannot change or release selections that appeared dimmed after proof
copying.
When the copy result is satisfactory, proceed to the next step.
When any setting change is required, return to step 4, then repeat proof
copying, as required.
If the desired selection cannot be changed, press [STOP] to delete all
the data in memory, then press [AUTO RESET] to restart the job setting.
7. Change the print quantity, as required.
Proof copy can be performed as needed, until the print quantity amount on the
Basic Screen reaches zero. (Note that the print quantity amount on the Check
Screen does not change.)
If required, change the print quantity on the Basic Screen.
8. Press [START].
If the print quantity is not changed, the copier will output the rest, minus the
sample sets.
When the finisher / trimmer unit / paper exit tray capacity is
exceeded due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets
as they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur.
4-8
Interrupt Copying
Use the Interrupt mode to interrupt copying in progress to perform a simple job.
When interrupt copying is completed, the settings for the initial job restore
automatically and the Basic Screen displays.
Interrupt copying is available when the copier is performing the following operations:
Continuously printing the image stored in memory
Scanning the originals into memory
Scanning the originals into memory in Reserve mode while printing
If desired, Key Operator can change the timing to stop current machine
operation for interrupt copying.
Note that the compatible copying conditions vary according to the timing
selected. See p. 14-37 to p. 14-42.
Specification for Interrupt Mode
The Interrupt mode cannot be selected with the following copier conditions:
The Basic Screen is not displayed.
Overlay Memory is in use.
The Call for Service message displays or a paper misfeed occurs.
Incompatible: 2a1, 2a2, Applications, Mixed Original, Z-Folded Original
1. Press [INTERRUPT] on the control panel.
The [INTERRUPT] LED turns on and all JOB indicators on the Basic
Screen change to INTERRUPT.
The timing to enter the Interrupt mode varies according to the job in progress
on the machine when [INTERRUPT] is pressed.
See the following page.
Interrupt Copying (continued)
4-9
In Reserve mode, pressing [INTERRUPT] before the copier finishes scanning
the reserve job originals clears the settings selected for the reserve job.
For details of Reserve mode, see p. 3-35 to p. 3-37.
2. Set copy conditions, as desired.
The initial settings in Interrupt mode are as follows.
Colour Mode : Full Colour
Copy Mode : 1a1
RADF : ON
AE : ON
Lens Mode : 1.000 (100%)
APS : ON
Print Quantity : 1
Finisher : Sub Tray
Remove any document from the platen glass or from the document feeder, if
present.
3. Position original(s).
See p. 3-4 to p. 3-9 for details on positioning originals.
4. Press [START] to start the interrupt copying.
When [CHECK] is pressed during Interrupt copying, the information displayed
reflects the initial copy job settings. Check mode will not display Interrupt copy
job information.
5. When Interrupt copying is completed, press [INTERRUPT] again.
The [INTERRUPT] LED turns out and the INTERRUPT indicator on the
Basic Screen returns to the JOB indicators.
The settings of the initial job will be restored on the Basic Screen.
6. Press [START] to resume copying.
When the finisher / trimmer unit / paper exit tray capacity is
exceeded due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets
as they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur.
Interrupt Copying (continued)
4-10
For particular jobs in progress, copying will cease only after certain phases of
the immediate operation are completed, as indicated by the [INTERRUPT]
LED conditions described below.
Collectively printing image stored in memory
The LED blinks until one set of the current job is printed.
Then the LED remains steady for the temporary job performed in Interrupt
mode.
Scanning originals into memory
The LED blinks until scanning is completed for all originals placed in the
document feeder.
Then, the LED remains steady for the temporary job performed in Interrupt
mode.
Scanning originals into memory while printing in Reserve mode
The LED blinks until the copier completes the current printing job, scans all
originals placed on the document feeder, and prints one set of the
Reserved job.
The LED remains steady for the temporary job performed in Interrupt
mode.
4-11
Storing Job Conditions (Job Memory: Job Store)
Use Job Store to store up to 30 frequently used copy job settings, which can be
recalled at any time. The stored jobs can be given alphabetical names.
Specifications for Job Memory
All copying functions can be selected.
Interrupt mode cannot be used while in Job Memory.
1. Make job selections from the Basic Screen and/or
Application Selection Screen.
When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then
press [AUTO RESET].
2. Press [JOB MEMORY] on the control panel.
The Job No. Selection Screen will be displayed.
3. Touch STORE.
The Job Store Check Screen will be displayed.
Storing Job Conditions (Job Memory: Job Store) (continued)
4-12
4. Review the settings on the Job Store Check Screen.
Touch the lower arrow key to scroll to the following pages.
Check that the selections made in step 1 are correctly entered.
If any correction is required, touch CANCEL to return to the Basic Screen.
Make new selections, then restart the Job Store operation from step 2.
5. Touch OK.
The Job No. Selection Screen will be restored.
To suspend the storing job after step 6, press [AUTO RESET].
Job Memory mode will be cancelled, and the Basic Screen will return from any
screen.
6. Touch to highlight one of the keys numbered from 1~30 to store
the job under that number.
The screen displays 15 job number keys. The arrow key at the lower left
corner can be used to scroll to the next/previous page.
A blank key indicates that no job is stored under that key, and a named job
without a lock icon ( ) displayed can be overwritten.
The key with a lock icon ( ) displayed is locked and cannot be selected.
To lock or unlock a job, and to delete a locked job, see p. 14-20.
Storing Job Conditions (Job Memory: Job Store) (continued)
4-13
If you wish to cancel the job number selection, touch CANCEL to restore the
Basic Screen, which displays the settings made in step 1.
If you wish to cancel the settings, press [AUTO RESET].
7. Touch OK.
The Job Name Registration Screen will be displayed.
8. Enter a job name.
Enter a job name in up to 16 characters, using the touch screen alphabet
keypad.
To correct an entry, touch 1-CHARACTER DELETE repeatedly to delete
each character entered, then enter the correct job name.
If you do not wish to enter a name, simply touch OK. The key displays 16
asterisks (*) in place of a name.
When changing the name of a job previously stored, touch 1-CHARACTER
DELETE repeatedly to delete the previous name, then enter the new name.
9. Touch OK.
The Job No. Selection Screen will be restored.
Check that the job name has been correctly entered.
10. Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Basic Screen.
4-14
Recalling Stored Job Settings (Job Memory: Job Recall)
Use Job Recall to recall jobs that are already stored in Job Memory.
1. Press [JOB MEMORY] on the control panel.
The Job No. Selection Screen will be displayed.
2. Touch to highlight a job number key to select a job you want to
recall.
The screen displays 15 job number keys. If required, scroll to the next page
with the arrow key to reach the desired job number key (16~30).
3. If desired, touch JOB CHECK.
The Job Recall Check Screen displays to enable you to review the settings.
4. Touch OK.
The settings of the selected job will be recalled on the restored Basic
Screen.
To cancel the recall mode, touch CANCEL to return to the Basic Screen.
5. Position original(s), then press [START] to print.
4-15
Recalling Previous Job Settings
Follow the procedure below to copy with a previous job’s settings.
Only the last-completed output job settings can be recalled as the previous
job settings. Non-complete job or reserve job settings cannot be recalled,
even if the setting operations have been made last.
The previous job settings can be recalled, even after the machine power is
turned off then on.
1. Press [JOB MEMORY] on the control panel.
The Job No. Selection Screen will be displayed.
2. Touch PRE-JOB RECALL.
The JOB CHECK key will be displayed between STORE and PRE-JOB
RECALL on the screen
3. Touch JOB CHECK to display the Job Check Screen.
Check the settings of the previous output job.
4. Touch OK to return to the Basic Screen.
The settings of the previous output job is recalled on the screen.
5. Change the settings recalled on the screen, if desired.
6. When all settings are acceptable, position original(s) in the
document feeder or on the platen glass, then press [START].
4-16
Displaying Screen for Operation Guide (Help Mode)
The Help Screen provides you with the information about the current screen mode
and about setting procedures. Help mode can be accessed from any screen except
Job Memory and Key Operator Screens.
Help mode provides two types of Help Screens according to the current screen
mode:
1 Help Screen accessed from Basic Screen
2 Help Screen accessed from screens other than Basic Screen
To Display Help Screen from Basic Screen
1. Return to the Basic Screen, then press [HELP].
The Help Screen will be displayed.
2. Touch the desired key to display specific information.
STAPLE SUPPLY provides information on replacing staple cartridge.
PUNCH provides information on emptying waste basket.
TRIMMER provides information on emptying waste basket.
RADF provides information on positioning originals in the document
feeder.
TONER SUPPLY provides information on adding toner.
PAPER SUPPLY provides information on loading paper in each tray.
HELP MENU displays the Help Menu Screen which provides a list of all
of the copier functions. When a function item is touched, the Help Screen
displays information specific to that topic.
Displaying Screen for Operation Guide (Help Mode) (continued)
4-17
PANEL CONTRAST displays the screen to adjust the contrast of
the LCD panel.
Toner Recovery box provides information on exchanging the
toner recovery box.
FOR ASSISTANCE displays the extension number of the Key Operator.
TELEPHONE/FAX displays the phone/fax number of your service
centre.
Touch on the Help Screen, if provided, to scroll to the next page.
Touch to return to the previous page.
Touch KEY OPERATOR MODE to enter the Key Operator mode. See p.
14-2.
3. Touch EXIT to return to the Basic Screen.
: Help Menu Screen
Select one of the 8 help menu items on the Help Menu Screen to display
subsequent Help Screens.
Touch on the Help Screen, if provided, to scroll to the next page. Touch
to return to the previous page.
Touch MENU on the subsequent Help Screen to return to the Help Menu
Screen, then touch EXIT to restore the Basic Screen.
“1. Hard keys” displays the information on control panel buttons.
“2. RADF/Platen” displays the information on unsuitable RADF originals
and maintenance of the document feeder and platen glass.
“3. Basic modes” displays the information on basic functions provided on
the Basic Screen.
“4. Applications” displays operational information on 16 application
functions provided on the Application Selection Screen.
“5. Special orig.” displays the information on functions provided on the
Special Original popup menu.
“6. Output modes” displays the information on Finisher functions.
“7. Job memory” displays the information on Job Memory.
“8. Image Adjust” displays the information on Colour Image Adjustment.
Displaying Screen for Operation Guide (Help Mode) (continued)
4-18
To Display Help Screen from Other Screens
1. While in any screen other than the Basic Screen, press
[HELP].
The Help Screen displays to provide the information about the current
screen mode and setting procedures.
2. Touch EXIT.
The screen that was displayed before pressing [HELP] will be restored.
5
Section 5:
Troubleshooting
How to Handle Machine Troubles
When “Call for Service” Message Is Displayed ................ 5-2
Clearing Mishandled Paper .............................................. 5-4
When “JAM” Appears on Folder Key (Or Arrow Key Flashes)
........ 5-6
When “ADD PAPER” Appears on Folder Key (Or Arrow Key Flashes)
.. 5-8
When “Memory Full” Message Is Displayed (Memory Overflow)
.... 5-9
When Power OFF/ON Screen Is Displayed.................... 5-11
Troubleshooting Tips ...................................................... 5-12
5-2
When “Call for Service” Message Is Displayed
A “Call for Service” message indicates a machine condition that requires the
attention of your service representative.
The Call for Service Screen usually displays the telephone and facsimile numbers of
your service representative.
When the Call for Service Screen is displayed, be sure to contact
your service representative immediately by following the procedure
below.
1. Make note of the Report code No. indicated in the second
line of the message area.
If your machine uses the Remote Diagnostics option and is automatically
monitored by your service representative, the Key Operator can call for
service using the Key Operator setting. See p. 14-44.
After calling for service using the Key Operator setting, be sure to turn OFF
the power switch immediately, then unplug the machine as described here.
2. Turn OFF the power switch.
When “Call for Service” Message Is Displayed (continued)
5-3
3. Unplug the machine.
4. Contact your service representative and report the condition and
code No.
Limited Use of the Copier in Trouble
If the message shown below is displayed on the Call for Service Screen, you may
continue operating the copier on a limited function basis and utilize the trays and
ADU that are not affected by the trouble. To obtain this limited functionality of the
copier, consult your service representative. Be sure to utilize the limited function only
temporarily, and arrange for machine repair immediately.
1. If the limited use of the copier is available, the following
message is displayed in the message area instead of the
Report code.
ex.
2. Press [AUTO RESET].
Make note of the Report code No.
3. Turn OFF then ON the power switch.
A copying job can continue without using the troubled portion of the
machine (ex. Tray 2).
EVEN IF THE COPYING JOB CAN BE CONTINUED WITH THE ABOVE
OPERATION, BE SURE TO CONTACT YOUR SERVICE
REPRESENTATIVE IMMEDIATELY WHEN THE CALL FOR SERVICE
SCREEN IS DISPLAYED.
Tray 2 failure
Press AUTO to select except this tray
Please switch ON/OFF
E 18-2
5-4
Clearing Mishandled Paper
When a paper misfeed occurs, the copier stops making copies and mishandled
paper codes display on the screen to indicate misfeed area(s). Copying operation
cannot be continued until all the misfeed locations are cleared.
The above screen displays all the jam numbers for the sake of explanation.
Actually a few numbers appear when a paper misfeed occurs.
1. Touch Graphic Illustration on the screen.
The screen illustrating the method for the disposal action will be displayed.
Before performing the clearing procedure, see p. 1-2 for the caution label
locations inside the machine.
2. Follow the procedure on the screen to remove misfed paper.
Touch on the screen, if provided, to go to the next page of a series of
illustrations.
When removing mishandled paper, be sure to leave no torn paper inside the
machine.
3. When completed, the Basic Screen will be restored.
If any misfeed location is left, the screen displays the next disposal procedure
in the message area and the location number in the jam position display.
Repeat steps 1 to 2 until all the locations are cleared.
Graphic Illustration key
Touch to display the subsequent
screens for the disposal action.
Paper jam position display
Numbers flashing or lighting
indicate the jammed positions.
Message area
An action will be displayed.
Clearing Mishandled Paper (continued)
5-5
The drum unit generates high voltage.
To avoid bodily electrical shock, NEVER TOUCH the area.
The internal fixing unit is very hot.
To avoid getting burned, DO NOT TOUCH.
Be careful of removing staples stuck inside the machine so as not to
get injured.
DO NOT INSERT your finger into the two RADF hinge portions,
otherwise you may be injured.
5-6
When “JAM” Appears on Folder Key (Or Arrow Key Flashes)
If a misfeed occurs with the print/scan job in progress while you are setting a reserve
job, SCAN or PRINT JOB folder key on the Basic Screen will change to flashing
JAM JOB.
When more than four jobs have been specified and the folder key of the print/scan
job in trouble is not currently displayed on the screen, the arrow key to scroll to that
job will flash.
Follow the procedure below to remove mishandled paper.
1. Display the Jam Position Screen.
Touch JAM JOB. The Jam Position Screen will be displayed.
When the arrow key flashes, touch the key to scroll to the JAM JOB folder
key, then touch it to display the Jam Position Screen.
If ADD PAPER is displayed instead of JAM JOB, see p. 5-8.
When “JAM” Appears on Folder Key (Or Arrow Key Flashes)
(continued)
5-7
2. Touch Graphic Illustration.
The screen illustrating the method for the disposal action will be displayed.
See p. 5-4 to p. 5-5 for details on clearing procedure.
3. Follow the procedure on the screen to remove misfed paper.
When all procedures are completed, the Basic Screen will be restored.
JAM JOB has changed to STOP, and the settings for the current printing job
are displayed on the screen.
4. Press [START].
The scan/print job will resume.
5. Touch FREE JOB to continue the reserve job setting.
The drum unit generates high voltage.
To avoid electrical shock, NEVER TOUCH the area.
The internal fixing unit is very hot.
To avoid getting burned, DO NOT TOUCH.
Be careful of removing staples stuck inside the machine so as not to
get injured.
DO NOT INSERT your finger into the two RADF hinge portions,
otherwise you may be injured.
5-8
When “ADD PAPER” Appears on Folder Key (Or Arrow Key Flashes)
If the paper supply for a print job in progress becomes depleted while you are setting
a reserve job, PRINT JOB on the Basic Screen will change to flashing ADD PAPER.
When more than four jobs have been specified and the folder key of the print job in
trouble is not currently displayed on the screen, the arrow key to scroll to that job will
flash.
Follow the procedure below to continue the copying operation.
1. Display the Basic Screen for the print job in progress.
Touch ADD PAPER. The Basic Screen for the print job will be displayed.
When the arrow key flashes, touch the key to scroll to the ADD PAPER
folder key, then touch it to display the Basic Screen for the print job.
2. Check the flashing tray key, then supply that empty tray with copy
paper.
When paper supply is completed, ADD PAPER changes to STOP.
See p. 2-22 to p. 2-32 for details on loading paper.
3. Press [START].
The print job will resume.
4. Touch FREE JOB to continue the reserve job setting.
5-9
When “Memory Full” Message Is Displayed (Memory Overflow)
In certain modes, this printer/copier uses memory to make operations convenient
and smooth flowing. Occasional memory overflow may occur if the installed memory
is inadequate for the copy conditions selected.
To handle the Memory overflow condition while performing a job, take the
appropriate action described below. These actions enable you to continue the job or
suspend the job.
Should memory overflow occur frequently, it is recommended that you contact
your service representative to expand the memory capacity in your machine.
Memory Overflow in Current Job
When memory overflow occurs while scanning the first job, the machine stops
immediately, and the screen provides JOB STOP and SCAN STOP as the only two
available options.
If the job settings include Booklet mode, SCAN STOP will disappear.
To delete all the scanned data and discontinue the job, touch JOB STOP.
To give up further scanning but print out all the data already scanned into memory,
touch SCAN STOP.
When “Memory Full” Message Is Displayed (Memory Overflow)
(continued)
5-10
Memory Overflow in Reserve Job
When memory overflow occurs during the reserve operation, CONTINUE also
appears on the active screen. In this case, the machine will not stop until all the jobs
on standby for printing are completed.
If the job settings include Booklet mode, SCAN STOP will disappear.
To delete the scanned data and discontinue the last reserve job, touch JOB STOP.
To give up further scanning but print out the data already scanned for the last
reserve job, touch SCAN STOP.
To continue scanning the last reserve job, touch CONTINUE as the current printing
job gradually enables memory for new data.
5-11
When Power OFF/ON Screen Is Displayed
When any trouble affects the electrical signal of the copier, the Power OFF/ON
Screen will be displayed.
Follow the procedure below to turn the machine power off then on.
1. Turn OFF the power switch.
2. Wait about 10 seconds.
3. Turn ON the power switch.
5-12
Troubleshooting Tips
COPIER DOES NOT OPERATE WHEN POWER SWITCH IS ON
Fully insert paper trays.
Close RADF.
Close Front doors of main body.
Close Finisher door.
Check to be sure main power switch is ON.
Check to be sure power plug is firmly inserted in electrical socket.
COPY IMAGE IS TOO LIGHT
Manually adjust copy density to darker density.
Check toner indicator and add toner, if required.
Check paper for dampness. Do not leave paper in copier when humidity is high.
Check to see if Photo, Text, or Map mode is required.
Check the Density shift.
COPY IMAGE IS TOO DARK
Manually adjust copy density to lighter density.
Check to see if Photo, Text, or Map mode is required.
Check the Density shift.
COPY IMAGE IS NOT CLEAN OR SHOWS SPOTS
Use clean originals since dirt marks may be copied.
Keep platen glass and inner surface of document cover clean.
Call for service if “Call for service” is displayed in the message area.
Check density indicator and lighten if required.
COPY PAPER MISHANDLES DURING COPYING
Fan copy paper and load it with curl side in proper location. Do not exceed the tray
capacity.
COPY IMAGE CAN BE RUBBED OFF
Check copy paper thickness. Use Thick paper mode, if paper weight requires it.
MAGNIFICATION CANNOT BE CHANGED
Reduce & Shift is incompatible with magnification.
Press [AUTO RESET] and set desired copying conditions without using Reduce &
Shift.
DUPLEX MODES CANNOT BE SELECTED
Fully close RADF, then select Duplex mode again.
COPYING DOES NOT BEGIN AFTER PRESSING [START]
Insert or adjust the appropriate paper tray for paper size selected.
Close document cover firmly.
Close Front doors and Toner access door of main body completely.
Close Finisher door completely.
Check to see if the message “Please close stacker cover of Trimmer” is displayed.
Close Trimmer stacker cover or front door completely.
Troubleshooting Tips (continued)
5-13
COPYING DOES NOT RESUME AFTER MISHANDLED PAPER IS REMOVED
Check copier diagram on touch screen for additional indications of mishandled
paper.
COPY QUALITY IS POOR
Check paper for dampness, and replace it if necessary.
THE ORIGINAL PAPER IS MISHANDLED OR SKEWED IN THE DOCUMENT
FEEDER
Originals should conform to the recommended size and weight.
Be sure originals are not stapled.
Align originals evenly in the RADF.
Check to make sure paper guides meet the width of mixed size originals.
COPY IMAGE IS SKEWED WHEN BYPASS IS USED
Be sure copy paper is inserted straight.
USING EKC, COPIES CANNOT BE MADE AFTER PASSWORD IS ENTERED
Check to see if the message EXCEEDS LIMIT is displayed.
Contact Key Operator to reset limit.
FINISHER DOES NOT OPERATE
Touch OUTPUT MENU.
Check for a paper misfeed and remove it, as required. Properly close finisher door.
RADF INDICATOR WILL NOT LIGHT AFTER [AUTO RESET] IS PRESSED
Fully close RADF.
RADF LIGHT IS FLASHING
The document feeder is ready to accept originals.
Insert originals on RADF tray, press [AUTO RESET], then [START].
ADD TONER MESSAGE IS DISPLAYED
New toner supply is needed. Follow instructions for adding toner.
CALL FOR PM IS DISPLAYED IN MESSAGE AREA
Contact your service representative for Preventive Maintenance.
APS SELECTS THE WRONG PAPER SIZE
Paper guides must be adjusted exactly to the size of originals.
IN MIXED ORIGINAL MODE, A MESSAGE TO LOAD A REQUIRED PAPER SIZE
DISPLAYS, EVEN THOUGH THAT SIZE IS LOADED IN ONE OF THE TRAYS
Paper sizes loaded in the trays must be consistent with the tray position size;
otherwise, the tray key on the Basic Screen will blink.
THE BASIC SCREEN DOES NOT DISPLAY SETTINGS AS DESCRIBED IN
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
Check with the Key Operator, as Initial Settings may have been changed.
Troubleshooting Tips (continued)
5-14
“PLEASE CHECK ORIGINAL
This message displays when the copier detects a non-standard paper size on the
platen glass.
Select paper size and press [
START
]. 1.000 magnification will be selected automatically.
If this message continues to display after selecting paper size, select 1.000
magnification, even if it is already indicated, then press [START]. If desired, ask your
service representative to enable the machine to default to 1.000 magnification in this
situation.
SHEET INSERTION RESULT IS NOT AS EXPECTED
Blank insertion: Be sure manuscript originals do not already include blank sheets in
the locations designated for sheet insertion.
Copy insertion: To ensure that chapter sheets in 1-2 mode always appear on the
right hand side in the finished set, insertion sheets must be designated on the page
setting screen with odd numbers, not even. If required, make an even numbered
original page odd by inserting a blank sheet in front of that page, so that the blank
sheet is even and the insertion sheet is odd.
FINISHER STAPLE RESULT IS NOT AS EXPECTED
The 2 staple position functions only on copy paper that is loaded vertically (portrait
style).
COPIES SKEW IN THE STAPLED SETS
Check to see if copy paper is excessively curled in the tray.
Reload the copy paper upside down.
USING PUNCH, COPIES CANNOT BE PUNCHED
Check to see if the message “Waste basket of Punching kit is full” is displayed.
Empty the waste basket.
COPIES CANNOT BE STAPLED OR PUNCHED IN POSITION
Check to make sure the side guide plates are securely aligned to the copy paper in
the paper tray to be used.
PAPER MISFEED OCCURS FREQUENTLY INSIDE FINISHER
Check to see if copy paper is excessively curled in the tray. Reload the copy paper
upside down.
USING TRIMMER, COPIES CANNOT BE TRIMMED
Check to see if the message “Waste basket of Trimmer is full” is displayed.
Empty the waste basket.
6
Section 6:
Machine Specifications
Main Body & Option Specifications
Main Body Specifications ................................................. 6-2
Option Specifications........................................................ 6-4
6-2
These specifications are subject to change without notice.
Main Body Specifications
Main Body
Name: CF5001
Type: Console type
Transfer method: Indirect electrostatic method
Platen glass: Fixed
Light-sensitive unit: OPC
Light source: Xenon lamp
Developing method: Dry, 2-component magnetic brush developing
Fixing method: Heat roller
Density adjustment: Automatic and manual (9 steps)
Magnification ratio: 1:1
± 1.0 %
Enlargement: 1:1.154 (115.4 %), 1:1.224 (122.4 %), 1:1.414
(141.4 %), 1:2.000 (200 %)
Reduction: 1:0.866 (86.6 %), 1:0.816 (81.6 %), 1:0.707
(70.7 %), 1:0.500 (50 %)
Zoom/Special ratio magnification ratio: 25 % to 400 % in
1 % increments
Copy paper: Plain paper: 64 to 256 g/m
2
Special paper: Tab, 3-hole
* Set offset master, intermediate paper, or labels one sheet
each on Multi-sheet bypass tray.
* OHP films and ink-jet paper are unavailable.
Copying speed:
51 copies/min. (A4), 38 copies/min. (A4R), 28 copies/min.
(A3), 50 copies/min. (B5), 31 copies/min. (B4), 43 copies/
min. (B5R)
Continuous copying: 1 to 9,999 copies
Types of original: Sheet, book originals
Original size: A3 (11" x 17" or 303 mm x 438 mm) maximum
Copy size: Standard size: A3 to A6R size (image cutoff width:
leading and trailing ends 2 mm
± 2 mm, top and bottom
1.5 mm
± 1.5 mm)
Wide size and non-standard size: Max. 330 mm x 487 mm
* Full-Image Area function is not provided on this machine.
Paper supply method: Tray 1, 2, 3 (universal); 500 sheets (90 g/m
2
)
Tray 4 (LCT) (universal); 2,500 sheets (90 g/m
2
) (LT-211
option)
Multi-sheet bypass tray; 250 sheets (90 g/m
2
)
Warm-up time: Approx. 7 minutes (20°C 50 %RH, 230 V)
First copy time: Approx. 6.0 seconds (A4) in Black mode
Approx. 7.6 seconds (A4) in Full colour/Single colour mode
Main Body Specifications (continued)
6-3
These specifications are subject to change without notice.
Power: AC 230 V / 50 Hz (This equipment selects the correct
voltage automatically.)
Power consumption: 3.4 KW max. (with option)
Sound power level: 78 dB max. (with option)
Weight: Approx. 313 kg (main body)
+ 1.6 kg w/Original Cover (OC-2)
+ 14.5 kg w/RADF
+ 56 kg w/Finisher (FN-120)
+ 66 kg w/Finisher (FN-9)
+ 10.5 kg w/Cover Inserter D
+ 3 kg w/Punch kit (PK-5)
+ 40 kg w/LCT (C-208)
+ 68 kg w/Trimming Unit (TMG-3)
Size: 794 (W) x 889 (D) x 1181 (H) mm (main body + RADF)
2139 (W) x 889 (D) x 1181 (H) mm (main body + RADF
+ FN-9 + C-208)
3162 (W) x 889 (D) x 1181 (H) mm (main body + RADF
+ FN-9 + TMG-3 + C-208)
Effective size*: 1084 (W) x 972 (D) mm (main body + RADF)
2224 (W) x 972 (D) mm (main body + RADF + FN-9 +
C-208)
* Effective size is dimensions required when the Multi-sheet
bypass tray is opened.
6-4
These specifications are subject to change without notice.
Option Specifications
AFR-20 Duplexing Document Feeder
Function: Feeds 1- and 2-sided originals automatically
Type of original: 35 g/m
2
~ 200 g/m
2
in Simplex mode
(Use Thin mode of THICKNESS/SPECIAL ORIGINAL
for 35 g/m
2
~ 49 g/m
2
paper)
50 g/m
2
~ 200 g/m
2
in Duplex mode
(Use Thick mode of THICKNESS/SPECIAL ORIGINAL
for 129 g/m
2
~ 200 g/m
2
paper)
Original size: Max. 297 mm x 431.8 mm (11.7"x17")
Min. 128 mm x 139.7 mm (5.0"x5.5")
A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, A5R, 11"x17", 8.5"x13",
8.5"x11"
Original capacity: 100 sheets max. (80 g/m
2
)
Original insertion: Automatic feed at a time
Dimensions: 588 (W) x 519 (D) x 135 (H) mm
Weight: Approx. 14.5 kg
Power source: Supply from main body
FN-120/FN-9 Finisher
Type: Offset catch tray
Sorting system:
Sorting by shifting (30
±
2 mm) (copies are delivered face
down)
Paper sizes: A3, B4, F4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, A5R, B6, A6R,
13"x19", 12"x18", 11"x17", 8.5"x14", 8.5"x11",
8.5"x11"R, 5.5"x8.5"
* A4R/8.5"x11"R only in Three-Fold mode.
* Secondary (sub) tray is also available for exiting Non STD
size paper.
Paper type: 50 g/m
2
~ 256 g/m
2
paper
60 g/m
2
~ 105 g/m
2
in Three-Fold mode
Special (Label, Tab, 4-holes)
Number of stapled sheet: 50 sheets max. or 5 mm or less (80 g/m
2
paper)
Staple cartridge: 5,000 staples
Dimensions: 656 (W) x 656 (D) x 990 (H) mm
Weight: Approx. 55 kg (FN-120) / 65 kg (FN-9)
Power source: Supply from main body
Option Specifications (continued)
6-5
These specifications are subject to change without notice.
Cover Inserter D
Function: Paper feed into Finisher FN-120/FN-9
Configuration: 2 trays (upper/lower)
Types of paper: 50 to 256 g/m
2
paper
Paper sizes: Upper tray A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, 8.5"x11", 8.5"x11"R,
5.5"x8.5"
Lower tray A3, B4, F4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, 11"x17",
8.5"x14", 8.5"x11", 8.5"x11"R, 5.5"x8.5", and those
Wide sizes (max. 314 mm x 445 mm)
Stack capacity: 200 sheets max. or 30 mm or less (200 g/m
2
paper)
Dimensions: 511 (W) x 620 (D) x 220 (H) mm
Weight: Approx. 10.5 kg
Power source: Supply from finisher
TMG-3 Trimming Unit
Function: Trimming the end of booklet
Types of paper: 64 to 105 g/m
2
paper
Paper sizes: A3, B4, A4R, 11"x17", 8.5"x14", 8.5"x11"R
Number of trimmed sheet: Fold mode 3 sheets max. (105 g/m
2
paper or less)
Stitch & Fold mode
20 sheets max. using 80 g/m
2
paper
(19 sheets max. with a thick cover paper)
16 sheets max. using 105 g/m
2
paper
(15 sheets max. with a thick cover paper)
Trimming width: 10 mm max.
Stack capacity: Approx. 512 sheets max. (80 g/m
2
paper)
100 sets max of 2~5-sheet-folded booklet (500 sheets max.)
50 sets max. of 6~10-sheet-folded booklet (500 sheets max.)
32 sets max. of 11~16-sheet-folded booklet (512 sheets max.)
Dimensions: 1280 (W) x 610 (D) x 562 (H) mm
Weight: Approx. 68 kg
Power source: Supply from outlet
Option Specifications (continued)
6-6
These specifications are subject to change without notice.
PK-5 Punch Kit
Function: Punching file holes in copies
Number of punch holes: 4
Hole diameter: 6.5 mm
± 0.5 mm
Hole pitch: 80 mm ± 0.5 mm
Paper sizes: A3, B4, A4, B5, 11"x17", 8.5"x11"
Types of paper: 50 g/m
2
~ 128 g/m
2
paper
Dimensions: 68 (W) x 442 (D) x 120 (H) mm
Weight: Approx. 2 kg
Power source: Supply from finisher
C-208 Large Capacity Cassette
Function: Paper feed into main body
Paper sizes: A3, B4, A4, B5, 13"x19", 12"x18", 11"x17", 8.5"x14",
8.5"x11", and those Wide sizes
Types of paper: 64 g/m
2
~ 105 g/m
2
paper
Thick: 106 g/m
2
~ 256 g/m
2
paper
Capacity: 4,000 sheets
Dimensions: 720 (W) x 639 (D) x 485 (H) mm
Weight: Approx. 40 kg
Power source: Supply from main body
Others
256 MB Memory (available one for each colour)
Original Cover (OC-2)
Trimming Kit A (TMG Kit A)
Hard Disk Drive (HDD-7)
Key Counter
Advanced
7
Section 7:
Colour Image Adjustment
About Colours................................................................... 7-2
Colour Copy Quality ......................................................... 7-4
Selecting Density Level and Whitening the Background(Copy Density)
.... 7-15
Changing Colours Using RGB and HSB Values (Colour Adjustment)
.7-19
Changing Colours Using CMYK Value (Colour Balance Adjustment)
.. 7-24
Selecting Line Screen, Dot Screen, or High Compression (Screen Setting)
7-26
Adjusting Sharpness and Contrast / Selecting Gloss Mode
.... 7-29
Making Fine Adjustment in Image Detection (Image Judge)
... 7-32
Specifying Original Type (Original Image/Type in Special Original)
.... 7-34
7-2
About Colours
RGB and CMYK Models
Have you ever wondered why the world surrounding us appears coloured to our eyes?
Light is electromagnetic waves with wavelengths between about 380 - 780 nm, also
called visible rays. The wavelengths of visible rays can be separated into the rainbow
colours violet, indigo, blue, green, yellow, orange, and red, from the shortest
wavelength in order. When all the wavelengths of the visible rays strike your eye at
the same time, white colour is perceived. We see the objects in colour because they
reflect or transmit visible light of different wavelengths or frequencies.
The colours separated from visible light are called primary colours. Primary colours
cannot be produced from other colours. These colours, however, can be combined to
make up any other colour (colour mixture).
The colour mixture provides two different types, three primary colours of light and
three primary colours of pigment. The three primary colours of light are called
additive colour mixture, and the more colours are added, the brighter it will be. Mixing
red (R), green (G), and blue (B) coloured lights, various colours can be created.
The three primary colours of pigment are called subtractive colour mixture, and the
more colours are added, the darker it will be. Various colours can be created by mixing
cyan (C), magenta (M), and yellow (Y) pigments (such as ink or toner), however, black
(K) is actually used as the fourth colour in addition to the three primary pigments
.
750
780
380
10
8
10
6
10
4
10
2
1
10
-2
10
-4
10
-6
10
-8
10
-10
10
-12
10
-14
(nm)
(m)
Prism
Visible rays Electromagnetic wave
Slit
White light
Light
Reflection
Colour
400
450
500
550
600
650
700
Three primary colors of light Three primary colors of pigment
About Colours (continued)
7-3
HSB Model
This model is based on the human perception of colour. When our eyes perceive
colours in objects, we receive the information not only on the colour itself (reddish,
bluish, etc.) but the brightness (rather bright, dark, etc.) and the purity (vivid, dull,
etc.) of the colour.
The colour perception (reddish, bluish, etc.) is defined as hue (H). The strength or
purity of the colour is defined as saturation (S), and the lightness or darkness of the
colour is defined as brightness (B).
The above three elements are called the three attributes of colour. With these three
attributes, the Munsell colour system has been created to describe colours in a
three-dimensional space.
Brightness
Saturation
Hue
7-4
Colour Copy Quality
Modifying Colours
As mentioned above, colours can be reproduced by mixing four pigments, the three
primary colours cyan (C), magenta (M), yellow (Y), and black (K).
To enhance the copy quality, this machine allows you to modify colours by means of
the three attributes of colour based upon the human eye and perception.
The following methods are provided:
Adjust the density of the whole image.
Original
+4–4
Density
Colour Copy Quality (continued)
7-5
Adjust the hue, saturation, and brightness.
Original
+4–4
Hue
+4–4
Saturation
Colour Copy Quality (continued)
7-6
The hue adjustment leads the colour of the image to another colour adjacent
in the colour circle of red (R), yellow (Y), green (G), cyan (C), blue (B), and
magenta (M).
+4–4
Brightness
Colour Copy Quality (continued)
7-7
Change the hue by varying the image’s red (R), green (G), and blue (B) individually
or mutually.
Original
+4–4
Red
+4–4
Green
Colour Copy Quality (continued)
7-8
+4–4
Blue
Colour Copy Quality (continued)
7-9
Change the hue by varying the image’s cyan (C), magenta (M), yellow (Y), and black
(K) individually or mutually.
Original
+4–4
Cyan
+4–4
Magenta
Colour Copy Quality (continued)
7-10
+4–4
Yellow
+4–4
Black
Colour Copy Quality (continued)
7-11
Reproducing Images
This machine provides two methods for reproducing images.
The Dither (Error Diffusion) method uses small dots (600 dots per inch) to reproduce
the image. This method is appropriate for text originals.
The Screen method also provides two methods, Line Screen and Dot Screen. The
Line Screen uses many halftone lines, like scanning lines of a television, while Dot
Screen uses small dots to reproduce the image. The Screen methods provide fine
quality in reproducing the gradation in scanned photographic images, however, text
originals may not be reproduced clearly by using the same method as photo
originals.
Dot screen
Black images
Colour images
Line screen
Black images
Colour images
Dots
Line
Line
Dots
Colour Copy Quality (continued)
7-12
What Is Image Detection?
In many cases, originals include both photo and text. Although the text is normally
printed in black, a colour printer inevitably uses not only the black toner but cyan,
magenta, and yellow in layers to reproduce the black text. Using the Screen method,
the colour printer may add colours in large or bold characters to reproduce the text in
the same way as the photo.
While scanning such originals, this machine detects and determines the photo
portion and text area, so that the text area should be reproduced in single colour and
the photo portion in full colour. This function also allows you to obtain the optimum
print results by modifying the standard for image detection according to the character
size of the text or its proportion in the whole original.
Detected as text
SolidSolid
Colour Copy Quality (continued)
7-13
Applying Filters
In addition to the colour adjustment and image reproduction methods, this machine
allows you to apply the following filters to improve the copy image quality.
Sharpen the outline of the image. (Sharpness)
Increase the contrast of the image. (Contrast)
+4–4
Sharpness
Original
+4–4
Contrast
Original
Colour Copy Quality (continued)
7-14
Increase shine on the image. (Gloss Mode)
Improving Colour Copy Quality
To improve the colour copy quality, this machine provides the three types of
adjustment methods: Colour adjustment, Selecting the image reproduction method
and its adjustment, and other adjustments.
The colour adjustment is performed by varying the level of pigments in RGB model or
CMYK model, or by modifying the hue, saturation, and brightness of the image.
To reproduce the copy image, select one of the two methods, Line Screen and Dot
Screen. The Image Detection function will help in selecting the most appropriate
method for each part of the original to make the copies of scanned image.
For further improvement, use Copy Density or apply filters for Sharpness, Contrast,
and Gloss Mode.
Gloss mode
Original
7-15
Selecting Density Level and Whitening the Background(Copy Density)
Automatic Exposure (AE) operates to detect the density level of the original image
while scanning, and automatically selects the appropriate density for the copy.
The density to be selected automatically using AE can be adjusted on the
machine. See “[20] AE Adjustment” in the Key Operator mode, p. 14-51.
To Adjust Copy Density / Background Whiteness
Follow the procedure below to select the exposure (density) manually to make darker
or lighter copies.
Background Whiteness
Adjust the background whiteness when copying newspaper or recycled paper originals.
1. Touch IMAGE ADJUST on the Basic Screen.
The Image Adjustment Screen will be displayed.
+4–4
Background Whiteness
Original
Selecting Density Level and Whitening the Background(Copy Density)
(continued)
7-16
2. Touch COPY DENSITY to display the Copy Density Adjustment
Screen.
3. Touch the desired density level key from -1 to -4 to make the copy
image lighter, or from +1 to +4 to make it darker.
Touch STD. to select the middle density level.
To resume the AE, touch AUTO to highlight it.
4. Touch BACKGROUND ADJUST to adjust the background
whiteness, if necessary.
Touch the desired level key from -1 to -4 to make the background lighter, or
from +1 to +4 to make it darker.
Touch OK. The Copy Density Adjustment Screen will be restored.
To resume the previous setting, touch CANCEL.
5. Touch OK.
The Basic Screen will be restored, with the
IMAGE ADJUST
key highlighted.
To resume the previous setting, touch CANCEL.
To restore the initial settings, touch RECALL STANDARD.
Selecting Density Level and Whitening the Background(Copy Density)
(continued)
7-17
Setting Density Shift
Use this function to shift each of nine density levels to three levels lighter or three
levels darker.
This function can be set to use in combination with each of the four Original Image
modes (Text/Photo, Photo, Text, and Map) in each of the three colour modes (Full
colour, Black, and Single colour), therefore twelve sorts of settings are available for
the density adjustment.
1. Select the desired colour mode from the Full colour, Black,
or Single colour.
2. Touch SPECIAL ORIGINAL on the Basic Screen to display the
Special Original popup menu.
3. Select the desired Original Image mode, then press [P
(COUNTER)].
(e.g.)
Selected Original Image mode: TEXT/PHOTO, Colour mode: BLACK
Selected Original image mode: PHOTO, Colour mode: FULL COLOUR
Density Shift (Text / Photo Black)
3 (0 - 6)
Density Shift (Photo Full colour)
3 (0 - 6)
Selecting Density Level and Whitening the Background(Copy Density)
(continued)
7-18
Selected Original image mode: TEXT, Colour mode: SINGLE COLOUR
Selected Original image mode: MAP, Colour mode: FULL COLOUR
For details of the Original Image mode, see p. 7-34 to p. 7-35.
4. Press any key (from 0 to 6) using the keypad to determine the
Density Shift.
Select smaller number for darker level, or larger number for lighter level.
Entering 7 or above will be ignored.
5. Touch OK on the Special Original popup menu.
Density Shift in the selected Original Image mode of the desired Colour
mode is determined.
Density Shift (Text Single colour)
3 (0 - 6)
Density Shift (Map Full colour)
3 (0 - 6)
7-19
Changing Colours Using RGB and HSB Values (Colour Adjustment)
Change colour by modifying each value of red (R), green (G), and blue (B), and also
adjust the value of hue, saturation, and brightness.
Modifying RGB Value
Change the colour of the copy image by modifying each value of red (R), green (G),
and blue (B).
1. Touch IMAGE ADJUST on the Basic Screen.
2. Touch COLOUR ADJUST to display the Colour Adjustment Screen.
3. Touch the desired colour key.
Changing Colours Using RGB and HSB Values (Colour Adjustment)
(continued)
7-20
4. Touch the desired level key from -1 to -4 to make the colour lighter,
or from +1 to +4 to make it deeper.
Touch STD. to select the middle level.
5. Touch OK.
The Colour Adjustment Screen will be restored.
To resume the previous setting, touch CANCEL.
6. Touch OK.
The Basic Screen will be restored, with the
IMAGE ADJUST
key highlighted.
To resume the previous setting, touch CANCEL.
To restore the initial settings, touch RECALL STANDARD.
Changing Colours Using RGB and HSB Values (Colour Adjustment)
(continued)
7-21
Modifying HSB Value
Change the colour of the copy image by making adjustments to Hue, Saturation, and
Brightness.
1. Touch IMAGE ADJUST on the Basic Screen.
2. Touch COLOUR ADJUST to display the Colour Adjustment Screen.
3. Make an adjustment to Hue.
Touch HUE.
Touch the desired level key from -1 to -4 to make yellow closer to red, and
red closer to magenta (Adjustment goes anticlockwise in the colour circle.).
Changing Colours Using RGB and HSB Values (Colour Adjustment)
(continued)
7-22
Or, touch a key from +1 to +4 to make yellow closer to green, and green
closer to cyan (Adjustment goes clockwise in the colour circle.).
Touch STD. to select the middle level.
Touch OK. The Colour Adjustment Screen will be restored.
To resume the previous setting, touch CANCEL.
4. Make an adjustment to Saturation.
Touch SATURATION.
Touch the desired level key from -1 to -4 to make the colours dull, or from
+1 to +4 to make them vivid.
Touch STD. to select the middle level.
Touch OK. The Colour Adjustment Screen will be restored.
To resume the previous setting, touch CANCEL.
5. Make an adjustment to Brightness.
Touch BRIGHTNESS.
Changing Colours Using RGB and HSB Values (Colour Adjustment)
(continued)
7-23
Touch the desired level key from -1 to -4 to make the image darker, or from
+1 to +4 to make it brighter.
Touch STD. to select the middle level.
Touch OK. The Colour Adjustment Screen will be restored.
To resume the previous setting, touch CANCEL.
6. Touch OK.
The Basic Screen will be restored, with the
IMAGE ADJUST
key highlighted.
To resume the previous setting, touch CANCEL.
To restore the initial settings, touch RECALL STANDARD.
7-24
Changing Colours Using CMYK Value (Colour Balance Adjustment)
Change the hue by varying the image’s cyan (C), magenta (M), yellow (Y), and black
(K) individually or mutually.
This adjustment can be made in each density area (shadow, mid tone, or highlight) of
the individual colour, or in the whole density area of each colour. The adjustment
value ranges from -10 to +10.
1. Touch IMAGE ADJUST on the Basic Screen.
2. Touch COLOUR BALANCE to display the Colour Balance
Adjustment Screen.
3. Select the desired density area.
Check the shadow, mid tone, and highlight areas of the original, then select
the desired density area to adjust the colour balance. If the adjustment is
necessary for the whole density area, touch WHOLE AREA to highlight it.
Changing Colours Using CMYK Value (Colour Balance Adjustment)
(continued)
7-25
4. Select the colour and adjustment value.
Touch CYAN(C), MAGENTA(M), YELLOW(Y), or BLACK (K) to highlight it.
Then, touch the
c
or
d
key to display the desired adjustment value from -10
to +10.
The adjustment can be made for each density area. Repeat steps 3 and 4,
if desired.
Select smaller number to make the colour lighter, or larger number to make
it darker.
5. Touch OK.
The Basic Screen will be restored, with the
IMAGE ADJUST
key highlighted.
To resume the previous setting, touch CANCEL.
To restore the initial settings, touch RECALL STANDARD.
7-26
Selecting Line Screen, Dot Screen, or High Compression (Screen Setting)
This machine provides two methods to reproduce the print image; Line Screen and
Dot Screen. The machine selects an appropriate method automatically according to
the other copy conditions selected for the job.
See p. 7-11 “Reproducing Images” for details of Line Screen and Dot Screen.
Follow the procedure below to select the reproducing method manually.
HIGH RESOLUTION / SMOOTH TONE
Specify either High Resolution or Smooth Tone, when selecting the reproducing
method manually. High Resolution improves the resolution by maximizing the
number of lines drawn. Smooth Tone provides a high-performance colour grading by
lowering the drawing lines.
HIGH COMPRESSION
The desired copy result may not be obtained because the internal memory overflows
when using the reproducing method selected manually or automatically according to
the other copy conditions of the job. In this case, select High Compression to give
priority to compressing the scanned data. The Dither method is used instead of Line
Screen or Dot Screen.
AUTO
Auto selects an appropriate reproducing method automatically according to the
selected copy conditions. This mode is initially selected.
1. Touch IMAGE ADJUST on the Basic Screen.
2. Touch SCREEN to display the Screen Setting Screen.
Selecting Line Screen, Dot Screen, or High Compression (Screen Setting)
(continued)
7-27
3. Select the desired reproducing method.
To select the Line Screen, touch HIGH RESOLUTION or SMOOTH TONE
under the LINE SCREEN indication to highlight it.
To select the Dot Screen, touch HIGH RESOLUTION or SMOOTH TONE
under the DOT SCREEN indication to highlight it.
To compress the scanned data, touch HIGH COMPRESSION to highlight it.
Touch AUTO to highlight it, if reproducing method should be selected
automatically.
Selecting Line Screen, Dot Screen, or High Compression (Screen Setting)
(continued)
7-28
4. Touch OK.
The Basic Screen will be restored, with the
IMAGE ADJUST
key highlighted.
To resume the previous setting, touch CANCEL.
To restore the initial settings, touch RECALL STANDARD.
7-29
Adjusting Sharpness and Contrast / Selecting Gloss Mode
In addition to the colour adjustment and reproducing method selection, this machine
allows you to apply the following filters to improve the copy image quality.
Sharpen the outline of the image. (Sharpness)
Increase the contrast of the image. (Contrast)
Increase shine on the image. (Gloss Mode)
Follow the procedure below to make the adjustment.
See p. 7-13 to p. 7-14 for details of the Sharpness, Contrast, and Gloss mode.
1. Touch IMAGE ADJUST on the Basic Screen.
2. Touch OTHERS to display the Other Adjustment Screen.
Adjusting Sharpness and Contrast / Selecting Gloss Mode
(continued)
7-30
3. Select the desired sharpness level.
Touch SHARPNESS, then touch the desired level key from -1 to -4 to make
the outline softer, or from +1 to +4 to make it sharper.
Touch STD. to select the middle level.
Touch OK.
To resume the previous setting, touch CANCEL.
4. Select the desired contrast level.
Touch CONTRAST, then touch the desired level key from -1 to -4 to
decrease the contrast, or from +1 to +4 to increase the contrast.
Touch STD. to select the middle level.
Touch OK.
To resume the previous setting, touch CANCEL.
Adjusting Sharpness and Contrast / Selecting Gloss Mode
(continued)
7-31
5. Select the Gloss Mode.
Touch GLOSS MODE to highlight it.
6. Touch OK.
The Basic Screen will be restored, with the
IMAGE ADJUST
key highlighted.
To resume the previous setting, touch CANCEL.
To restore the initial settings, touch RECALL STANDARD.
7-32
Making Fine Adjustment in Image Detection (Image Judge)
Image Detection detects and determines the photo portion and text area of the
original when scanned, allowing you to obtain the optimum print result by modifying
the standard for detection according to the character size of the text or its proportion
in the whole original.
For this adjustment, two items are provided; Text/Photo proportion adjustment and
Black/Colour text proportion adjustment.
TEXT/PHOTO changes the ratio of detecting the text area of the original.
COLOUR/TEXT changes the proportion in detecting that the original text is black
or coloured.
Follow the procedure below to make the adjustment.
1. Touch IMAGE ADJUST on the Basic Screen.
2. Touch OTHERS to display the Other Adjustment Screen.
Making Fine Adjustment in Image Detection (Image Judge)
(continued)
7-33
3. Touch IMAGE JUDGE.
4. Make an adjustment to TEXT/PHOTO.
Touch the desired level key from -1 to -4 to increase the proportion of photo.
Or, touch a key from +1 to +4 to increase the proportion of text.
Touch STD. to select the middle level.
5. Make an adjustment to COLOUR/BLACK.
Touch the desired level key from -1 to -4 to increase the proportion of black
text, or from +1 to +4 to increase the proportion of coloured text.
Touch STD. to select the middle level.
6. Touch OK.
The Other Adjustment Screen will be restored.
To resume the previous setting, touch CANCEL.
7. Touch OK.
The Basic Screen will be restored, with the
IMAGE ADJUST
key highlighted.
To resume the previous setting, touch CANCEL.
To restore the initial settings, touch RECALL STANDARD.
7-34
Specifying Original Type (Original Image/Type in Special Original)
The image quality or type of the original may affect the copy result.
Use Original Image to improve the image quality by specifying the original image
type as follows.
Originals including both text and photo (TEXT/PHOTO)
Photo originals or originals mainly composed of photos (PHOTO)
Text originals (TEXT)
Coloured original with small text such as a map (MAP)
Use Original Type to improve the image quality by specifying the printed original
type.
Normal original (PRINTED)
Photo-printed original (PHOTO PAPER)
Copied original (COPIED PAPER)
Original printed using Ink-jet printer (INKJET PAPER)
1. Touch SPECIAL ORIGINAL on the Basic Screen.
The Special Original popup menu will be displayed.
2. Touch the desired key in ORIG. IMAGE area and ORIG. TYPE area.
Only one selection can be made in each area.
In each ORIG. IMAGE mode, the copy density level can be shifted three levels
darker or three levels lighter (Density Shift). See p. 7-17 for details.
Specifying Original Type (Original Image/Type in Special Original)
(continued)
7-35
3. Touch OK.
The Basic Screen will be restored, with the SPECIAL ORIGINAL key
highlighted and the selected Original Image icon displayed.
To resume the previous setting, touch CANCEL.
To restore the initial settings, touch RECALL STANDARD.
8
Section 8:
Advanced Information
How to Use Advanced Functions
Programmed Shut-Off (Weekly Timer) ............................. 8-2
Rotation ............................................................................ 8-4
Vertical/Horizontal Zoom Mode ........................................ 8-5
Making Folded Booklet (Fold / Stitch & Fold) ................... 8-8
Punching File Holes in Copies (Punch).......................... 8-11
Output Three-Folded Copies (Three-Fold) ..................... 8-14
Making Trimmed Booklets (Trimming) ............................ 8-16
Cover Sheet Feeding...................................................... 8-19
Off-Line Finishing ........................................................... 8-22
8-2
Programmed Shut-Off (Weekly Timer)
The Weekly Timer function turns a copier on and off at the time specified by the Key
Operator.
This function is not factory-set. When the copier is using the Weekly Timer function,
the TIMER indicator on the right side of the control panel is lit.
IMPORTANT: WHEN THE TIMER INDICATOR IS LIT, THE COPIER WILL
TURN OFF AUTOMATICALLY. DO NOT TURN IT OFF BY PRESSING POWER
SWITCH.
When the TIMER indicator light is on and other indicators are off, copying is
unavailable due to the Weekly Timer function.
However, copying can be available by using the following procedure.
1. Press [POWER SAVER ON/OFF] on the control panel.
For details of the Weekly Timer function, see p. 14-26 to p. 14-33.
The Basic screen will be displayed along with the message shown below.
The machine power will be turned off automatically 5 minutes after this
message is shown if a password is not entered.
Timer interrupt mode
Enter password
Programmed Shut-Off (Weekly Timer) (continued)
8-3
The Timer Interrupt password is not factory set and must be entered by the
Key Operator.
In the event the Timer Interrupt password has not been entered by the Key
Operator, the following message will display instead.
When the above message displays, proceed to step 4.
2. Enter the password.
Enter a 4-digit number Timer Interrupt password using the keypad on the
control panel.
For setting the Timer Interrupt password, see p. 14-33.
If an invalid password is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit
password.
3. Press [START].
The following message will be displayed on the Basic Screen.
4. Set the hour for the interrupt use.
Enter a 1-digit hour (ex. 3 hours is 3) using the keypad on the control panel.
(0 ~ 9)
5. Press [START].
6. Set the minute for the interrupt use.
Enter a 2-digit minute (ex. 7 minutes is 07) using the keypad on the control
panel. (00 ~ 59)
Entering a number smaller than 5 will set the minute at 5.
7. Press [START].
Copying is available until the set time is up.
8. When Timer Interrupt of the copier is finished, press [POWER
SAVER ON/OFF] for one second or longer, then release it.
The copier returns to the OFF condition and copying is again disabled.
Input copy time
0 hour(s) 05 minute(s)
Input copy time
0 hour(s) 05 minute(s)
8-4
Rotation
This function allows you to utilize APS or AMS and copy the original documents onto
size A4 or B5, irrespective of the copy paper feeding direction.
By default, Rotation requires APS or AMS to function. The Key Operator can
set this function ON, or to operate when APS, AMS or reduce functions. See
p. 14-37 to p. 14-42.
The copier is initially set to activate the Rotation function automatically.
Follow the procedure below to release/resume this function.
1. Touch ROTATION OFF on the Basic Screen to highlight it.
When Rotation is released, the Rotation icon on the Basic Screen will
disappear to indicate that this function is cancelled.
2. Touch to deselect ROTATION OFF to resume this function.
When Rotation is resumed, the Rotation icon will be displayed on the
screen.
Rotation copying
Rotation copying
Normal copying
Normal copying
Original Copy Original Copy
A3
B4
A4R
A4
B5
B5R
B5R
A4R
A4
B5
A4
B5
B5R
A4R
8-5
Vertical/Horizontal Zoom Mode
Use the Vertical/Horizontal zoom mode to reduce or enlarge vertical and horizontal
dimensions, independently.
Vertical/Horizontal Zoom Mode Specifications
Vertical/Horizontal zoom range: 0.250~4.000
Incompatible Conditions: APS, AMS, Reduce & Shift in Image Shift
The figure shown below is the sample image using the Vertical/Horizontal zoom.
1. Touch ZOOM on the Basic Screen.
Length: 1.000, Width: 1.000
Length: 0.500, Width: 1.000
Length: 4.000, Width: 1.000
Length: 2.000, Width: 1.000
Length: 1.000, Width: 0.500
Length: 0.500, Width: 0.500
Length: 4.000, Width: 0.500
Length: 2.000, Width: 0.500
Length: 1.000, Width: 2.000
Length: 0.500, Width: 2.000
Length: 4.000, Width: 2.000
Length: 2.000, Width: 2.000
Length: 1.000, Width: 4.000
Length: 0.500, Width: 4.000
Length: 4.000, Width: 4.000
Length: 2.000, Width: 4.000
Length
Width
Vertical/Horizontal Zoom Mode (continued)
8-6
The popup menu for setting a zoom ratio will be displayed.
When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then
press [AUTO RESET].
2. Touch the vertical zoom key on the popup menu to highlight it,
then set the vertical zoom ratio.
Use the keypad on the popup menu to enter a 4-digit vertical zoom ratio, or
use arrow keys (c/d) to scroll to the desired ratio.
Similarly, touch the horizontal zoom key to highlight it, then set the
horizontal zoom ratio.
3. Touch OK.
The popup menu disappears automatically and the specified zoom ratio will
be displayed on the Basic Screen.
4. Select additional copy conditions, as desired.
5. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.
See p. 3-10 for details on setting print quantity.
6. Position original(s).
See p. 3-4 to p. 3-9 for details on positioning originals.
7. Press [START].
Vertical/Horizontal Zoom Mode (continued)
8-7
The figure shown below is the sample image using the Vertical/Horizontal
zoom with an original placed slanted on the platen glass.
Length: 0.500, Width: 2.000 Length: 2.000, Width: 0.500
Length: 0.500, Width: 2.000 Length: 2.000, Width: 0.500
30°
30°
8-8
Making Folded Booklet (Fold / Stitch & Fold)
The Fold and Stitch & Fold modes are available only when the FN-9 Finisher option is
installed. When any of these modes is selected, the Booklet feature is automatically
selected and indicated on the Application Selection Screen.
When copying two-sided signature originals using the Fold or Stitch & Fold
mode, release the automatically selected Booklet mode on the Application
Selection Screen.
When copying dark originals or using Reverse Image mode together with
Fold or Stitch & Fold mode, the folded line of the output copies may be
slightly shifted.
The following copy results may be expected when using Fold or Stitch & Fold mode:
In the Fold mode, each copied set is folded and output to the Booklet tray of the
finisher.
In the Stitch & Fold mode, each copied set is stapled at two positions (saddle
stitched), then folded and output to the Booklet tray of the finisher.
Specifications for Fold / Stitch & Fold Mode
Use RADF.
Max. number of folded sheets in Fold mode
105 g/m
2
paper or less:3 sheets
(less than in Stitch & Fold mode because they are not clinched first)
Max. number of folded sheets in Stitch & Fold mode
80 g/m
2
paper: 20 sheets
19 sheets with a thick cover paper
105 g/m
2
paper: 16 sheets
15 sheets with a thick cover paper
Paper size: A3, B4, A4R, 11”x17”, 8.5”x14”, 8.5”x11”R
Paper weight: 64 ~ 105 g/m
2
(80 g/m
2
paper is recommended)
Booklet tray capacity:
When the Booklet tray capacity is exceeded, the finisher will stop
operating. Select the appropriate print quantity by referring to the
following capacities.
Approx. 100 sheets max. (A3, B4, 11”x17”, 8.5”x14” / 80 g/m
2
paper)
Fold: 33 sets max. of 3-sheet-folded booklet (33 x 3 =
99 sheets)
Stitch & Fold: 20 sets max. of 5-sheet-folded booklet (20 x 5 =
100 sheets)
5 sets max. of 20-sheet-folded booklet (5 x 20 =
100 sheets)
Approx. 75 sheets max. (A4R, 8.5”x11”R / 80 g/m
2
paper)
Fold: 25 sets max. of 3-sheet-folded booklet (25 x 3 =
75 sheets)
Stitch & Fold: 15 sets max. of 5-sheet-folded booklet (15 x 5 =
75 sheets)
Incompatible conditions with Booklet selected: APS, 1a1, 2a1, ACS, Sort,
Staple-sort, Group, Face Up, Three-Fold, Rotation Sort, Rotation Group,
Punch, Back cover feeding, Mixed Original, Full Area in Non STD size, Tab
Paper, Sheet/Cover Insertion, Combination, Program Job, Multi-Page
Enlargement, Non-Image Area Erase, Reverse Image, Repeat
Incompatible conditions without Booklet: Sort, Staple-sort, Group, Face Up,
Rotation Sort, Rotation Group, Three-Fold, Punch, Back cover feeding, Mixed
Original, Dual Page, Program Job, Multi-Page Enlargement, Reverse Image
Making Folded Booklet (Fold / Stitch & Fold) (continued)
8-9
1. Touch OUTPUT MENU on the Basic Screen to display the
Output Mode popup menu.
When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then
press [AUTO RESET].
2. Touch MAIN TRAY, if not highlighted.
3. Touch STITCH & FOLD or FOLD, as desired.
105 g/m
2
or less: 3 sheet max.
80 g/m
2
: 20 sheets max.
19 sheets max. with a thick cover paper
105 g/m
2
: 16 sheets max.
15 sheets max. with a thick cover paper
Fold
Stitch & Fold
Making Folded Booklet (Fold / Stitch & Fold) (continued)
8-10
Selecting FOLD or STITCH & FOLD will automatically switch the output tray
to Booklet tray. Notice that the arrow pointing from the Main tray shifts to the
Booklet tray.
When selecting
STITCH & FOLD
, the machine with the trimmer unit installed
selects
TRIM
automatically. To cancel the trimming mode, touch
TRIM
to
deselect it.
4. Touch OK on the Output Mode popup menu.
The Basic Screen will be restored and the selection made in the output
mode will be reflected in the OUTPUT icon area.
5. Select additional copying features, as required.
NO COVER SHEET of Booklet is automatically selected.
To change this selection, touch APPLICATION on the Basic Screen to display
the Application Selection Screen, then touch Booklet twice to display the
Booklet Mode Selection Screen to make another selection or to release the
setting.
6. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.
See p. 3-10 for details on setting print quantity.
7. Position originals.
See p. 3-4 to p. 3-9 for details on positioning originals.
When loading originals, heed the following limits on capacity:
Fold mode:
12 pages or less for simplex copying
6 pages or less for duplex copying
Stitch & Fold mode:
80 pages or less for simplex copying (80 g/m
2
paper only)
40 pages or less for duplex copying (80 g/m
2
paper only)
Exceeding the above capacity limits may cause trouble in the finisher.
8. Press [START].
When the Booklet tray capacity is exceeded, the finisher will cease
operating. To avoid this, select the appropriate print quantity from
the specifications shown on p. 8-8.
8-11
Punching File Holes in Copies (Punch)
The Punch mode is available only when the PK-5 Punch kit option is installed on the
FN-120/FN-9 finisher.
When the Punch mode is selected in combination with any of the Primary (Main) tray
output modes, each copied sheet is punched and output to the Primary tray
according to the selected output mode.
Some staple positions previously selected may conflict with this function.
Special size paper (STD size (special), Non STD size, Wide size paper)
cannot be punched.
If the ATS (Automatic Tray Switching) functions while the machine uses the
Punch mode, the punch holes may be slightly off the appropriate positions.
Do not punch special paper type such as labels, tabbed sheets, etc.
Otherwise, machine trouble may occur in Punching kit.
Be sure that the paper guides of the paper tray are securely aligned to the
paper; otherwise the copies may not be punched in position.
Specifications for Punch Mode
Copy paper size: A3, B4, F4, A4, B5 (80 g/m
2
paper recommended)
Paper weight: 64 g/m
2
~ 128 g/m
2
Number of holes: 4 holes
Hole diameter: 6.5 mm ± 0.5 mm
Hole pitch: 80 mm ± 0.5 mm
Incompatible Conditions: Using platen glass (available when using Platen store
mode), Rotation Sort, Rotation Group, Fold, Stitch & Fold, Three-Fold, Cover
Sheet mode, Output modes using secondary tray, Mixed Original (A4R, B5
mixed), Copy insertion mode in Chapter, Cover sheet mode in Booklet
1. Touch OUTPUT MENU on the Basic Screen to display the
Output Mode popup menu.
80 mm
Punching File Holes in Copies (Punch) (continued)
8-12
2. Touch MAIN TRAY, if not highlighted.
3. Touch PUNCH to display the Punch Position popup menu.
4. Touch the desired punch position key to highlight it.
5. Touch OK on the Punch Position popup menu to restore the
Output Mode popup menu.
6. Touch OK on the Output Mode popup menu to complete the
setting and return to the Basic Screen.
The selection made in punch position will be displayed in the OUTPUT icon
area.
Punching File Holes in Copies (Punch) (continued)
8-13
7. Specify the original set direction.
Touch SPECIAL ORIGINAL on the Basic Screen to display the Special
Original popup menu.
Touch to select the desired original set direction, then touch OK to return to
the Basic Screen.
8. Select additional copying features, as required.
9. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.
See p. 3-10 for details on setting print quantity.
10. Position originals in the document feeder.
See p. 3-4 to p. 3-7 for details on positioning originals.
11. Press [START].
When the finisher exit tray capacity is exceeded due to the print
quantity selected, remove the copied sets as they exit; otherwise,
mishandled paper will occur.
8-14
Output Three-Folded Copies (Three-Fold)
The Three-Fold mode is available only when the FN-9 Finisher option is installed.
In this mode, the original image is copied on A4R/8.5”x11”R copy paper and output
to the Booklet tray of the finisher.
Specifications for Three-Fold Mode
Copy paper size: A4R, 8.5”x11”R* (80 g/m
2
paper recommended)
* The service setting is required to use 8.5”x11”R paper in this mode. Please
contact your service representative.
Max. number of folded sheets (80 g/m
2
only): 3 sheets
Paper weight: 64 ~ 105 g/m
2
; Special stock (80 g/m
2
paper is recommended)
Booklet tray capacity: 50 sets max. of 1-sheet-folded set (50 sheets)
Incompatible Conditions: Sort, Staple-sort, Group, Face Up, Rotation Sort,
Rotation Group, Output modes using secondary tray, Fold, Stitch & Fold,
Punch, Back cover feeding, Mixed Original, Dual Page, Program Job, Multi-
Page Enlargement, Reverse Image
1. Load A4R or 8.5”x11”R copy paper in a tray.
2. Touch OUTPUT MENU on the Basic Screen to display the Output
Mode popup menu.
3. Touch MAIN TRAY, if not highlighted.
A
Z
Three-Fold copy
Output Three-Folded Copies (Three-Fold) (continued)
8-15
4. Touch THREE-FOLD to highlight it.
5. Touch OK on the popup menu to complete the setting and return
to the Basic Screen.
The THREE-FOLD icon will be displayed in the OUTPUT icon area.
6. Select additional copying features, as required.
Touch to highlight the A4R or 8.5”x11”R tray key, if not already highlighted.
7. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.
See p. 3-10 for details on setting print quantity.
8. Position originals.
See p. 3-4 to p. 3-9 for details on positioning originals.
Up to 3 originals can be three-folded.
9. Press [START].
When the Booklet tray capacity is exceeded, the finisher will cease
operating. To avoid this, select the appropriate print quantity from
the specifications shown on p. 8-14.
8-16
Making Trimmed Booklets (Trimming)
The Trimming mode is available only when the TMG-3 Trimming unit option is
installed on the FN-9 Finisher. This function can be used with Fold or Stitch & Fold
mode to make each copied set folded or stitched & folded, trimmed at the edge that
opens the booklet, then output to the Trimmer unit tray.
Specifications for Trimming Mode
Max. number of folded sheets in Fold and Trimming modes
105 g/m
2
paper or less: 3 sheets
Max. number of folded sheets in Stitch & Fold and Trimming mode
80 g/m
2
paper: 20 sheets
19 sheets with a thick cover paper
105 g/m
2
paper: 16 sheets
15 sheets with a thick cover paper
Paper size: A3, B4, A4R, 11”x17”, 8.5”x14”, 8.5”x11”R (64 ~ 105 g/m
2
)
Trimmer unit tray capacity:
When the Trimmer unit tray capacity is exceeded, the Finisher and Trimmer unit
will stop operating. Select an appropriate print quantity by referring to the
following capacities.
Approx. 512 sheets max. (80 g/m
2
paper)
Fold and Trimming: 100 sets max. of 3-sheet-folded booklet
(100 x 3 = 300 sheets max.)
Stitch & Fold and Trimming: 100 sets max. of 2~5-sheet-folded booklet
(100 x 5 = 500 sheets max.)
50 sets max. of 6~10-sheet-folded booklet
(50 x 10 = 500 sheets max.)
32 sets max. of 11~16-sheet-folded booklet
(32 x 16 = 512 sheets max.)
25 sets max. of 17~20-sheet-folded booklet
(25 x 20 = 500 sheets max.)
Incompatible Conditions with Booklet selected: APS, 1a1, 2a1, ACS, Sort,
Staple-sort, Group, Face Up, Rotation sort, Rotation group, Three-Fold,
Punch, Back cover feeding, Mixed Original, Full Area in Non STD size, Tab
Paper, Sheet/Cover Insertion, Combination, Program Job, Multi-Page
Enlargement, Non-Image Area Erase, Reverse Image, Repeat
Incompatible conditions without Booklet: Sort, Staple-sort, Group, Face Up,
Rotation Sort, Rotation Group, Three-Fold, Punch, Back cover feeding, Mixed
Original, Dual Page, Program Job, Multi-Page Enlargement, Reverse Image
1. Touch OUTPUT MENU on the Basic Screen
The Output Mode popup menu will be displayed.
Fold and Trimming
Stitch & Fold
and Trimming
Making Trimmed Booklets (Trimming) (continued)
8-17
2. Touch MAIN TRAY, if not highlighted.
3. Select the desired trimming mode.
Touch STITCH & FOLD or FOLD, as desired.
When selecting FOLD, also touch TRIM to highlight it.
When selecting STITCH & FOLD, the machine with the trimmer unit
installed selects TRIM automatically.
When copying two-sided signature originals using the Fold or Stitch & Fold
mode, release the automatically selected Booklet mode on the Application
Selection Screen.
When copying dark originals or using Reverse Image mode together with
Fold or Stitch & Fold mode, the folded line of the output copies may be
slightly shifted.
4. Touch OK on the Output Mode popup menu.
The Basic Screen will be restored and the selection made in the output
mode will be reflected in the OUTPUT icon area.
5. Select additional copying features, as required.
NO COVER SHEET of Booklet is initially selected.
To change this selection, touch APPLICATION on the Basic Screen to display
the Application Selection Screen, then touch Booklet twice to display the
Booklet Mode Selection Screen to make another selection or to release the
setting.
Making Trimmed Booklets (Trimming) (continued)
8-18
6. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.
See p. 3-10 for details on setting print quantity.
7. Position originals.
See p. 3-4 to p. 3-9 for details on positioning originals.
When loading originals, heed the following limits on capacity:
Fold mode:
12 pages or less for simplex copying
6 pages or less for duplex copying
Stitch & Fold mode:
80 pages or less for simplex copying (80 g/m
2
paper only)
40 pages or less for duplex copying (80 g/m
2
paper only)
Exceeding the above capacity limits may cause trouble in the Finisher.
8. Press [START].
When the Trimmer unit tray capacity is exceeded, the Finisher and
Trimmer unit will cease operating. To avoid this, select the
appropriate print quantity from the specifications shown on p. 8-16.
8-19
Cover Sheet Feeding
The Cover Inserter is available as an option on the FN-120/FN-9 finisher.
Load cover sheet paper into this device and use the sheets as front covers for copied
sets output to the Main tray or use the sheets as booklet-type covers for copied sets
output to the Booklet tray in the Fold or Stitch & Fold mode.
Paper loaded into the cover sheet feeder cannot be copied.
This function is incompatible with cover sheet mode (COVER WITH COPY
SHEET and COVER WITH BLANK SHEET) in Booklet and cover mode in
Sheet/Cover Insertion.
Specifications for Cover Sheet Feeding
Cover paper size:
Upper tray; A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5*, 8.5”x11”, 8.5”x11”R, 5.5”x8.5”*
Lower tray; A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5*, 12”x18”, 11”x17”, 8.5”x14”,
8.5”x11”, 8.5”x11”R, 5.5”x8.5” *
*A5 and 5.5”x8.5” paper sizes are available in portrait type feeding only.
Cover paper weight: 50 ~ 200 g/m
2
cover paper
Tray capacity: 200 sheets (200 g/m
2
cover paper) or 30mm thick for both trays
Incompatible Conditions: Group, Rotation Sort, Rotation Group, Output to
Secondary (sub) tray, Punch, Cover mode in Sheet/Cover Insertion, Cover
sheet mode in Booklet, Multi-Page Enlargement
Incompatible with Back cover feeding: Fold, Stitch&Fold, Three-Fold
1. Touch OUTPUT MENU on the Basic Screen to display the
Output Mode popup menu.
Cover sheet
Copied set with
cover attached
Copied sets with cover
attached in Fold or
Stitch & Fold mode
Cover Sheet Feeding (continued)
8-20
2. Touch MAIN TRAY, if not highlighted.
3. Touch COVER SHEET to display the Cover Sheet Insert Selection
Screen.
4. Touch FRONT, FRONT+BACK, or BACK to highlight it, then select
the covers tray.
When selecting FRONT+BACK mode, different tray sources can be
specified for each.
Copy paper sizes available to be loaded are different in each tray. See the
specifications on p. 8-19.
5. Touch OK to restore the Output Mode popup menu.
6. Touch OK on the Output Mode popup menu.
The Basic Screen will be restored.
7. Select additional copying features, as required.
Cover Sheet Feeding (continued)
8-21
8. Load the cover sheet paper into the optional cover inserter of the
FN-120/FN-9 finisher.
If the paper size loaded in the cover inserter is not suitable, the following
messages will be displayed and copying will be unavailable till the correct
size is loaded.
9. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.
See p. 3-10 for details on setting print quantity.
10. Position originals.
See p. 3-4 to p. 3-9 for details on positioning originals.
11. Press [START].
When the finisher exit tray capacity is exceeded due to the print
quantity selected, remove the copied sets as they exit; otherwise,
mishandled paper will occur.
Please load cover sheet in
cover sheet feeder
Adapt paper size between
cover sheet and selected paper
Upper tray
Lower
tray
8-22
Off-Line Finishing
The Off-Line Finishing function enables you to finish documents independent of
copier operation. The Off-Line Finishing function is available only with the Cover
Inserter D installed on the FN-120/FN-9 Finisher. To use this convenient function,
simply place a set of paper into the lower tray of the cover sheet feeder, select the
desired mode from the Off-Line Finishing operation panel located on the top of the
finisher, then press the Start/Stop button.
Available finishing modes according to the optional configuration are described
below.
FN-120 Finisher + Cover Inserter D
1 oblique staple: Primary (main) tray
2 parallel staples: Primary (main) tray
FN-120 Finisher + Cover Inserter D + PK-5 Punch Kit
1 oblique staple
2 parallel staples
•Punch
FN-9 Finisher + Cover Inserter D
1 oblique staple
2 parallel staples
Stitch & Fold (2 staples in the centre + Fold)
Three-Fold
FN-9 Finisher + Cover Inserter D + PK-5 Punch Kit
1 oblique staple
2 parallel staples
Stitch & Fold (2 staples in the centre + Fold)
Three-Fold
•Punch
Specifications for Manual Stapling 1 oblique staple and 2 parallel staples
Paper size: A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5*, 12”x18”, 11”x17”, 8.5”x14”,
8.5”x11”, 8.5”x11”R
*A5 paper is available in portrait type feeding only.
Paper weight: 50 ~ 80 g/m
2
Staple capacity: 50 sheets max.
49 sheets max. with a thick (200 g/m
2
paper) front cover
Output tray: Primary (main) tray
Specifications for Manual Punch
Paper size: A3 to B5
Paper weight: 50 ~ 128* g/m
2
*Some paper types may not be punched easily.
Tray capacity: 200 sheets max. (200 g/m
2
paper) or within 30mm thick
Output tray: Primary (main) tray
Specifications for Manual Stitch & Fold mode
Paper size: A3, B4, A4R, 12”x18”, 11”x17”, 8.5”x14”, 8.5”x11”R
Paper weight: 60 ~ 200 g/m
2
Staple capacity: 20 sheets max. (80 g/m
2
paper)
19 sheets max. (80 g/m
2
paper with a thick paper cover)
16 sheets max. (105 g/m
2
paper)
15 sheets max. (105 g/m
2
paper with a thick paper cover)
Output tray: Booklet tray
Off-Line Finishing (continued)
8-23
Specifications for Manual Three-Fold
Paper size: A4R, 8.5”x11”R
Paper weight: 60 ~ 105 g/m
2
Three-fold capacity: 3 sheets
Output tray: Booklet tray
1. Place a set of paper to be
finished into the lower tray of
the cover inserter, as
described below for each
mode.
1 oblique staple / 2 parallel staples:
FACE UP
Punch: FACE UP
Stitch & Fold:
FACE UP for the outside of the
finished set
Three-Fold:
FACE UP for the outside of the folded set
Align the guide plate. The indicator light of Start/Stop button will turn green.
Refer to the specifications on previous page for available paper size and
capacity in each mode.
Stitch &
Fold
Three-Fold Punch
1 oblique staple
2 parallel staples
Start/Stop button
Guide plate
Lower
tray
Off-Line Finishing (continued)
8-24
2. Press Staple Mode Selection button and/or Punch button to select
the desired mode.
Punch mode is compatible with 1 oblique staple, 2 parallel staples, or Stitch &
Fold mode.
3. Press Start/Stop button.
Finished sheets will be delivered to the appropriate tray according to the
selected mode.
If you want to stop the Off-Line Finishing operation, press the Start/Stop
button again. The finisher will cease operating. When using Stitch & Fold
mode, the unfinished set will be left in the stacker unit inside the finisher.
When the Booklet tray capacity is exceeded, the finisher will cease
operating. To avoid this, select the appropriate print quantity from
the specifications on p. 8-8 and p. 8-14.
When the finisher exit tray capacity is exceeded due to the print
quantity selected, remove the copied sets as they exit; otherwise,
mishandled paper will occur.
9
Section 9:
Special Original
How to Make a Copy of Special
Original
Specifying Original Direction ............................................ 9-2
Copying Non-Standard Size Originals (Original Form)
......... 9-4
Copying Mixed Size Originals (Mixed Original) ................ 9-6
Copying Z-Folded Originals (Z-Folded Original)............... 9-8
Scanning Thin/Thick Originals in RADF (Original Thickness)
.. 9-10
9-2
Specifying Original Direction
Specify the direction of the originals placed on RADF or platen glass.
This setting is required to obtain copy results as expected when making double-sided
copies with binding position specified or when staple position is specified.
1. Touch SPECIAL ORIGINAL on the Basic Screen.
The Special Original popup menu will be displayed.
When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then
press [AUTO RESET].
2. Touch to highlight the desired original direction key.
A
Z
A
Z
A
Z
A
Z
A
Z
A
Z
A
Z
A
Z
Originals on RADF:
Originals on platen glass:
Specifying Original Direction (continued)
9-3
3. Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Basic Screen.
The SPECIAL ORIGINAL key on the Basic Screen is highlighted, and the
icon in the message area indicates the selected original direction.
4. Make other compatible selections.
5. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.
See p. 3-10 for details on setting print quantity.
6. Position originals FACE UP in the document feeder or FACE DOWN
on the platen glass according to the original direction specified in
step 2.
See the illustration on previous page, and p. 3-4 to p. 3-9 for details on
positioning originals.
7. Press [START].
When the finisher / trimmer unit / paper exit tray capacity is
exceeded due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets
as they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur.
9-4
Copying Non-Standard Size Originals (Original Form)
The copier usually detects the standard size of originals fed through RADF or
positioned on the platen glass (STD size mode).
Use Non STD size mode to specify the scanning area manually for copying or
printing special size originals. Use Tab paper mode to copy a tabbed original,
including the image of the tab part, onto tabbed copy paper.
Specifications for Original Form
Tab extension width: 12.5 mm or less
Incompatible with Non STD Size: Mixed Original, Z-Folded Original, Tab Paper,
Storing image in Overlay Memory
Incompatible with FULL AREA: APS, AMS, Rotation Sort, Rotation Group,
Mixed Original, Z-Folded Original, Tab Paper, Combination, Booklet, Dual
Page, Non-Image Area Erase, Image Shift
Incompatible with Tab Paper: 2a2, 2a1, APS, AMS, ACS, Single Colour, Full
Colour, Original Type in Special Original, Mixed Original, Z-Folded Original,
Non STD Size, Sheet/Cover Insertion, Chapter, Combination, Booklet, Image
Insert, Dual Page, Multi-Page Enlargement, Storing image in Overlay Memory
1. Touch SPECIAL ORIGINAL on the Basic Screen.
The Special Original popup menu will be displayed.
When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then
press [AUTO RESET].
2. Touch Non STD size or Tab paper.
The popup menu will appear for Non STD size or Tab paper size setting.
Copying Non-Standard Size Originals (Original Form)
(continued)
9-5
3. Touch the desired size key.
When selecting FULL AREA on the Non STD size mode menu, the copier
scans the full area of the platen glass and copies with the paper size or
magnification ratio currently selected.
4. Touch OK on the popup menu to complete the setting.
The popup menu will disappear.
5. Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Basic Screen.
6. Load copy paper.
To load tabbed copy paper in the Multi-sheet bypass tray, specify the paper
type as Tab paper. See p. 3-18 to p. 3-21.
To load tabbed copy paper in any other tray, specify the paper type as Tab
paper in the Key Operator mode. See p. 14-21 to p. 14-22.
For the procedure of tabbed copy paper supply, see p. 2-30 to p. 2-32.
7. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.
See p. 3-10 for details on setting print quantity.
8. Position original(s) FACE UP in the document feeder, or FACE
DOWN on the platen glass.
See p. 3-4 to p. 3-9 for details on positioning originals.
Use RADF store mode (p. 3-33 to p. 3-34) when the original count exceeds
100.
9. Press [START].
When the finisher / trimmer unit / paper exit tray capacity is
exceeded due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets
as they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur.
9-6
Copying Mixed Size Originals (Mixed Original)
Use the Mixed original mode with the document feeder or with Store mode to copy
mixed size originals.
Each original in the mixed set will be copied to paper of the same size (APS mode)
or to paper of desired size with appropriate ratio automatically selected (AMS mode).
Specifications for Mixed Original
Use RADF.
Combination of original sizes to be mixed depends on the width of the RADF
original guides. See p. 12-10 for details.
Incompatible Conditions: Rotation Sort, Rotation Group, Fold, Stitch & Fold,
Trimming, Three-Fold, Punch (B6R mixed), Z-Folded Original, Non STD Size,
Tab Paper, Sheet/Cover Insertion, Chapter, Combination, Booklet, Image
Insert, Dual Page, Program Job, Multi-Page Enlargement, Non-Image Area
Erase, Repeat, AUTO Layout, Reduce&Shift in Image Shift, Overlay, Storing
image in Overlay Memory
1. Touch SPECIAL ORIGINAL on the Basic Screen.
The Special Original popup menu will be displayed.
When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then
press [AUTO RESET].
2. Touch SPECIAL SETTING.
The Special Setting popup menu will be displayed.
Mixed size originals
APS mode
Automatically
select the paper
of the same size
as that of the
original.
AMS mode
Automatically select
magnification ratio
to copy onto the
same paper in size.
Copying Mixed Size Originals (Mixed Original) (continued)
9-7
3. Touch Mixed Original, then touch OK.
The Special Original popup menu will be restored.
4. Touch OK to return to the Basic Screen.
5. Select additional copying features, as desired.
APS is automatically selected on the Basic Screen.
To select AMS, touch the tray key on the Basic Screen to select the desired
paper size.
6. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.
See p. 3-10 for details on setting print quantity.
7. Position mixed original(s) FACE UP in the document feeder.
See p. 3-6 for details on positioning originals.
Use RADF store mode (p. 3-33 to p. 3-34) when the original count exceeds
100.
8. Press [START].
When the finisher / paper exit tray capacity is exceeded due to the
print quantity selected, remove the copied sets as they exit;
otherwise, mishandled paper will occur.
9-8
Copying Z-Folded Originals (Z-Folded Original)
Use the Z-folded original mode with the document feeder to copy Z-folded originals.
Otherwise, the size detection sensor of the RADF may function incorrectly.
This mode requires more scanning time to detect the original size.
Specifications for Z-Folded Original
Use RADF.
Incompatible Conditions: Using platen glass, Rotation Sort, Rotation Group,
Mixed Original, Non STD Size, Tab Paper, Multi-Page Enlargement, Non-
Image Area Erase, Repeat, AUTO Layout, Storing image in Overlay Memory
1. Touch SPECIAL ORIGINAL on the Basic Screen.
The Special Original popup menu will be displayed.
When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then
press [AUTO RESET].
2. Touch SPECIAL SETTING.
The Special Setting popup menu will be displayed.
Z-folded original
Copying Z-Folded Originals (Z-Folded Original) (continued)
9-9
3. Touch Z-Folded original, then touch OK.
The Special Original popup menu will be restored.
4. Touch OK to return to the Basic Screen.
5. Select additional copying features, as desired.
6. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.
See p. 3-10 for details on setting print quantity.
7. Position Z-folded original(s) FACE UP in the document feeder.
See p. 3-7 for details on positioning originals.
Use RADF store mode (p. 3-33 to p. 3-34) when the original count exceeds
100.
8. Press [START].
When the finisher / paper exit tray capacity is exceeded due to the
print quantity selected, remove the copied sets as they exit;
otherwise, mishandled paper will occur.
9-10
Scanning Thin/Thick Originals in RADF (Original Thickness)
Use the Thin or Thick original mode with the document feeder to copy thin or thick
originals. Otherwise, the originals may be misfed in the document feeder.
Specifications for Original Thickness
Use RADF.
Incompatible Copying Conditions: None
1. Touch SPECIAL ORIGINAL on the Basic Screen.
The Special Original popup menu will be displayed.
When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then
press [AUTO RESET].
2. Touch SPECIAL SETTING.
The Special Setting popup menu will be displayed.
3. Touch Thick or Thin as required, then touch OK.
The Special Original popup menu will be restored.
4. Touch OK to return to the Basic Screen.
5. Select additional copying features, as desired.
Scanning Thin/Thick Originals in RADF (Original Thickness)
(continued)
9-11
6. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.
See p. 3-10 for details on setting print quantity.
7. Position original(s) FACE UP in the document feeder.
See p. 3-4 to p. 3-7 for details on positioning originals.
Use RADF store mode (p. 3-33 to p. 3-34) when the original count exceeds
100.
8. Press [START].
When the finisher / trimmer unit / paper exit tray capacity is
exceeded due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets
as they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur.
10
Section 10:
Applications
How to Use Application Functions
To Display Application Selection Screen ........................ 10-2
Inserting Sheets and Covers (Sheet/Cover Insertion)
........ 10-3
Locating Title Pages on the Right Side (Chapter) .......... 10-7
Lay Out Several Pages onto One Sheet (Combination)
.... 10-10
Making a Multiple Page Signature Booklet (Booklet)
........ 10-13
Inserting Images into Printed Sets (Image Insert)........ 10-17
Dividing an Image into Right and Left Pages (Dual Page)
.... 10-20
Programming Different Settings for an Output Job (Program Job)
.... 10-24
Dividing an Image for Enlarged Copy (Multi-Page Enlargement)
..... 10-27
Erasing Outside of the Original (Non-Image Area Erase)
.10-30
Reversing Colour in Image (Reverse Image)
.............................. 10-32
Repeating Selected Image Area (Repeat: Vert./Horiz. Mode)
10-34
Repeating Automatically or Selecting RepeatingTimes (Repeat: AUTO/ Repeat Mode)
.... 10-37
Eliminating Copy Marks Along Borders (Frame/Fold Erasure)
... 10-40
Copying Image in the Centre of Copy Paper (AUTO Layout)
.10-43
Adjusting Position of Copy Image (Image Shift) ........... 10-45
Reducing Images to Create Binding Margin (Reduce&Shift)
.10-48
Printing Stamp, Page, Date/Time onto Copies (Stamp)
.... 10-51
Printing Watermark onto Copies (Stamp)..................... 10-58
Overlaying an Image onto Each Page Copied in the Job (Overlay)
.. 10-62
Storing an Overlay Image in HDD / Overlaying Image Stored in HDD (Overlay Memory)
... 10-65
10-2
To Display Application Selection Screen
Follow the procedure below to display the Application Selection Screen and select
the desired copying features.
1. Touch APPLICATION on the Basic Screen.
The Application Selection Screen will be displayed on the touch panel.
When a function key is touched, it becomes highlighted. If you touch a
function key, another screen or two will display to enable you to enter the
appropriate settings.
•Check BOOK MARK in the message area of the subsequent screen, if
desired, so that the screen may be directly accessed from the Check
Screen to change the setting you made.
If one function on the menu is incompatible with another, it will appear
dimmed.
•The APPLICATION key on the Basic Screen will be highlighted when
application selections have been made.
To restore the original copying conditions, touch CANCEL.
To clear all Application settings, touch ALL CLEAR.
2. Touch OK on the Application Selection Screen.
Selections will be completed and the Basic Screen will be restored.
With the Basic Screen displayed, you can press [START] to perform the
operation.
10-3
Inserting Sheets and Covers (Sheet/Cover Insertion)
Use Sheet/Cover Insertion in copy mode or blank mode to insert chapter sheets or
separator sheets into the finished set, as well as front and back covers.
Specifications for Sheet/Cover Insertion
Use RADF.
Trays for copy paper, front/back covers, and insertions should have the same
paper size loaded. AMS (Automatic Magnification Selection) is automatically
selected.
Max. insert sheets: 30 locations, from 1~999, including front and back covers
Incompatible Conditions: APS, Group, Rotation Sort, Rotation Group, Fold/
Stitch&Fold/ Trimming (with Booklet selected), Mixed Original, Tab Paper,
Combination, Booklet, Image Insert, Dual Page, Program Job, Multi-Page
Enlargement, Non-image Area Erase, Repeat (except 2/4/8 Repeat), AUTO
Layout, Overlay, Storing Image in Overlay Memory
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
SURVEYOR’S
REPORT
SURVEYOR’S
REPORT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
SURVEYOR’S
REPORT
SURVEYOR’S
REPORT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
SURVEYOR’S
REPORT
SURVEYOR’S
REPORT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
SURVEYOR’S
REPORT
SURVEYOR’S
REPORT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
SURVEYOR’S
REPORT
SURVEYOR’S
REPORT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
SURVEYOR’S
REPORT
SURVEYOR’S
REPORT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
SURVEYOR’S
REPORT
SURVEYOR’S
REPORT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
SURVEYOR’S
REPORT
SURVEYOR’S
REPORT
Originals
Copies
Originals
Copies
Originals
Copies
Originals
Copies
Originals
Copies
Originals
Copies
FRONT COVER BLANK
BACK COVER BLANK
COPY SHEET INSERTION
BLANK SHEET INSERTION
BACK COVER COPIED
Combination samples:
FRONT & BACK COVERS COPIED,
AND COPY SHEET INSERTION
FRONT & BACK COVERS BLANK,
AND BLANK SHEET INSERTION
FRONT COVER COPIED
Inserting Sheets and Covers (Sheet/Cover Insertion)
(continued)
10-4
1. Load regular sheets into any tray, and insertion sheets and
covers into each tray source to be designated on the Sheet/
Cover Insertion Screen.
When using thick paper or tabbed paper for covers or insertions, load them
in the Multi-sheet bypass tray, unless previously specified and loaded in
any other tray.
Be sure that the trays for copy paper, front/back covers, and insertions have
the same paper size loaded.
2. Touch APPLICATION on the Basic Screen.
When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then
press [AUTO RESET].
3. Touch Sheet/Cover Insertion on the Application Selection Screen.
The Sheet/Cover Insertion Screen will be displayed.
4. Select the desired cover mode.
Example: Touch FRONT COPY to insert a copied front cover.
Inserting Sheets and Covers (Sheet/Cover Insertion)
(continued)
10-5
5. Touch CHANGE OF THE TRAY to select the cover sheet tray source.
The tray source for covers currently selected is displayed on the Sheet/
Cover Insertion Screen.
Every touch of the key shifts the selection in the display that includes paper
type as specified in Key Operator mode.
If no insertion is desired, proceed to step 8.
6. When selecting Insertion mode:
Enter the page number.
Touch to select the desired insertion mode, then use the control panel
keypad to enter the page number of insertion location.
Touch SET after each entry to move to the next key.
To clear an incorrect entry, touch DELETE. The insertion location will be
deleted.
DETAILS: Entering Page Numbers
Fifteen keys are displayed on the screen to designate each insertion location.
When setting more than 15 locations, touch the arrow key to move to the next
page.
The first (upper left) key displays the Front Cover icon if selected. The Back
Cover icon appears, if selected, as the last (fixed) key, with one active blank
key preceding it.
Example: If p. 4 is entered in blank mode, a blank sheet will be inserted
between p. 4 and p. 5; in copy mode, a copied sheet is inserted at p. 4.
NOTES:
The page numbers entered at random will be sorted automatically.
Entering “0” or the same page number twice will be ignored on the screen.
When a page number entered is larger than the total original page count, it
will be ignored.
7. Touch CHANGE OF THE TRAY to select the insertion tray source.
The tray source for covers currently selected is displayed on the Sheet/
Cover Insertion Screen.
Every touch of the key shifts the selection in the display that includes paper
type as specified in Key Operator mode.
Inserting Sheets and Covers (Sheet/Cover Insertion)
(continued)
10-6
8. When all settings are completed, touch OK to return to the
Application Selection Screen.
The Basic Screen will be restored.
9. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.
See p. 3-10 for details on setting print quantity.
10. Position originals FACE UP in the document feeder.
For details on positioning originals, see p. 3-4.
Use RADF store mode (p. 3-33 to p. 3-34) when the original count exceeds
100.
11. Press [START].
When the finisher / paper exit tray capacity is exceeded due to the
print quantity selected, remove the copied sets as they exit;
otherwise, mishandled paper will occur.
10-7
Locating Title Pages on the Right Side (Chapter)
Chapter is used with RADF in 1-2 mode for the purpose of locating title pages on the right
side, rather than reverse side, of a duplex copy to improve the presentation of double-
sided copies.
To effectively locate the title page on the right, a blank sheet will be automatically
created on the reverse side of a sheet, if required.
Specifications for Chapter
Use RADF.
Max. title pages: 30 sheets, from 1 ~ 999
Use STAMP together with this function to print chapter number onto chapter
page in addition to page number, numbering, or watermark numbering. See p.
10-51 to p. 10-61.
Incompatible Conditions: 1a1, 2a1, Group, Rotation Sort, Rotation Group,
Face Up, Mixed Original, Tab Paper, Combination, Image Insert, Program Job,
Multi-Page Enlargement, Non-Image Area Erase, Repeat, Storing Image in
Overlay Memory
1. Touch APPLICATION on the Basic Screen.
When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then
press [AUTO RESET].
2. Touch Chapter on the Application Selection Screen.
The Chapter Insertion Setting No. Screen will be displayed.
8
4
6
2
5
1
8
1
7
6
5
4
3
2
Title pages
Title pages
1-sided originals
Copies in
Chapter mode
3
7
Locating Title Pages on the Right Side (Chapter) (continued)
10-8
3. Use the control panel keypad to enter the page number of each
title page.
Touch SET after each entry to move to the next key.
When setting more than 15 locations, touch the arrow key to move to the
next page.
To clear an incorrect entry, touch DELETE. The entered number will be
deleted.
Entering “0” or the same page number twice will be ignored on the screen.
Chapter insertions occur in sequence even if original page numbers are
entered out of sequence.
When a page number is larger than the total original page count, insertion
occurs as the last page of the document.
Touch Booklet on the Chapter Insertion Setting No. Screen to use this
function.
To change the selection of paper tray for copying title pages, touch COPIED
INSERT on the screen. In this case, you can touch CHANGE OF THE TRAY
to change the currently selected paper tray displayed on the screen.
4. When all entries are made, touch OK.
The Application Selection Screen will be restored.
5. Touch OK on the Application Selection Screen.
The Basic Screen will be restored.
Locating Title Pages on the Right Side (Chapter) (continued)
10-9
6. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.
See p. 3-10 for details on setting print quantity.
7. Position originals FACE UP in the document feeder.
For details on positioning originals, see p. 3-4 to p. 3-7.
Use RADF store mode (p. 3-33 to p. 3-34) when the original count exceeds
100.
8. Press [START].
When the finisher / trimmer unit / paper exit tray capacity is
exceeded due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets
as they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur.
10-10
Lay Out Several Pages onto One Sheet (Combination)
Use this function to lay out and copy a fixed number (2, 4, or 8) of pages onto one
sheet of copy paper (2 in 1, 4 in 1, or 8 in 1).
Specifications for Combination
Use RADF.
AMS is automatically selected. (Normally the fixed size of Tray 1 will be
selected.)
Incompatible Conditions: ACS, APS, Group, Rotation Sort, Rotation Group,
Fold/ Stitch&Fold/ Trimming (with Booklet selected), Mixed Original, Tab Paper,
Sheet/Cover Insertion, Chapter, Booklet, Image Insert, Dual page, Program
Job, Multi-Page Enlargement, Non-Image Area Erase, Repeat, Overlay,
Storing Image in Overlay Memory
1. Touch APPLICATION on the Basic Screen.
When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then
press [AUTO RESET].
2. Touch Combination on the Application Selection Screen.
The Combination Mode Selection Screen will be displayed.
12
12
34
1
5
2
6
3
7
4
8
Original
2 in 1 copying
4 in 1 copying
8 in 1 copying
Lay Out Several Pages onto One Sheet (Combination)
(continued)
10-11
3. Select the desired Combination mode.
Touch 2 in 1, 4 in 1 or 8 in 1 in the desired order area, referring to the
illustration on the following page.
4. Touch OK.
The Application Selection Screen will be restored.
5. Touch OK on the Application Selection Screen.
The Basic Screen will be restored.
AMS is automatically selected. When selecting any tray other than the one
that is set and displayed on the Basic Screen, touch the desired tray key.
6. Select the desired original direction.
Lay Out Several Pages onto One Sheet (Combination)
(continued)
10-12
Touch SPECIAL ORIGINAL on the Basic Screen to display the Special
Original popup menu. Touch to select the desired original direction, then
touch OK to return to the Basic Screen.
7. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.
See p. 3-10 for details on setting print quantity.
8. Position originals FACE UP in the document feeder.
For details on positioning originals, see p. 3-4 to p. 3-7.
Use RADF store mode (p. 3-33 to p. 3-34) when the original count exceeds
100.
9. Press [START].
When the finisher / paper exit tray capacity is exceeded due to the
print quantity selected, remove the copied sets as they exit;
otherwise, mishandled paper will occur.
DETAILS: Original Type and Layout Order
Refer to the table below to select the desired Combination mode.
12
1
2
12
34
1
5
2
6
3
7
4
8
12
34
12
34
56
78
13
24
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
13
24
15
26
37
48
2 in 1 4 in 1 8 in 1 4 in 1 8 in 1
Portrait type
Landscape type
Original
Layout
Horizontal order Vertical order
10-13
Making a Multiple Page Signature Booklet (Booklet)
Use the Booklet to make a multiple page signature booklet on both sides of paper
from any tray unless it is specified as Thick (210 ~ 256 g/m
2
paper) or Tab paper of
the paper type in the Key Operator mode. Original images are scanned into memory
and automatically arranged in booklet format in correct order.
Specifications for Booklet
Use RADF.
Original pages should be a multiple of 4 in 1-2 mode or a multiple of 2 in 2-2
mode; otherwise blank pages are automatically inserted to the last.
AMS is automatically selected. Select the desired paper size.
Incompatible Conditions: ACS, APS, 1a1, 2a1, Group, Rotation Sort, Rotation
Group, Face Up, Cover sheet feeder with Cover mode in Booklet, Mixed
Original, Tab Paper, Sheet/Cover Insertion, Combination, Program Job, Multi-
Page Enlargement, Non-Image Area Erase, Repeat, Storing Image in Overlay
Memory
1. Load Copy Paper.
Load the desired copy paper size in a tray.
When selecting cover sheet mode (Cover sheet (Copy sheet) or Cover
sheet (Blank sheet)), load the same size paper in any other tray unless it
is specified as Thick or Tab paper of the paper type in the Key Operator
mode.
2. Touch APPLICATION on the Basic Screen.
When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then
press [AUTO RESET].
1
2
3
4
47
48
..............
..............
2
47
148
4
45
346
24
25
2326
1-sided originals
2-sided originals
..............
2
1
4
3
6
5
8
7
46
45
48
47
Booklet copying
Making a Multiple Page Signature Booklet (Booklet)
(continued)
10-14
3. Touch Booklet on the Application Selection Screen.
4. Touch to highlight the desired Booklet mode key.
When a cover sheet is required, touch CHANGE OF THE PAPER TRAY to
select the cover sheet tray source.
Touch the desired output order key if you want to change the output order.
5. Touch OK.
The Application Selection Screen will be restored.
Select additional Applications, as desired.
Key Operator can set the machine to position the page numbers automatically
on the outside edges of the copy when using Booklet with Page Numbering in
Stamp. See p. 14-37 to p. 14-42.
6. Touch OK on the Application Selection Screen.
The Basic Screen will be restored.
AMS is selected automatically.
7. Select the tray in which you loaded copy paper in step 1.
To release AMS, select the desired magnification, then select paper size.
8. Select the 1
a
2 or 2
a
2 copy mode.
If the copier is equipped with FN-9 Finisher, Fold or Stitch & Fold output mode
is available. Follow the procedure on p. 8-8 to use the function.
9. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.
Making a Multiple Page Signature Booklet (Booklet)
(continued)
10-15
See p. 3-10 for details on setting print quantity.
10. Position originals FACE UP in the document feeder.
For details on positioning originals, see p. 3-4 to p. 3-7.
Use RADF store mode (p. 3-33 to p. 3-34) when the original count exceeds
100.
Original pages should be a multiple of 4 in 1-2 mode or a multiple of 2 in 2-2
mode; otherwise blank pages are automatically inserted to the last.
When loading originals, heed the following limits on capacity:
Fold mode 12 pages or less for simplex copying
6 pages or less for duplex copying
Stitch & Fold mode80 pages or less for simplex copying
40 pages or less for duplex copying
Exceeding the above limits on capacity may cause misfeeds in the finisher.
11. Press [START].
When the finisher / paper exit tray capacity is exceeded due to the
print quantity selected, remove the copied sets as they exit;
otherwise, mishandled paper will occur.
When the Booklet / Trimmer unit tray capacity is exceeded, the
finisher / trimmer unit will cease operating. To avoid such trouble,
select an appropriate print quantity from the specifications on p. 12-
4.
Making a Multiple Page Signature Booklet (Booklet)
(continued)
10-16
The roller drive unit is located inside the Booklet tray of the finisher.
DO NOT put your hand into the roller drive unit when removing
folded or stapled & folded sheets; otherwise, you may be injured.
DETAILS: Selecting Fold / Stitch & Fold Mode
1 Touch OUTPUT MENU on the Basic Screen to display the Output Mode
popup menu, then touch MAIN TRAY to highlight it.
2 Touch STITCH & FOLD or FOLD, as desired.
NOTE:
Selecting FOLD or STITCH & FOLD will automatically switch the output
tray to Booklet tray. Notice that the arrow shown beside the Main tray shifts
to the Booklet tray.
3 Touch OK on the Output Mode popup menu. The Basic Screen will be
restored with the OUTPUT MENU highlighted.
10-17
Inserting Images into Printed Sets (Image Insert)
Use the Image insert mode to combine images scanned from the platen glass, such
as photos, paste-ups, newspaper articles, graphs, etc., with images scanned from
the document feeder. Then, output the combined images as a finished set.
The selected copy paper size is determined by the size of originals loaded in the
document feeder.
Specifications for Image Insert
Use RADF and platen glass.
Max. image insert: 30 locations, from p. 1 to p. 999
Incompatible Conditions: Group, Rotation Sort, Rotation Group, Mixed Original,
Tab Paper, Sheet/Cover Insertion, Chapter, Combination, Dual Page, Program
Job, Multi-Page Enlargement, Non-Image Area Erase, Repeat, AUTO Layout,
Overlay, Storing Image in Overlay Memory
1. Touch APPLICATION on the Basic Screen.
When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then
press [AUTO RESET].
2. Touch Image Insert on the Application Selection Screen.
The Image Insertion No. Setting Screen will be displayed.
1-sided originals
placed on RADF
2-sided originals
placed on RADF
5
6
7
8
2
4
1
3
7
8
4
5
2
3
1
6
8
1
7
6
5
4
3
2
8
7
6
1
5
4
3
2
Insertion originals
on platen glass
Inserting Images into Printed Sets (Image Insert) (continued)
10-18
3. Use the control panel keypad to enter the page number.
Touch SET after each entry to move to the next key.
When setting more than 15 locations, touch the arrow key to move to the
next page.
To clear an incorrect entry, touch DELETE. The entered page number will
be deleted.
DETAILS: Entering Page Numbers
For example, if insertion locations are [2/2/6], scanned platen images will be
inserted as follows:
The first scanned platen image will be inserted after page 2.
The second scanned platen image will be inserted directly after the first
scanned Image insertion.
The third scanned platen image will be inserted after page 6.
NOTES:
When a page number is larger than the total original count, a sheet is
inserted as the last page.
Insertions occur in sequence, even if page numbers are entered out of
sequence.
Entering the same page number twice will insert two sheets at that
location.
Touch Booklet on the Image Insertion No. Setting Screen to use this function.
4. When all page number entries are made, touch OK.
The Application Selection Screen will be restored.
5. Touch OK on the Application Selection Screen.
The Basic Screen will be restored.
The STORE key on the Basic Screen appears highlighted to show that the
Store mode is automatically selected.
6. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.
See p. 3-10 for details on setting print quantity.
Inserting Images into Printed Sets (Image Insert) (continued)
10-19
7. Scan the document feeder images:
Position originals FACE UP in the document feeder.
If the number of originals exceeds 100, divide them into blocks not
exceeding 100 sheets and load them from the block with the first page.
8. Press [START].
The originals positioned in the document feeder will be scanned into
memory.
9. Scan the platen glass images.
Open the document feeder.
Position an original FACE DOWN on the platen glass, then close the
document feeder.
PLACE AND SCAN THE ORIGINALS IN ORDER.
10. Press [START].
11. Repeat steps 9 and 10 for all originals.
Memory overflow may occur during scanning. See p. 5-9 to p. 5-10.
Should memory overflow occur frequently, it is recommended that you
contact your service representative to extend the memory capacity in your
machine.
12. Touch STORE to exit the Store mode.
13. Press [START].
The copier will start printing when ready for output.
When the finisher / trimmer unit / paper exit tray capacity is
exceeded due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets
as they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur.
10-20
Dividing an Image into Right and Left Pages (Dual Page)
The Dual Page mode performs image division on the original image. Use this
function to copy an open book or a ledger sheet onto two A4 sheets in 1-1 or 2-1
mode, or onto the front and back sides of one A4 sheet in 1-2 or 2-2 mode.
The following three modes can be selected from the Dual Page Screen.
Facing Pages mode: Image division starts from the first scan.
Front Cover+Facing Pages mode: Image division starts from the second scan,
after the first scan copies normally.
Front/Back Cover+Facing Pages mode: Image division starts from the third
scan, after the first and second scan copy normally.
Specifications for Dual Page
Store mode is automatically selected.
Paper size: A4
Incompatible Conditions: APS, AMS, Rotation Sort, Rotation Group, Fold/
Stitch&Fold/Trimming (available with Booklet selected), Mixed Original, Tab
Paper, Sheet/Cover Insertion, Combination, Image Insert, Program Job, Multi-
Page Enlargement, Repeat, Reduce & Shift in Image Shift, Overlay, Storing
Image in Overlay Memory
1. Touch APPLICATION on the Basic Screen.
When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then
press [AUTO RESET].
Set original
1-2 / 2-2 mode
1-1 / 2-1 mode
Dividing an Image into Right and Left Pages (Dual Page)
(continued)
10-21
2. Touch Dual Page on the Application Selection Screen.
The Dual Page Screen will be displayed.
3. Select the desired Dual Page mode.
Touch to highlight the desired mode key.
4. Touch Output-n to 1 or Output-1 to n to select the output order
according to the original pagination.
Touch Booklet on the Dual Page Screen to use this function.
5. Touch OK.
The Application Selection Screen will be restored.
6. Touch OK on the Application Selection Screen.
The Basic Screen will be restored.
APS and AMS are automatically released, and the STORE key appears
highlighted to show that the Store mode is automatically selected.
Dividing an Image into Right and Left Pages (Dual Page)
(continued)
10-22
7. Select the desired copy mode and magnification.
Available paper size is A4.
When selecting Facing pages mode and scanning from the platen glass,
select 1-1 or 1-2 copy mode.
APS and AMS are released and 1.000 magnification is selected automatically.
Change the magnification manually, if desired.
8. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.
See p. 3-10 for details on setting print quantity.
9. Position original(s).
When using platen glass to scan, position the first page FACE DOWN with
document feeder kept open.
When using document feeder, position original(s) FACE UP.
For details on scanning originals in Front cover + Facing pages and Front/
Back Cover + Facing pages mode, see the description on the following
page.
10. Press [START] to scan.
11. Repeat steps 9 and 10 for all originals.
When using platen glass, Non-Image Area Erase and AUTO Layout are
automatically selected.
DO NOT CLOSE the document feeder throughout the scanning job.
12. Touch STORE to exit the Store mode.
13. Press [START].
The copier will start printing when ready for output.
When the finisher / paper exit tray capacity is exceeded due to the
print quantity selected, remove the copied sets as they exit;
otherwise, mishandled paper will occur.
Dividing an Image into Right and Left Pages (Dual Page)
(continued)
10-23
Scanning Original for Cover
Use platen glass for scanning original for cover.
1 Open the document feeder.
2 Position original for front cover FACE DOWN on the platen glass.
3 Press [START] to start scanning.
4 When Front/Back Cover + Facing pages is selected, scan original for back
cover according to the above steps 2 and 3.
5 Use platen glass or document feeder, as required, for scanning body text
originals.
To output the set in the same order as the originals, start scanning from the
first page.
6 Press [START] to start scanning.
7 Repeat steps 5 and 6 for subsequent originals.
NOTES:
Memory overflow may occur during scanning. See p. 5-9 to p. 5-10.
When using platen glass, Non-Image Area Erase and AUTO Layout are
automatically selected.
DO NOT CLOSE the document feeder throughout the scanning job.
“Front cover + Facing pages”
“Front/Back cover + Facing pages”
Scan from
first page
Scan from
first page
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
SURVEYOR’S
REPORT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
SURVEYOR’S
REPORT
SURVEYOR’S
REPORT
SURVEYOR’S
REPORT
SURVEYOR’S
REPORT
Copies
Copies
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
SURVEYOR’S
REPORT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
SURVEYOR’S
REPORT
SURVEYOR’S
REPORT
“Front cover + Facing pages”
“Front/Back cover + Facing pages”
Copies
Copies
10-24
Programming Different Settings for an Output Job (Program Job)
In the ordinary Store mode, the combined features selected for the job are applied to
all originals to be scanned. In the Program Job mode, you may scan multiple sets of
originals and apply different settings on each set (referred to as JOB), then output
them all as a complete set.
Specifications for Program Job
Max. 100 JOBs can be programmed for an output job.
Once specified, paper size and the paper type/size setting for Multi-sheet
bypass tray cannot be changed for another JOB.
Output mode and print quantity setting cannot be specified for each JOB. The
last setting made will be applied to all JOBs.
Program Job settings cannot be stored in Job Memory.
Incompatible Conditions: APS, Change paper size, Group, Rotation Sort,
Rotation Group, Fold, Stitch & Fold, Trimming, Mixed Original, Sheet/Cover
Insertion, Chapter, Combination, Booklet, Image Insert, Dual Page, Multi-Page
Enlargement, 2/4/8 Repeat in Repeat, Overlay, Storing Image in Overlay
Memory
1. Touch APPLICATION on the Basic Screen.
When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then
press [AUTO RESET].
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
Original A
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Original C
1
2
3
4
5
6
Original B
1
2
Copied set
Programming Different Settings for an Output Job (Program Job)
(continued)
10-25
2. Touch Program Job on the Application Selection Screen.
The incompatible function keys will be dimmed to show inactivity.
3. Touch OK on the Application Selection Screen.
The Basic Screen will be restored.
The STORE key on the Basic Screen appears highlighted to show that the
Store mode is automatically selected.
4. Select the desired copy conditions.
5. Position originals FACE UP in the document feeder or FACE DOWN
on the platen glass.
If the number of document feeder originals exceeds 100, divide them into
blocks not exceeding 100 sheets and load them from the block with the first
page.
6. Press [START].
The paper size determined at this time will be applied to all subsequent
JOBs.
When scanning for the current JOB is completed, the popup menu will be
displayed in the Basic Screen.
7. Touch DECISION.
The current JOB images will be stored.
To delete the images, touch CANCEL.
Programming Different Settings for an Output Job (Program Job)
(continued)
10-26
8. Repeat steps 4 to 7 until all JOB originals are scanned.
PLACE AND SCAN EACH ORIGINAL SET IN THE CORRECT ORDER OF
PAGINATION.
Memory overflow may occur during scanning. See p. 5-9 to p. 5-10.
Should memory overflow occur frequently, it is recommended that you
contact your service representative to expand the memory capacity in your
machine.
9. Select the desired output mode and enter the print quantity from
the control panel keypad.
See p. 3-10 for details on setting print quantity.
10. Touch STORE to exit the Store mode.
11. Press [START].
When the finisher / paper exit tray capacity is exceeded due to the
print quantity selected, remove the copied sets as they exit;
otherwise, mishandled paper will occur.
10-27
Dividing an Image for Enlarged Copy (Multi-Page Enlargement)
Use this function to make an enlarged copy, made up of several copied pages
divided and enlarged from an original image.
Specifications for Multi-Page Enlargement
Use the platen glass only.
Use APS, or select the desired paper size on the Basic Screen. If APS is used,
the largest paper size will be selected automatically.
The output size can be selected (standard size) or determined when a
magnification ratio is entered on the screen.
Incompatible Conditions: Using RADF, 1a2, 2a2, 2a1, APS, AMS, 1:1, Staple,
Group, Rotation, Rotation Sort, Rotation Group, Fold, Stitch&Fold, Three-Fold,
Trimming, Cover Sheet Feeding, Mixed Original, Z-Folded Original, Non STD
Size (except FULL AREA), Sheet/Cover Insertion, Chapter, Combination,
Booklet, Image Insert, Dual Page, Program Job, Non-Image Area Erase,
Repeat, Frame/Fold Erasure, AUTO Layout, Image Shift, Stamp/Overlay
1. Position original FACE DOWN on the platen glass.
The machine will detect the original size.
When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then
press [AUTO RESET].
2. Select the desired paper size on the Basic Screen.
Touch the desired tray key to highlight it.
If APS is selected (initial setting), the largest paper size loaded in a tray will
be selected automatically.
3. Touch APPLICATION on the Basic Screen.
Original
Mult-page enlargement
Dividing an Image for Enlarged Copy (Multi-Page Enlargement)
(continued)
10-28
4. Touch Multi-page Enlargement on the Application Selection
Screen.
The Multi-Page Enlargement Setting Screen will be displayed, with the
original size and paper size (tray number) indicated.
5. Select an output size or magnification, as desired.
To select an output size:
Touch STD. SIZE to display the popup menu, touch the desired size key to
highlight it, then touch OK.
Dividing an Image for Enlarged Copy (Multi-Page Enlargement)
(continued)
10-29
To select a magnification ratio:
Touch ZOOM, enter the desired magnification ratio using the screen
keypad or up/down arrow key on the popup menu, then touch OK.
The output size or magnification specified on the popup menu and output
quantity to make up a whole image will be displayed on the Multi-Sheet
Enlargement Setting Screen.
6. Touch OK.
The Application Selection Screen will be restored.
7. Touch OK on the Application Selection Screen.
The Basic Screen will be restored.
8. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.
The actual number of copies will be the product of output quantity multiplied
by print quantity.
See p. 3-10 for details on setting print quantity.
9. Press [START].
When the finisher / paper exit tray capacity is exceeded due to the
print quantity selected, remove the copied sets as they exit;
otherwise, mishandled paper will occur.
10-30
Erasing Outside of the Original (Non-Image Area Erase)
The Non-image area erase mode is used to copy non standard or special originals,
such as books, magazines, paste-ups, graphs, thick or thin materials, etc. from the
platen glass. The exposed glass area outside the borders of the original will not be
copied.
Specifications for Non-Image Area Erase
Use the platen glass only. Keep RADF open throughout the procedure.
Incompatible Conditions: Using RADF, 2a2, 2a1, APS, AMS, Rotation,
Rotation Sort, Rotation Group, Fold/Stitch&Fold/Trimming (with Booklet
selected), Mixed Original, Z-Folded Original, Tab Paper, Sheet/Cover Insertion,
Chapter, Combination, Booklet, Image Insert, Dual Page in RADF Store mode,
Multi-Page Enlargement, Reverse Image, Reduce & Shift in Image Shift,
Storing Image in Overlay Memory
1. Touch APPLICATION on the Basic Screen.
When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then
press [AUTO RESET].
2. Touch Non-image Area Erase on the Application Selection Screen.
The incompatible function keys will be dimmed to show inactivity.
3. Touch OK on the Application Selection Screen.
The Basic Screen will be restored.
Set original
General copying
Non-Image Area Erase
Erasing Outside of the Original (Non-Image Area Erase)
(continued)
10-31
4. Select magnification and paper size, as desired.
APS and AMS are automatically released.
Copy mode is automatically set to 1a1. If 1a2 is selected, Platen store
mode will function automatically.
5. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.
See p. 3-10 for details on setting print quantity.
6. Position original FACE DOWN on the platen glass.
DO NOT CLOSE THE DOCUMENT FEEDER.
Original size should be larger than 10mm x 10mm.
7. Press [START].
Having Any Problem?
This function may perform incorrectly if the lighting in the work place is directly
over the platen glass. In this case, consult your service representative about
an appropriate place for installation.
10-32
Reversing Colour in Image (Reverse Image)
Use Reverse image to reverse the positive image to the negative image and vice
versa in the selected colour mode.
Single Colour: Makes a reversed image in the selected single colour.
Black: Reverses the image from black-on-white to white-on-black, and vice versa.
Full Colour: Copies in complementary colours of the four colours.
Auto: Makes a reversed image according to the original image (detected as Full
Colour or Black).
Specifications for Reverse Image
Incompatible Conditions: Fold, Stitch & Fold, Trimming, Non-Image Area
Erase, Repeat, Stamp, Overlay
1. Touch APPLICATION on the Basic Screen.
When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then
press [AUTO RESET].
2. Touch Reverse Image on the Application Selection Screen.
The incompatible function keys will be dimmed to show inactivity.
3. Touch OK on the Application Selection Screen.
The Basic Screen will be restored.
Original
Reverse Image copying
Reversing Colour in Image (Reverse Image)
(continued)
10-33
4. Touch a mode key under the COLOUR MODE on the Basic Screen.
Selecting SINGLE COLOUR will display the popup menu to specify a
colour.
Touch desired colour key, then touch OK.
The selected colour will be indicated under the COLOUR MODE indication
of the Basic Screen, with the SINGLE COLOUR key highlighted.
5. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.
See p. 3-10 for details on setting print quantity.
6. Position original(s) FACE UP in the document feeder or FACE
DOWN on the platen glass.
For details on positioning originals, see p. 3-4 to p. 3-9.
7. Press [START].
When the finisher / paper exit tray capacity is exceeded due to the
print quantity selected, remove the copied sets as they exit;
otherwise, mishandled paper will occur.
10-34
Repeating Selected Image Area (Repeat: Vert./Horiz. Mode)
Use this function to repeat the selected image area of 10 mm ~ 150 mm in both
vertical and horizontal widths measured from the rear left corner of the A3 original
area indicated on the left edge of the platen glass.
Vertical/Horizontal Width Setting Mode Specifications
Use the platen glass. (Document feeder cannot be used.)
Incompatible Conditions: Using RADF, 2a2, 2a1, APS, AMS, Group, Rotation
Sort, Rotation Group, Mixed Original, Z-Folded Original, Sheet/Cover Insertion,
Chapter, Combination, Booklet, Image Insert, Dual Page, Multi-Page
Enlargement, Non-Image Area Erase, Reverse Image, Frame/Fold Erasure,
AUTO Layout, Reduce&Shift in Image Shift, Stamp/Overlay
1. Touch APPLICATION on the Basic Screen.
When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then
press [AUTO RESET].
2. Touch Repeat on the Application Selection Screen.
The Repeat Mode Selection Screen will be displayed.
Vertical
width
Horizontal width
Repeat copy
Vertical/Horizontal Width Setting mode
Repeating Selected Image Area (Repeat: Vert./Horiz. Mode)
(continued)
10-35
3. Touch MANUAL, then specify the vertical and horizontal widths of
the scanning area.
Use up/down arrow key to enter the width from 10 to 150 mm in 1 mm
increments. Keep touching the key to increase/decrease the value
continuously.
Or, touch ENTER REPEAT WIDTH USING KEYPAD to display the popup
menu to enter the value from the touch screen keypad.
Touch VERTI. WIDTH or HORIZ. WIDTH, enter the value for each, then
touch OK to restore the Repeat Mode Selection Screen.
4. Touch OK.
The Application Selection Screen will be restored.
5. Touch OK on the Application Selection Screen.
The Basic Screen will be restored.
6. Select the desired magnification and paper size.
APS and AMS are automatically released, and 1.000 (100%) is selected as
a magnification ratio.
Copy mode is automatically set to 1a1. If 1a2 is selected, Platen store
mode will function automatically.
Repeating Selected Image Area (Repeat: Vert./Horiz. Mode)
(continued)
10-36
7. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.
See p. 3-10 for details on setting print quantity.
8. Position original FACE DOWN on the platen glass.
See the illustration on p. 10-34 for details.
9. Press [START].
When the finisher / trimmer unit / paper exit tray capacity is
exceeded due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets
as they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur.
10-37
Repeating Automatically or Selecting RepeatingTimes (Repeat: AUTO/ Repeat Mode)
Auto Detection mode will automatically set the equal repeat area to the size of the
original placed onto the platen glass by activating Non-image area erase. Repeat
mode will scan the image area specified by the selected paper size and mode (2
Repeat, 4 Repeat, or 8 Repeat), then arrange the image by specified times in one
copy sheet.
Auto Detection/ Repeat Mode Specifications
Auto Detection Mode: Use the platen glass. RADF cannot be used.
Repeat Mode Magnification ratio: 1.000 (100%) fixed
Incompatible Conditions with Auto Detection Mode
Using RADF, 2a2, 2a1, APS, AMS, Rotation, Group, Rotation Sort, Rotation
Group, Mixed Original, Z-Folded Original, Tab Paper, Sheet/Cover Insertion,
Chapter, Combination, Booklet, Image Insert, Dual Page, Multi-Page
Enlargement, Reverse Image, Frame/Fold Erasure, AUTO Layout, Reduce &
Shift in Image Shift, Stamp/Overlay
Incompatible Conditions with Repeat Mode
APS, AMS, Rotation (if magnification is changed from 1.000), Group, Rotation
Sort, Rotation Group, Mixed Original, Z-Folded Original, Chapter, Combination,
Booklet, Image Insert, Dual Page, Multi-Page Enlargement, Non-Image Area
Erase, Reverse Image, Frame/Fold Erasure, AUTO Layout, Reduce&Shift in
Image Shift, Overlay, Overlay Memory
Auto Detection mode
Repeat mode
Copy
(2 Repeat)
Copy
(4 Repeat)
Copy
(8 Repeat)
Copy
Repeating Automatically or Selecting RepeatingTimes (Repeat: AUTO/ Repeat Mode)
(continued)
10-38
1. Touch APPLICATION on the Basic Screen
When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then
press [AUTO RESET].
2. Touch Repeat on the Application Selection Screen.
The Repeat Mode Selection Screen will be displayed.
3. Touch to highlight the desired mode key.
Touch AUTO to select the Auto Detection mode.
Touch 2 Repeat, 4 Repeat, or 8 Repeat to select the desired Repeat mode.
4. Touch OK.
The Application Selection Screen will be restored.
Non-Image Area Erase is automatically selected on the Application Selection
Screen when AUTO mode is selected.
When 2 Repeat mode is selected, Page space function of Image Shift can be
used to make the desired amount of blank space between the two images on
a page. See p. 10-45 to p. 10-47.
5. Touch OK on the Application Selection Screen.
The Basic Screen will be restored.
Repeating Automatically or Selecting RepeatingTimes (Repeat: AUTO/ Repeat Mode)
(continued)
10-39
6. Select the desired magnification and paper size.
APS and AMS are automatically released, and 1.000 (100%) is selected as
a magnification ratio.
When 2 Repeat, 4 Repeat, or 8 Repeat is selected, the scanning area will
be a portion of the selected paper size equally divided according to the
selected mode.
In this case, magnification ratio will be fixed to 1.000 (100%).
Copy mode is automatically set to 1a1. If 1a2 is selected, Platen store
mode will function automatically.
7. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.
See p. 3-10 for details on setting print quantity.
8. Position original.
For AUTO mode original, open the document feeder, then position the
original FACE DOWN on the platen glass.
For 2 Repeat, 4 Repeat or 8 Repeat mode original, RADF is also available.
See the illustration on p. 10-37 for details.
When AUTO mode is selected, Non-Image Area Erase functions automatically.
DO NOT close the document feeder.
9. Press [START].
When the finisher / trimmer unit / paper exit tray capacity is
exceeded due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets
as they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur.
The AUTO mode may not operate properly if the lighting in the work place is
directly over the platen glass. In this case, consult your service representative
about an appropriate place for installation.
10-40
Eliminating Copy Marks Along Borders (Frame/Fold Erasure)
Use Frame/Fold Erasure to eliminate black copy marks along borders to clean up
and improve the presentation of the copy.
Specifications for Frame/Fold Erasure
Incompatible Conditions: Multi-Page Enlargement, Repeat
1. Touch APPLICATION on the Basic Screen.
When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then
press [AUTO RESET].
2. Touch Frame/Fold Erasure on the Application Selection Screen.
The Frame/Fold Erasure Selection Screen will be displayed.
Set original
General copying
Frame Erasure
copying
Fold Erasure
copying
Frame/Fold Erasure
copying
Fold
erasure
Frame
erasure
Frame
erasure
Frame
erasure
Frame
erasure
Eliminating Copy Marks Along Borders (Frame/Fold Erasure)
(continued)
10-41
3. Touch to highlight the desired mode key.
Tou ch Frame Erasure (All sides), Frame Erasure (Each side), or Fold
Erasure to highlight it.
Either Frame erasure mode and Fold erasure can be selected in combination.
4. Specify the erasure amount in the selected mode.
To specify Frame Erasure (All sides) amount:
Touch to highlight FRAME, if not highlighted, then use the touch screen
keypad or up/down arrow key to enter the desired erasure amount of the
TOP, BOTTOM, LEFT, and RIGHT sides collectively, from 1 to 300 mm in
1 mm increments.
To specify Frame Erasure (Each side) amount:
Touch to highlight FRAME, if not highlighted, then touch TOP SIDE,
RIGHT SIDE, BOTTOM SIDE, or LEFT SIDE. The selected side amount
will be highlighted in the left illustration area of the screen.
Eliminating Copy Marks Along Borders (Frame/Fold Erasure)
(continued)
10-42
Use the touch screen keypad or up/down arrow key to enter the desired
erasure amount, from 1 to 300 mm in 1 mm increments.
To specify Fold Erasure amount:
Touch to highlight FOLD, if not highlighted, then use the touch screen
keypad or up/down arrow key to enter the desired erasure amount, from
1 to 99 mm in 1 mm increments.
5. Touch OK.
The Application Selection Screen will be restored.
6. Touch OK on the Application Selection Screen.
The Basic Screen will be restored.
7. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.
See p. 3-10 for details on setting print quantity.
8. Position original(s) FACE UP in the document feeder or FACE
DOWN on the platen glass.
For details on positioning originals, see p. 3-4 to p. 3-9.
When lowering the document feeder onto thick original (e.g. open book), do
not press it down too hard. Keep the document feeder open, if required.
9. Press [START].
When the finisher / trimmer unit / paper exit tray capacity is
exceeded due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets
as they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur.
10-43
Copying Image in the Centre of Copy Paper (AUTO Layout)
Use this function to detect the image area of the original and centre the whole image
on the copy paper making it easy to copy small pieces of paper.
Specifications for AUTO Layout
Non-Image Area Erase is automatically selected. Release it manually when
using RADF to scan originals.
Incompatible Conditions: 2a2, 2a1, APS, AMS, Rotation, Rotation Sort,
Rotation Group, Mixed Original, Z-Folded Original, Tab Paper, Sheet/Cover
Insertion, Chapter*, Combination*, Booklet*, Image Insert, Multi-Page
Enlargement, Reverse Image*, Repeat, Image Shift, Overlay, Storing Image in
Overlay Memory
* Chapter, Combination, Booklet and Reverse Image are available when Non-Image Area
Erase is released manually.
1. Touch APPLICATION on the Basic Screen.
When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then
press [AUTO RESET].
2. Touch AUTO Layout on the Application Selection Screen.
The incompatible function keys will be dimmed to show inactivity.
Non-Image Area Erase will be selected automatically. When using RADF to
scan the original, touch to deselect this function.
If Dual Page is used with this function, the original smaller than the
selected paper size will be printed in the centre of the copy paper without
image division performed.
Auto Layout copying
Set original
Copying Image in the Centre of Copy Paper (AUTO Layout)
(continued)
10-44
3. Touch OK on the Application Selection Screen.
The Basic Screen will be restored.
4. Select the desired magnification and paper size on the Basic
Screen.
APS and AMS are automatically released, and 1.000 (100%) is selected as
a magnification ratio.
Copy mode is automatically set to 1a1. If 1a2 is selected, Platen store
mode will function automatically.
5. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.
See p. 3-10 for details on setting print quantity.
6. Position original(s) FACE UP in the document feeder or FACE
DOWN on the platen glass.
For details on positioning originals, see p. 3-4 to p. 3-9.
DO NOT close the RADF when Non-Image Area Erase is selected.
Placing original obliquely on the platen glass may cause black copy marks.
7. Press [START].
When the finisher / trimmer unit / paper exit tray capacity is
exceeded due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets
as they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur.
Having Any Problem?
The AUTO layout function may not operate properly if the lighting in the work
place is directly over the platen glass. In this case, consult your service
representative about an appropriate place for installation.
10-45
Adjusting Position of Copy Image (Image Shift)
Use Image Shift to adjust the position of copy images, e.g. for the purpose of
creating a new binding margin on originals to make it easier for filing purposes.
Page Space function is available only when Booklet or 2 Repeat mode of Repeat has
been already selected. Use this function to make the desired amount of blank space
between the two images on a page. See the illustration on p. 10-47 for details.
If image loss is likely, select the Reduce & Shift mode instead of regular Image shift.
See p.10-48.
Specifications for Image Shift
Shift amount: 0 to 250 mm in 1 mm increments
Setting in 0.1 mm increments using up/down arrow key is also available by Key
Operator setting. See p. 14-37 to 14-42.
Incompatible Conditions: Multi-Page Enlargement, AUTO Layout, Storing
images in Overlay Memory
1. Select the copy mode and paper size from the Basic Screen,
as required.
2. Touch APPLICATION on the Basic Screen.
When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then
press [AUTO RESET].
Original
Copies
Up
Up
Down
Down
Left
Left
Right
Right
Adjusting Position of Copy Image (Image Shift) (continued)
10-46
3. Touch Image Shift on the Application Selection Screen.
4. Touch SHIFT on the Image Shift Setting Screen, then specify the
shift direction and amount.
Touch FRONT or BACK to specify the shift direction and amount
individually; or touch BOTH SIDES to specify collectively. The BACK and
BOTH SIDES keys function only for duplex copying.
Touch to highlight the desired shift direction key, then use the touch screen
keypad or up/down arrow key to enter the desired shift amount, from 0 to
250 mm in 1 mm increments.
The image display on the screen allows you to view the shift direction and
amount to be created on the printed sheets.
When Booklet or 2 Repeat mode of Repeat has been already selected, the
PAGE SPACE key appears clear on the screen to show its availability.
If desired, touch PAGE SPACE to highlight it, then enter the desired amount
using the touch screen keypad or up/down arrow key.
Adjusting Position of Copy Image (Image Shift) (continued)
10-47
5. Touch OK.
The Application Selection Screen will be restored.
6. Touch OK on the Application Selection Screen.
The Basic Screen will be restored.
7. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.
See p. 3-10 for details on setting print quantity.
8. Position original(s) FACE UP in the document feeder or FACE
DOWN on the platen glass.
For details on positioning originals, see p. 3-4 to p. 3-9.
9. Press [START].
When the finisher / trimmer unit / paper exit tray capacity is
exceeded due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets
as they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur.
DETAILS: Page Space Function
Original
Original
Page space
Booklet
2 Repeat in Repeat
AB AB
Page space
Page space
10-48
Reducing Images to Create Binding Margin (Reduce&Shift)
Use Reduce & Shift instead of regular Image Shift to prevent image loss when
creating a binding margin.
Specifications for Reduce & Shift
AMS is automatically selected and cannot be released.
Shift amount: 0 to 250 mm in 1 mm increments
Setting in 0.1 mm increments using up/down arrow key is also available by Key
Operator setting. See p. 14-37 to 14-42.
Incompatible Conditions: Change magnification, V/H zoom, APS, Mixed
Original, Dual Page, Multi-Page Enlargement, Non-Image Area Erase, Repeat,
AUTO Layout, Overlay, Storing Image in Overlay Memory
Originals
Right
Front Back
Up
Down
Left
Right
Left
Down
Right
Left
Up
Left binding margin
Right
Front
Front
Back
Back
Front Back
Up
Down
Left
Right binding margin
Top binding margin
Reducing Images to Create Binding Margin (Reduce&Shift)
(continued)
10-49
1. Select the copy mode and paper size, as required.
2. Touch APPLICATION on the Basic Screen.
When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then
press [AUTO RESET].
3. Touch Image Shift on the Application Selection Screen.
4. Touch REDUCE&SHIFT on the Image Shift Setting Screen, then
specify the shift direction and amount.
Touch FRONT or BACK. In Reduce & Shift mode, the BOTH SIDES key
appears dimmed to show inactivity.
Touch to highlight the desired shift direction key, then use the touch screen
keypad or up/down arrow key to enter the desired shift amount, from 0 to
250 mm in 1 mm increments.
The image display on the screen allows you to view the shift direction and
amount to be printed on the printed sheets.
The AMS will automatically determine the magnification ratio according to the
shift amount specified for the front page. The shift amount and magnification
ratio determined for the front page will be automatically applied to the back
page. If any positioning adjustment is required, touch BACK and make
direction and amount change.
Reducing Images to Create Binding Margin (Reduce&Shift)
(continued)
10-50
5. Touch OK.
The Application Selection Screen will be restored.
6. Touch OK on the Application Selection Screen.
The Basic Screen will be restored.
7. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.
See p. 3-10 for details on setting print quantity.
8. Position original(s) FACE UP in the document feeder or FACE
DOWN on the platen glass.
For details on positioning originals, see p. 3-4 to p. 3-9.
9. Press [START].
When the finisher / trimmer unit / paper exit tray capacity is
exceeded due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets
as they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur.
10-51
Printing Stamp, Page, Date/Time onto Copies (Stamp)
This function allows you to print onto output copies the desired type of stamp, page
number, numbering, and date/time at the location designated on the screen.
The four stamp types and watermark (described in the next subsection) provided on
the Stamp/Overlay Selection Screen can be used individually or in multiple
combinations.
Specification for STAMP, SET NUMBERING, PAGE NUMBERING, DATE/TIME
To use the STAMP function, the optional HDD (HD-106) is required to be
installed in the machine.
Incompatible Conditions: Multi-Page Enlargement, Reverse Image, Repeat
except 2/4/8 Repeat, Overlay (with STAMP and SET NUMBERING), Overlay
Memory
1. Touch APPLICATION on the Basic Screen.
When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then
press [AUTO RESET].
Printing positions
Top-Left T-Middle T-Right
Lower-Left L-Middle L-Right
Middle-Left Middle M-Right
DATE/TIME
’03/10/10 10:30AM
PAGE NUMBERING
2 / 5
SET NUMBERING
002 / 005
STAMP
Printing Stamp, Page, Date/Time onto Copies (Stamp)
(continued)
10-52
2. Touch Stamp/Overlay on the Application Selection Screen.
The Stamp/Overlay Selection Screen will be displayed.
3. Touch to select the desired key in the STAMP area.
The subsequent screen will be displayed to allow you to specify the
selected stamp type.
4. When selecting STAMP: Specify the stamp type, printing position,
character size and printed page.
Touch to highlight the desired stamp key and printing position key on the
screen. If fine adjustment is required, touch FINE ADJ. OF POSITION to
display the Fine Adjustment Setting Screen. See p. 10-55 for details.
Touch CHANGE OF THE CHARACTER SIZE to select LARGER or
SMALLER.
Touch CHANGE OF THE PRINTED PAGE to designate whether to print the
selected stamp on the cover only or on all pages.
Printing Stamp, Page, Date/Time onto Copies (Stamp)
(continued)
10-53
When selecting SET NUMBERING: Specify the numbering type,
printing position, character size, printed page and starting No.
Touch to highlight the desired numbering type key and printing position key on
the screen. If fine adjustment is required, touch
FINE ADJ. OF POSITION
to
display the Fine Adjustment Setting Screen. See p. 10-55 for details.
Touch CHANGE OF THE CHARACTER SIZE to select 20 pt or 36 pt.
Touch CHANGE OF THE PRINTED PAGE to designate whether to print
the selected stamp on the cover only or on all pages.
Touch STARTING No. to designate the starting number, if required. See p.
10-55 for details.
When selecting PAGE NUMBERING: Specify the page numbering
type, printing position, character size, printed page and starting
No.
Touch to highlight the desired page numbering type key and printing
position key on the screen. If fine adjustment is required, touch FINE ADJ.
OF POSITION to display the Fine Adjustment Setting Screen. See p. 10-55
for details.
Touch CHANGE OF THE CHARACTER to select the character size (8 pt,
10 pt, 12 pt or 14 pt) and type (GOTHIC or MING). See p. 10-56 for details.
Touch CHANGE OF THE PRINTED PAGE to designate whether to print
the selected stamp on the front/back cover or insertions. See p. 10-57 for
details.
Touch STARTING No. to designate the starting number, if required. See p.
10-56 for details.
Printing Stamp, Page, Date/Time onto Copies (Stamp)
(continued)
10-54
When selecting DATE/TIME: Specify the date/time type, printing
position, character size and printed page.
Touch to highlight the desired date, time, and printing position keys on the
screen. If fine adjustment is required, touch FINE ADJ. OF POSITION to
display the Fine Adjustment Setting Screen. See p. 10-55 for details.
Touch CHANGE OF THE CHARACTER to select the character size (8 pt,
10 pt, 12 pt or 14 pt) and type (GOTHIC or MING). See p. 10-56 for details.
Touch CHANGE OF THE PRINTED PAGE to designate whether to print the
selected stamp on the cover only or on all pages.
5. Touch OK.
The Stamp/Overlay Selection Screen will be restored.
Touch to select another stamp function key to use in combination, if
desired.
6. Select the stamp colour.
Touch STAMP COLOUR SELECT to display the Stamp Colour Selection
Screen.
Touch the desired stamp type key to highlight it, then select the stamp
colour from the right side portion of the screen.
Touch OK to return to the Stamp/Overlay Selection Screen.
7. Touch OK on the Stamp/Overlay Selection Screen.
The Application Selection Screen will be restored.
8. Touch OK on the Application Selection Screen.
The Basic Screen will be restored.
Printing Stamp, Page, Date/Time onto Copies (Stamp)
(continued)
10-55
9. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.
See p. 3-10 for details on setting print quantity.
10. Position original(s) FACE UP in the document feeder or FACE
DOWN on the platen glass.
For details on positioning originals, see p. 3-4 to p. 3-9.
11. Press [START].
When the finisher / trimmer unit / paper exit tray capacity is
exceeded due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets
as they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur.
DETAILS: Fine Adjustment Setting Screen
When FINE ADJ. OF POSITION is touched, the Fine Adjustment Setting
Screen will be displayed.
Touch TOP SIDE, BOTTOM SIDE, RIGHT SIDE, or LEFT SIDE to specify the
direction, then use the touch screen keypad or up/down arrow key to enter the
desired amount, from 0 to 50 mm. Touch OK to return to the previous screen.
Starting No. Setting Screen: Available from SET NUMBERING or WATERMARK
NUMBERING
Use the touch screen keypad or up/down arrow key to enter the desired
starting number, then touch OK to return to the previous screen.
Printing Stamp, Page, Date/Time onto Copies (Stamp)
(continued)
10-56
Starting No. Setting Screen: Available from PAGE NUMBERING
When Chapter is already selected, the chapter starting number can also be
specified on the Starting No. Setting Screen.
Tou ch PAGE NUMBER or CHAPTER NUMBER to highlight it, then use the
touch screen keypad or up/down arrow key to enter the desired starting
number for each.
Use +<->– to enter a minus
number to print from halfway
through, e.g. –2 to print “1”
from page 4.
Touch OK to return to the
previous screen.
Character Size/Type Selection Screen: from PAGE NUMBERING or DATE/TIME
When CHANGE OF THE CHARACTER is touched, the Character Size/Type
Selection Screen will be displayed.
Touch to select the desired key, then touch OK to return to the previous
screen.
Originals
Copies
Copies
56234
12
–2 –1 0
When “(+)2” is entered:
When “–2” is entered:
Printing Stamp, Page, Date/Time onto Copies (Stamp)
(continued)
10-57
Cover/Insert Print Setting Selection Screen: from PAGE NUMBERING
When copied/blank insertion mode of Sheet/Cover Insertion has been already
selected, this screen allows you to specify whether to print the page number
on insertions, or skip them from the page count.
Touch to select the desired key, then touch OK to return to the Page
Numbering Type Selection Screen.
10-58
Printing Watermark onto Copies (Stamp)
Use this function to print the desired letter type obliquely in the centre of the page
(WATERMARK), or the numbers in the specified form repeatedly over the scanned
image (WATERMARK NUMBERING).
Specification for WATERMARK and WATERMARK NUMBERING
To use WATERMARK, the optional HDD (HD-106) is required to be installed in
the machine.
Incompatible Conditions: Rotation Group, Rotation Sort, Multi-Page
Enlargement, Reverse Image, Repeat except 2/4/8 Repeat, Overlay, Overlay
Memory
1. Touch APPLICATION on the Basic Screen.
When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then
press [AUTO RESET].
2. Touch Stamp/Overlay on the Application Selection Screen.
The Stamp/Overlay Selection Screen will be displayed.
WATERMARK
WATERMARK NUMBERING
A
Z
A
Z
Printing Watermark onto Copies (Stamp) (continued)
10-59
3. Touch WATERMARK or WATERMARK NUMBERING, as desired.
The subsequent screen will be displayed to allow you to specify the selected
watermark type.
4. When selecting WATERMARK: Specify the desired watermark
type, density, and colour.
Touch to highlight the desired watermark key.
If fine adjustment of the centred watermark position is required, touch FINE
ADJ. OF POSITION to display the Fine Adjustment Setting Screen. See p.
10-55 for details.
To select the density and colour of the watermark, touch DENSITY or
COLOUR to display the popup menu, touch the desired density/colour key
to highlight it, then touch OK.
Printing Watermark onto Copies (Stamp) (continued)
10-60
When selecting WATERMARK NUMBERING: Specify the desired
watermark numbering type, density, colour, character size and
starting No.
Touch to highlight the desired watermark key.
Touch CHANGE OF THE CHARACTER SIZE to select 20 pt or 36 pt.
Touch STARTING No. to designate the starting number, if required. See p.
10-55 for details.
To select the density and colour of the watermark numbering, touch
DENSITY or COLOUR to display the popup menu, touch the desired
density/colour key to highlight it, then touch OK.
Printing Watermark onto Copies (Stamp) (continued)
10-61
5. Touch OK.
The Stamp/Overlay Selection Screen will be restored.
Touch to select another stamp function key to use in combination, if
desired.
6. Touch OK on the Stamp/Overlay Selection Screen.
The Application Selection Screen will be restored.
7. Touch OK on the Application Selection Screen.
The Basic Screen will be restored.
8. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.
See p. 3-10 for details on setting print quantity.
9. Position original(s) FACE UP in the document feeder or FACE
DOWN on the platen glass.
For details on positioning originals, see p. 3-4 to p. 3-9.
10. Press [START].
When the finisher / trimmer unit / paper exit tray capacity is
exceeded due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets
as they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur.
10-62
Overlaying an Image onto Each Page Copied in the Job (Overlay)
Use this function to scan an image, then overlay the image onto each page copied in
the job.
Specification for Overlay
Store mode is automatically selected.
Incompatible Conditions: ACS, Rotation, Rotation Sort, Rotation Group, Mixed
Original, Sheet/Cover Insertion, Combination, Image Insert, Dual page,
Program Job, Multi-Page Enlargement, Reverse Image, Repeat, AUTO Layout,
Reduce & Shift in Image Shift, STAMP, SET NUMBERING, WATERMARK,
WATERMARK NUMBERING
1. Touch APPLICATION on the Basic Screen.
When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then
press [AUTO RESET].
2. Touch Stamp/Overlay on the Application Selection Screen.
The Stamp/Overlay Selection Screen will be displayed.
1st scanned original
Originals scanned
2nd and later
Copies in Overlay mode
ABCD
ABCD
ABCD
ABCD
Overlaying an Image onto Each Page Copied in the Job (Overlay)
(continued)
10-63
3. Touch OVERLAY.
4. Touch OK on the Stamp/Overlay Selection Screen.
The Application Selection Screen will be restored.
5. Touch OK on the Application Selection Screen.
The Basic Screen will be restored.
The Store mode is automatically selected.
6. Select the desired paper size and magnification on the Basic
Screen.
APS and AMS are automatically released, and 1.000 (100%) is selected as
a magnification ratio.
7. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.
See p. 3-10 for details on setting print quantity.
8. Position the overlaying original.
Position the original FACE UP in the document feeder or FACE DOWN on
the platen glass.
For details on positioning originals, see p. 3-4 to p. 3-9.
9. Press [START] to scan.
The original image will be scanned into memory.
10. Position the original(s) to be overlaid.
Position the original FACE UP in the document feeder or FACE DOWN on
the platen glass.
11. Press [START] to scan.
12. Repeat steps 10 and 11 for all originals.
Overlaying an Image onto Each Page Copied in the Job (Overlay)
(continued)
10-64
13. Touch STORE to exit the Store mode, then press [START] to print.
When the finisher / trimmer unit / paper exit tray capacity is
exceeded due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets
as they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur.
10-65
Storing an Overlay Image in HDD / Overlaying Image Stored in HDD (Overlay Memory)
Use Overlay Memory to scan and store several images in HDD, then recall the
desired image from the HDD to overlay onto each page copied in the job.
Specification for Overlay Memory
To use this function, the optional HDD (HD-106) is required to be installed in
the machine.
Incompatible Conditions with Image Store: Using RADF, ACS, 1a2, 2a2, 2a1,
AMS, Reserve Mode, Interrupt Mode, Selecting Output Mode, Mixed Original,
Z-Folded Original, Tab Paper, Sheet/Cover Insertion, Chapter, Combination,
Booklet, Image Insert, Dual Page, Program Job, Multi-Page Enlargement, Non-
Image Area Erase, Reverse Image, Repeat, AUTO Layout, Image Shift, Stamp,
Overlay
Incompatible Conditions with Output: Rotation Group, Rotation Sort, Face Up,
Multi-Page Enlargement, Reverse Image, Repeat (except 2/4/8 Repeat),
STAMP, SET NUMBERING, WATERMARK, WATERMARK NUMBERING in
Stamp, Overlay
1. Touch APPLICATION on the Basic Screen.
When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then
press [AUTO RESET].
Recalled image
Overlaying image
Store in HDD
Output
Recall overlaying image
Overlay originals
Copies in Overlay Memory mode
Image Store
Output
ABCD
ABCD
HDD
ABCD
ABCD
ABCD
Storing an Overlay Image in HDD / Overlaying Image Stored in HDD (Overlay Memory)
(continued)
10-66
2. Touch Stamp/Overlay on the Application Selection Screen.
The Stamp/Overlay Selection Screen will be displayed.
3. Touch OVERLAY MEMORY.
The Overlaying Image Selection Screen will be displayed.
Proceed to step 9, when recalling only the stored image.
4. Touch IMAGE STORE to display the Image Name Entry Screen.
Storing an Overlay Image in HDD / Overlaying Image Stored in HDD (Overlay Memory)
(continued)
10-67
5. Enter the desired image name.
Use the touch screen keypad to enter the desired name up to 8 characters.
The date when you made this entry will be stored automatically.
To correct an entry, touch 1-CHARACTER DELETE repeatedly to delete
each character, then enter the correct name.
6. If the image name is correct, touch OK.
The Basic Screen to store the overlaying image will be displayed.
Select the desired copy conditions.
The popup menu may be displayed to prompt you that the entered image
name has been already used. See p. 10-69 for details.
7. Position the overlaying original on the platen glass.
The document feeder cannot be used for storing the overlaying image.
8. Press [START] to scan.
The Overlaying Image Data Storing Screen will be displayed.
Storing an Overlay Image in HDD / Overlaying Image Stored in HDD (Overlay Memory)
(continued)
10-68
To stop scanning, press [STOP].
The machine automatically starts to store the overlaying image data in the
HDD. The Overlaying Image Selection Screen will resume when the storing
function is completed.
To continue to store the overlaying image data, return to step 4.
9. Touch to select the desired overlaying image data, then touch OK.
The Stamp/Overlay Selection Screen will be restored.
DETAILS: Image Delete Key on the Overlay Image Selection Screen
If the IMAGE DELETE key is displayed on the Overlay Image Selection
Screen, you can delete the stored image and name. Select the image name
using up/down arrow key to scroll, then touch IMAGE DELETE.
10. Touch OK to return to the Application Selection Screen.
11. Touch OK to return to the Basic Screen.
The Store mode is automatically selected, and APS and AMS are released.
Set the desired conditions on the Basic Screen.
12. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.
See p. 3-10 for details on setting print quantity.
13. Position the original(s) to be overlaid.
Position the original FACE UP in the document feeder or FACE DOWN on
the platen glass.
14. Press [START] to scan.
15. Repeat steps 13 and 14 for all originals.
16. Touch STORE to exit the Store mode, then press [START] to print.
Storing an Overlay Image in HDD / Overlaying Image Stored in HDD (Overlay Memory)
(continued)
10-69
When the finisher / paper exit tray capacity is exceeded due to the
print quantity selected, remove the copied sets as they exit;
otherwise, mishandled paper will occur.
DETAILS: Popup Menu for Name Duplication
If the popup menu with YES and NO keys is displayed instead of the Basic
Screen, the entered name is duplicated. Touch YES to enter a new name, or
NO to create a duplicate name.
If the popup menu with OK key is displayed, the entered name is duplicated.
Touch OK, then enter a new name.
Changing the popup menu for duplicate name and displaying the IMAGE
DELETE key is available in the Memory switch No. 38 of the Key Operator
setting. See p. 14-37 ~ p. 14-42.
11
Section 11:
Network Function
How to Use Web Utilities
To Use Web Utilities ....................................................... 11-2
To Display Information on Machine ................................ 11-4
To Display Current Machine Status (Job Status)............ 11-5
Setting E-Mail Transmission Function ............................ 11-7
Setting E.K.C. Function .................................................. 11-9
Setting Scan Transmission Function ............................ 11-19
Transmitting/Editing Machine Setting File..................... 11-23
11-2
To Use Web Utilities
When the machine is connected to a PC over a network, a web browser on the PC
provides the following functions.
1 Main Page
Displays the job in progress, service call, and machine information.
2 Job Status
Displays the current and previous job status.
3 Environment Setup
Makes the Key Operator setting concerning network environment and E.K.C.
function.
Browser: Internet Explorer 5.5 SP2 / Netscape Navigator 4.7 or later
Follow the procedure below to access the Web Utilities of the machine using the web
browser.
1. Turn on the power to the PC connected with the machine
over a network.
Contact your network manager for details on the network system.
2. Activate the web browser, then select [Open] from the File menu.
3. Enter the URL (http:// [IP address or host name of the machine]),
then click on [OK].
Ask your network manager for the IP address or host name of the machine.
To Use Web Utilities (continued)
11-3
The Main Page of the Web Utilities will be displayed.
The Main Page informs you of the current job status of the machine and the
maintenance item, if required.
Service call
•JAM
Paper supply
Toner supply
Staple cartridge supply
Complete Job
Non Complete Job
Finisher tray full
Dispose of Trimmer waste basket
Dispose ot Punch waste basket
•PM call
Click on [REFRESH] in the Web Utilities window to update the information.
The Web Utilities window is subject to change without notice.
11-4
To Display Information on Machine
Follow the procedure below to display the machine information using the web
browser.
1. Open the Web Utilities window.
2. Click on the [Machine Status].
The window now provides the paper tray configuration, engine configuration,
and option information.
The same information will be provided also in the Job Status window. See p.
11-5.
Click on [REFRESH] in the window to update the information.
11-5
To Display Current Machine Status (Job Status)
Follow the procedure below to display the current job status, job list including
reserved jobs and job information, and information on up to 16 previous jobs.
1. Open the Web Utilities window.
2. Click on [Job Status].
The current job status, number of jobs in waiting, and remaining time before
the print job is completed.
Click on [REFRESH] to update the information.
To Display Current Machine Status (Job Status) (continued)
11-6
3. Display the current job or reserved job information.
Click on the desired [Job Priority No.] under the “Job List”.
The information on the specified job will appear in the second “Job List”
area.
If no print job or reserved job exists, “Job Empty” will be displayed in the first
“Job List” area.
4. Display the previous job information.
Click on the desired [Job ID No.] under the “Job Status”.
The information on the specified previous job will appear in the second “Job
Status” area.
If no job has been printed after the machine has been powered on, “Jobs don’t
exist” will be displayed in the first “Job Status” area.
11-7
Setting E-Mail Transmission Function
Make the Key Operator setting concerning the network environment using the web
browser.
For details of the E-Mail Transmission Setting, refer to p. 14-8.
1. Open the Web Utilities window.
2. Click on [Environment Setup].
3. Display the E-Mail Transmission Setting window.
Enter the 4-digit Key Operator password, then click on [Apply].
Click on [E-Mail transmission setting].
The E-Mail Transmission Setting window will be displayed.
The Extension for maintenance option will be exclusively used by your service
representative.
Setting E-Mail Transmission Function (continued)
11-8
4. Make the setting.
Enter the IP address of the mail server, IP address of the DNS server (if
needed), time difference, and E-mail address to be informed of the machine
status.
Click on the check box of the desired transmission item.
Click on [Apply] to complete the setting and return to the Web Utilities
window.
Clicking on [Reset] will void the setting and restore the Web Utilities
window.
Clicking on [Sending test] will send a test mail to the manager.
11-9
Setting E.K.C. Function
Make the following Key Operator settings concerning the E.K.C. function using the
web browser on a PC.
E.K.C. Data Add (see step 4.)
Add a new E.K.C. data (password, name, and copy limit) to the E.K.C. list.
E.K.C. Data List (see step 5.)
Change or delete the E.K.C. data (password, name, or copy limit) in the list, or
reset the counters.
E.K.C. Function Setting (see step 6.)
Specify the following E.K.C. function settings.
Switching the E.K.C.: ON/OFF
Effect when the copy limit is reached: Immediately / After job / Warning
E.K.C. password: 8 digits / under 8 digits
E.K.C. password input timing: Auto reset timer/ Complete job
Wrong E.K.C. password (from printer): Accept / Reject
The above settings can also be made on the machine itself, except for the
Wrong E.K.C. password (from printer) setting. Some settings may require
operations on the machine. Refer to pages 14-12 and 14-19.
1. Open the Web Utilities window.
2. Click on [Environment Setup].
3. Display the E.K.C. Function Setting window.
Enter the 4-digit Key Operator password, then click on [Apply].
Setting E.K.C. Function (continued)
11-10
The Environment Setup menu window will be displayed.
Click on [E.K.C. function setting].
The Enter Network Password dialog box will be displayed.
Enter “ekc” in the User Name text box, and an 8-digit master key code in
the Password text box, then click on [OK].
The E.K.C. Function Setting menu window will be displayed.
4. Add an E.K.C. data.
Click on [E.K.C. data add] in the E.K.C. Function Setting menu window.
Setting E.K.C. Function (continued)
11-11
The E.K.C. Data Setting window will be displayed.
Enter the following items to register a new E.K.C. data, then click on
[Registration].
Number: Automatically assigned
Password: 8 digits max.
Name: 8 characters max.
Limit: 999,999 copies max.
To clear the text boxes, click on [Reset].
To cancel adding a new E.K.C. data, click on any E.K.C. Function Setting
menu item to jump to the desired window.
DETAILS: Error Message
A duplicate password or name will be rejected with an error message.
However, duplicating a password is possible using the Key Operator
setting. Refer to p. 14-15.
The Name entry box accepts letters (capital letters only), numbers, and
four symbols: (, ), -, and /. Any other symbols will be rejected with an error
message displayed in the window.
Max. 1,000 E.K.C. entries can be registered. An error message will be
displayed if the above limit is exceeded.
An error message may be displayed when the data entry has not been
completed due to the machine operation in progress. Please click on
[Registration] while the machine is in an idle state.
Setting E.K.C. Function (continued)
11-12
The registered content will be displayed in the window.
The new E.K.C. data will be transmitted to the machine immediately so that
is valid for the user operations.
Click on any menu item to jump to the desired window.
5. Edit the E.K.C. data.
Click on [E.K.C. data list] in the E.K.C. Function Setting menu window (see
p. 11-10) or from the menu in any subsequent window.
The E.K.C. Data List window will be displayed.
The “Another user count” in the list indicates the count accumulated for the
jobs performed by non-registered users. This data cannot be edited other than
resetting the counter.
Setting E.K.C. Function (continued)
11-13
To change Password, Name, or Limit:
(1) Click on the number of the data to be edited.
The E.K.C. Edit Setting window will be displayed.
(2) Change the password, name, or limit, as desired. For details in entering
procedure, refer to p. 11-11.
(3) Click on [Registration].
To clear the text boxes, click on [Reset].
To cancel editing the E.K.C. data, click on any E.K.C. Function Setting menu
item to jump to the desired window.
DETAILS: Error Message
See “Details” on p. 11-11 if an error message is displayed after clicking on
[Registration].
Setting E.K.C. Function (continued)
11-14
The edited content will be displayed in the window.
The edited data will be transmitted to the machine immediately so that
is valid for the user operations.
Click on any E.K.C. Function Setting menu item to jump to the desired
window.
To reset E.K.C. count:
(1) Click on the check box(es) to select the E.K.C. data of the counter to be
cleared. If all the counters are to be cleared, click on [SelectAll].
(2) Click on the radio button (a white circle) heading the “Count reset
selected item(s).
(3) Click on [Apply].
The Count Reset Confirmation window will be displayed.
To cancel resetting the E.K.C. data, click on any E.K.C. Function Setting menu
item to jump to the desired window.
Setting E.K.C. Function (continued)
11-15
(4) Click on [Apply] to immediately reset the counters to zero.
The message “Setting was changed” will be displayed.
DETAILS: Error Message
If an error message is displayed after clicking on [Apply], a counter has not
been reset due to a machine operation in progress. The machine must be in
an idle state when you click on [Apply].
Click on [Back] to return to the E.K.C. Data List window.
Setting E.K.C. Function (continued)
11-16
To delete E.K.C. data:
(1) Click on the check box(es) to select the E.K.C. data to be deleted. If all
the data are to be cleared, click on [SelectAll].
(2) Click on the radio button (a white circle) heading the “Delete selected
item(s) (Except for Another user count).
(3) Click on [Apply].
The Delete Confirmation window will be displayed.
To cancel deleting the E.K.C. data, click on any E.K.C. Function Setting menu
item to jump to the desired window.
Setting E.K.C. Function (continued)
11-17
(4) Click on [Apply] to immediately delete the data.
The message “Setting was deleted” will be displayed.
DETAILS: Error Message
If an error message is displayed after clicking on [Apply], data has not been
deleted due to a machine operation in progress. The machine must be in an
idle state when you click on [Apply].
Click on [Back] to return to the E.K.C. Data List window or any menu item
to jump to the desired window.
6. Set the E.K.C. function.
Click on [E.K.C. function setting] in the E.K.C. Function Setting menu
window (see p. 11-10) or from the menu in any subsequent window.
The E.K.C. Function Setting window will be displayed.
Click on the radio button (white circle) of the desired selection item(s) so
that a black dot appears in it.
Click on [Apply]. The change made in the settings will be transmitted
immediately for the user operations.
To restore the previous setting, click on [Reset].
To cancel the E.K.C. function setting, click on any E.K.C. Function Setting
menu item.
Setting E.K.C. Function (continued)
11-18
DETAILS: Error Message
If an error message is displayed after clicking on [Apply], a setting has not
been completed due to a machine operation in progress. The machine must
be in an idle state when you click on [Apply].
Click on [Back] to return to the E.K.C. Function Setting menu window or
any menu item to jump to the desired window.
11-19
Setting Scan Transmission Function
Make the Key Operator setting concerning the transmission of the scanned image
data using the web browser.
For details of the Scan Transmission Setting, contact your service representative.
Specifications for Scan Transmission Setting
The Scan Transmission Setting is available only when the Printer Controller is
installed in the machine.
1. Open the Web Utilities window.
2. Click on [Environment Setup].
3. Display the Scan Transmission Setting window.
Enter the 4-digit Key Operator password, then click on [Apply].
The Environment Setup menu window will be displayed.
Click on [Scan transmission setting].
The Scan Transmission Setting window will be displayed.
The [Scan transmission setting] key appears in the window only when the
Printer Controller is connected to the machine.
Setting Scan Transmission Function (continued)
11-20
4. Register the E-Mail, HDD, and FTP, as required.
For details of this setting, refer to the instruction manual of the printer
controller.
The symbols that cannot be displayed in the entry box will be ignored, if
entered.
The HDD Box No. will be registered as a 4-digit number.
For example, entering [1] will be registered as [0001].
Click on [Registration] to complete the entry.
The registered content will be displayed.
Click on [Back] to return to the Scan Transmission Setting window.
Setting Scan Transmission Function (continued)
11-21
5. Display the Entry List.
Click on [Entry List] of the desired item under the entry box to display the
Entry List.
Click on [Back] to return to the Scan Transmission Setting window.
6. Change the registered contents.
Display the Entry List of the desired item as described in step 5.
Click on the entry name to be changed.
The window for changing the selected item will be displayed.
Change the contents as desired, then click on [Registration].
The registered content will be displayed.
Click on [Back] to return to the Entry List window.
Setting Scan Transmission Function (continued)
11-22
7. Delete the registered contents.
Display the Entry List of the desired item as described in step 5.
Click on the check box in the “Delete” column of the item to be deleted, then
click on [Delete].
If all the items are to be deleted, click on [SelectAll], then click on [Delete].
The window for deleting the selected item will be displayed.
Click on the check box again to release the selection.
Confirm the registered name to be deleted, then click on [Yes].
Click on [Back] on the web browser to return to the Entry List window.
11-23
Transmitting/Editing Machine Setting File
Follow the procedure below to transmit the following setting file from the machine to
a PC (export) using the web browser, edit the setting data on the PC, then return the
file to the machine (import).
E.K.C. data (max. 1,000 files)
Three Scan Transmission Setting data
E-mail data (max. 450 files)
HDD (Box No.) (max. 150 files)
FTP (FTP server address) (max. 30 files)
The machine setting file can be stored in a PC so that it may be returned to
the machine at any time, and is available for common use if you have two
or more machines.
The file transmitted to a PC, being converted to a file type for batch
processing, can be edited efficiently and returned to the machine.
• The file transmitted to a PC normally contains the four data types
mentioned above, however, each data type can be made into a file and
transmitted separately.
For details of E.K.C. data, see p. 14-14.
For details of Scan Transmission Setting data, see p. 14-48.
1. Open the Web Utilities window.
2. Click on [Environment Setup].
3. Display the Setting File Import/Export window.
Enter the 4-digit Key Operator password, then click on [Apply].
Transmitting/Editing Machine Setting File (continued)
11-24
The Environment Setup menu window will be displayed.
Click on [Setting data Import/Export].
The Enter Network Password dialog box will be displayed.
Enter “ekc” in the User Name text box, and an 8-digit master key code in
the Password text box, then click on [OK].
The Setting File Import/Export window will be displayed.
4. Export the machine setting file.
Select the desired file type from the pull-down menu, then click on [Export].
Transmitting/Editing Machine Setting File (continued)
11-25
The data format cannot be changed from “TAB separated.
Confirm that the radio button heading “Save this file to disk” is marked in
the File Download dialog box, then click on [OK].
In the dialog box, designate the folder for saving the machine setting file,
then click on [Save].
The file name is automatically assigned as described below. Select the data to
be exported, changing the name if desired.
ekc_tab.txt (E.K.C. data)
ip_email.txt (E-mail data of Scan Transmission Setting data)
ip_hdd.txt (HDD data of Scan Transmission Setting data)
ip_ftp.txt (FTP data of Scan Transmission Setting data)
DETAILS: Error Message
The file cannot be accessed when the machine is operating. If an error
message is displayed, try again to save the file after the current machine
operation is completed.
A dialog box will be displayed when the saving operation is completed.
Click on [Close].
Transmitting/Editing Machine Setting File (continued)
11-26
5. Edit the machine setting file.
The machine setting file transmitted to a PC is a TAB separated text file
which can be edited using an application software such as Text Editor or
Table Editor. A new setting file can also be created according to the
specifications for each file type. See p. 11-27 for details.
6. Import the machine setting file.
Click on [Browse] to designate the machine setting file to be imported, then
click on [Import].
The result message will be displayed when the registration is completed.
DETAILS: Error Message
If the registration cannot be completed successfully, error messages will be
displayed as follows.
Can’t transfer data (The machine is busy)
Try again to import the data after the machine operation in progress is
completed.
The data cannot be recognized
Confirm that the data is the machine setting file.
Data size is too large
Confirm that the data is the machine setting file.
Check if the file size exceeds 100,000 bytes.
The data cannot be registered
Check if inappropriate description is made in the machine setting file.
See p. 11-27 for details.
Check if the file entries are already over the limit.
Transmitting/Editing Machine Setting File (continued)
11-27
DETAILS: To Edit the Machine Setting File
Save the file as a text.
Begin the file with a specified tag. (ex. #EKC_TAB)
A line should be 300 bytes or less.
The file size should be 100,000 bytes or less.
The line that begins with “#” is a comment.
ex. Machine setting file of an E.K.C. data
DETAILS: Specifications for Each Machine Setting File Type
E.K.C. data setting file:
Begin the file with #EKC_TAB.
Max. 1,000 files can be edited.
A line should include PASSWORD, NAME, COPY COLOUR LIMIT, COPY
MONO LIMIT, PRINT COLOUR LIMIT, PRINT MONO LIMIT, LIMIT
TARGET, COLOUR PERMISSION, and MONO PERMISSION, separated
by a tab.
Use up to 8 digits numbers (0 - 9) only to specify PASSWORD.
Use numbers, alphabets (capital letters only), and four symbols: (, ), -, and
/ only to specify NAME.
Use up to 6 digits numbers (0 - 9) only to specify LIMIT (0 - 999,999).
Specify 0 for Common set, or 1 for Separate set in LIMIT TARGET.
Specify 0 for permission, or 1 for prohibition in “COLOUR PERMISSION”
and “MONO PERMISSION”.
E-mail data setting file:
Begin the file with #IP_EMAIL.
Max. 450 files can be edited.
• A line should include ENTRY NAME and E-MAIL ADDRESS, being
separated by a tab.
ENTRY NAME should be 18 bytes or less.
E-MAIL ADDRESS should be 64 bytes or less.
Transmitting/Editing Machine Setting File (continued)
11-28
HDD data setting file:
Begin the file name with #IP_HDD.
Max. 150 files can be edited.
A line should include ENTRY NAME and BOX NUMBER, being separated
by a tab.
ENTRY NAME should be 18 bytes or less.
Use up to 4 digits numbers (0 - 9) only to specify a BOX NUMBER.
FTP data setting file:
Begin the file name with #IP_FTP.
Max. 30 files can be edited.
A line should include PROFILE NAME, HOST ADDRESS, FILE PATH,
LOGIN, PORT No. and FIREWALL, being separated by a tab.
PROFILE NAME should be 18 bytes or less.
HOST ADDRESS should be 63 bytes or less.
FILE PATH should be 127 bytes or less.
LOGIN should be 47 bytes or less.
PASSWORD should be 31 bytes or less.
PORT No. should be 0 to 65535.
FIREWALL should be 0 or 1.
12
Section 12:
Paper and Original
Information
Paper Information ........................................................... 12-2
Original Information ........................................................ 12-9
12-2
Paper Information
This machine is equipped with the following trays for loading copy paper.
Tray 1, 2 and 3 (Main body tray)
LCT (C-208 Large Capacity Cassette)
Multi-sheet bypass tray
Also, the following equipment is provided for conveying/delivering copies.
ADU (Automatic Duplex Unit)
Finisher (FN-120/FN-9)
Cover Inserter D
Punch Kit (PK-5)
Trimming Unit (TMG-3)
Exit tray (for the machine without Finisher)
Refer to the following information on paper capacity for each.
Paper Weight
Paper Trays Weight
Tray 1, 2, and 3
(Main body tray)
64g/m
2
~ 209g/m
2
The tray number for paper weight is specified in the
Key Operator mode.
1: 64g/m
2
~ 74g/m
2
2: 75g/m
2
~ 80g/m
2
3: 81g/m
2
~ 105g/m
2
4: 106g/m
2
~ 162g/m
2
5: 163g/m
2
~ 209g/m
2
LCT (C-208) 64g/m
2
~ 256g/m
2
The tray number for paper weight is specified in the
Key Operator mode.
1: 64g/m
2
~ 74g/m
2
2: 75g/m
2
~ 80g/m
2
3: 81g/m
2
~ 105g/m
2
4: 106g/m
2
~ 162g/m
2
5: 163g/m
2
~ 209g/m
2
6: 210g/m
2
~ 256g/m
2
Multi-sheet bypass
tray
64g/m
2
~ 256g/m
2
The tray number for paper weight can be selected
on the Type/Size popup menu of Basic Screen, and
the popup menu is specifed in the Key Operator
mode.
1: 64g/m
2
~ 74g/m
2
2: 75g/m
2
~ 80g/m
2
3: 81g/m
2
~ 105g/m
2
4: 106g/m
2
~ 162g/m
2
5: 163g/m
2
~ 209g/m
2
6: 210g/m
2
~ 256g/m
2
Paper Information (continued)
12-3
Some paper types may not be punched easily.
See p. 14-21 for Paper Type setting of Tray 1, 2, 3 or LCT.
See p. 3-18 for Paper Type setting of Multi-sheet bypass tray.
Paper Trays Weight
ADU 64 g/m
2
~ 209 g/m
2
Finisher
(FN-120/FN-9)
50 g/m
2
~ 256 g/m
2
60 g/m
2
~ 105 g/m
2
for Staple-sort / Stitch&Fold mode
60 g/m
2
~ 105 g/m
2
for Three-Fold mode
Cover Inserter D 50 g/m
2
~ 200 g/m
2
50 g/m
2
~ 128 g/m
2
for Manual punching
60 g/m
2
~ 105 g/m
2
for Manual three fold
Punch kit (PK-5) 50 g/m
2
~ 128 g/m
2
Trimming unit (TMG-3)
64 g/m
2
~ 105 g/m
2
Exit tray 50 g/m
2
~ 256 g/m
2
Paper Information (continued)
12-4
Tray/ Exit Tray Capacity
Paper Trays Capacity
Tray 1, 2, and 3
(Main body tray)
500 sheets (90 g/m
2
paper)
LCT (C-208) 2,500 sheets (90 g/m
2
paper)
Multi-sheet bypass tray
250 sheets (90 g/m
2
paper)
1 sheet each for offset master or Label.
OHP film or ink-jet paper is unavailable.
Equipments Capacity
ADU Unlimited
Finisher
(FN-120/
FN-9)
Secondary (sub)
tray
Approx. 100 sheets
(More than 100 sheets available dependent on paper
type or weight.)
Primary (main)
tray
Non-sort mode (80 g/m
2
paper)
500 sheets (A5R, B6R)
3,000 sheets (A4, A4R, B5, B5R) (FS-115)
2,500 sheets (A4, A4R, B5, B5R, 8.5”x11”, 8.5”x11”R) (FS-215)
1,500 sheets (A3, B4, 12”x18”, 11”x17”, 8.5”x14”)
Sort/Group mode (80 g/m
2
paper)
3,000 sheets (8.5”x11”, 8.5”x11”R, A4, A4R, B5, B5R) (FS-115)
2,500 sheets (8.5”x11”, 8.5”x11”R, A4, A4R, B5, B5R) (FS-215)
1,500 sheets (12”x18”, 11”x17”, 8.5”x14”, A3, B4)
Staple-sort mode (80 g/m
2
paper)
1,000 sheets
(Variable according to the number of pages to be
stapled. See p. 12-5 for details)
Finisher
(FN-9)
Booklet tray
100 sheets (A3, B4, 12”x18”, 11”x17”, 8.5”x14”) (80 g/m
2
paper)
Fold: 33 sets for 3-sheet-folded booklet
(33 x 3 = 99 sheets, 396 pages)
Stitch&Fold: 20 sets for 5-sheet-folded booklet
(20 x 5 = 100 sheets, 400 pages)
5 sets for 20-sheet-folded booklet
(5 x 20 = 100 sheets, 400 pages)
75 sheets (A4R, 8.5”x11”R) (80 g/m
2
paper)
Fold: 25 sets for 3-sheet-folded booklet
(25 x 3 = 75 sheets, 300 pages)
Stitch&Fold: 12 sets for 5-sheet-folded booklet
(15 x 5 = 75 sheets, 300 pages)
3 sets for 25-sheet-folded booklet
(3 x 25 = 75 sheets, 300 pages)
* Maximum number of folded sheet is 3 for Fold mode,
and 25 for Stitch & Fold mode.
Cover Inserter D
200 sheets (200 g/m
2
) or 30 mm thick for Upper/lower tray
Punch kit (PK-5) Unlimited
Trimming unit (TMG-3) 512 sheets (80 g/m
2
paper) (See p. 8-16 for details)
Exit tray 150 sheets (90 g/m
2
paper)
Paper Information (continued)
12-5
2~9
10~20
21~30
31~40
41~50
50 sets
50
30
25
20
100 sets
50
30
25
20
A3/A3W
(12"x18"/11"x17"/
11"x17"W)
B4/B4R, A4/A4W, A4R/A4WR,
B5/B5W (8.5"x14", 8.5"x11"/
8.5"x11"W, 8.5"x11"R/8.5"x11"WR)
Paper size
No. of copies
Paper Capacity for Staple-sort mode of FN-120/FN-9 Finisher
Paper Information (continued)
12-6
Paper Size
For special size setting of main body trays (Tray 1, 2, and 3), see p. 14-21 to p.
14-22.
Paper Trays Available Sizes
Tray 1, 2, and 3
(Main body tray)
STD size:
A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R,
13”x19”, 12”x18”, 11”x17”, 8.5”x14”, 8.5”x11”
STD (special):
Detects F4/8.5”x14”R instead of A4R,
5.5”x8.5”R instead of A5R.
Non STD size:
Max. 330 mm x 487 mm (13”x19.2”) ~ Min. 140
mm x 210 mm
Wide size: A3W, B4W, A4W, B5W, B5RW, A5RW,
11”x17”W, 8.5”x11”W, 8.5”x11”WR,
5.5”x8.5”RW
LCT (C-208) STD size:
A3, B4, A4, B5, 13”x19”, 12”x18”,
11”x17”, 8.5”x14”, 8.5”x11”
Non STD size:
Max. 330 mm x 487 mm
(13”x19.2”)
~ Min. 182
mm x 210 mm
Wide size: A3W, B4W, A4W, B5W, 11”x17”W,
8.5”x14”W, 8.5”x11”W
Paper Information (continued)
12-7
See p. 3-18 to p. 3-21 for specifying the special paper size of the Multi-sheet
bypass tray.
Paper Trays Available Sizes
Multi-sheet bypass
tray
STD size: A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, A6R,
B6R, 13”x19”, 12”x18”, 11”x17”, 8.5”x11”,
8.5”x11”R, 5.5”x8.5”R
STD (special):
Detects F4/8.5”x14” instead of A4R, or A5R/B6R
instead of 5.5”x8.5”R.
Non STD size:
Max. 330 mm x 487 mm (13” x 19.2”) ~ Min. 100
mm x 148 mm
Wide size:
A3W, B4W, A4W, A4WR, B5W, B5WR,
A5WR, A6WR, B6WR, 13”x19”W, 12”x18”W,
11”x17”W, 8.5”x11”W, 8.5”x11”WR, 5.5”x8.5”WR
Equipments Available Sizes
ADU STD size / STD (special):
330 mm x 487 mm (13”x19.2”) to A5R
Non STD size:
330 mm x 487 mm (13”x19.2”) to 140 mm x 182 mm
Wide size: A3W to A5RW
Finisher
(FN-120/FN-9)
Primary (main) tray
314 mm x 458 mm (12”x18”) ~ 100 mm x 148 mm
314 mm x 458 mm (12”x18”) ~ A4R in Sort/Group/
Staple-sort mode
Secondary (sub) tray
330 mm x 487 mm (13”x19.2”) ~ 100 mm x 148 mm
Booklet tray
314 mm x 458 mm (12”x18”) ~ A4R
in Fold or
Stitch & Fold mode
A4R/8.5”x11”R only in Three-Fold mode
Cover Inserter D Upper tray: A4, A4R, 8.5”x11”, 8.5”x11”R, 5.5”x8.5”
Lower tray: 314 mm x 459 mm ~ A5
Punch kit (PK-5) A3, B4, A4, 12”x18”, 11”x17”, 8.5”x11”
Trimming unit
(TMG-3)
A3, B4, A4R, 11”x17”, 8.5”x14”, 8.5”x11”R and those
wide sizes
Exit tray Max. 330 mm x 487 mm (13”x19.2”) ~ Min. 100 mm
x 148 mm
Paper Information (continued)
12-8
Special Paper in Multi-Sheet Bypass Tray
Multi-sheet bypass tray accepts the following special paper type that cannot be
loaded in the main body trays.
Labels
When using special paper type other than the above mentioned, select Excl.A
to D as the paper type in Paper type/size setting for the Multi-sheet bypass
tray.
To Store Copy Paper
Store paper in a cool, dry area. Using damp copy paper may cause a paper
misfeed.
Keep partially used packages tightly wrapped during storage.
Do not place paper packages vertically to store.
Paper curl due to the vertical storage may cause a paper misfeed.
12-9
Original Information
Use the platen glass or document feeder to position originals to copy.
Platen Glass Originals
Use the platen glass when originals are not suitable for use with the document
feeder, e.g., when size is incompatible, or when originals are folded, stapled, torn, or
in generally poor condition.
See each description in this manual for copy conditions which cannot use the
document feeder to scan.
Unsuitable RADF Originals
Platen Glass Original Specifications
Max. original size: 303 mm x 438 mm, sheet or book
Max. book weight/thickness: 6.8 kg / 30 mm
Original placement: Face down on left depth side of glass
Detectable paper size can be changed from only A series to Inch series, AB
series, or AB series and Inch series mixed by Key Operator. See p. 14-37 to p.
14-42.
Do not place too heavy originals, or do not press strongly when
thick original is placed and is under pressure of RADF; otherwise
the glass may be broken and you may be injured.
12
Curled, creased or
folded originals
Glossy or transparent
originals, OHP film,
art paper, cellophane
Paste-ups or
cut-outs
Books
3
4
5
6
Doubled, punched or
stapled originals
Thin or thick originals
Original Information (continued)
12-10
RADF Originals
Following three modes are provided when using the document feeder (RADF) to
scan originals.
Normal mode
Mixed Original mode
Z-Folded Original mode
Specifications for each mode are described as follows.
Detectable paper size can be changed from only A series to Inch series, AB
series, or AB series and Inch series mixed by Key Operator. See p. 14-37 to p.
14-42.
Normal mode
Detectable original size: A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, A5R, 11”x17”,
8.5”x13”, 8.5”x11”
Original weight: Simplex: 35 g/m
2
~ 200 g/m
2
Dulpex: 50 g/m
2
~ 200 g/m
2
* Use Thin mode for 35 g/m
2
~ 49 g/m
2
paper, or Thick mode for 129 g/m
2
~ 200 g/m
2
paper.
Max. feeder capacity: 100 sheets (80 g/m
2
paper)
Curling tolerance: 10 mm or less
Original placement: Face up
Mixed Original mode
Use Mixed Original mode to copy mixed size originals. See p. 9-6 for details.
Original size: Three types of size combination are determined by the RADF
guide width.
A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, and A5 mixed
B4, A4R, B5, B5R, and A5 mixed
B5R and A5R mixed
Original weight: Simplex: 35g/m
2
~ 200g/m
2
Dulpex: 50g/m
2
~ 200g/m
2
* Use Thin mode for 35 g/m
2
~ 49 g/m
2
paper, or Thick mode for 129 g/m
2
~ 200 g/m
2
paper.
Max. feeder capacity: 100 sheets (80 g/m
2
paper)
Curling tolerance: 10 mm or less
Original placement: Face up (see p. 3-6 for details.)
See below for the guide width of each combination.
A3A4
B4B5 A4
A5
Guide
width
Guide
width
Guide
width
Original Information (continued)
12-11
Z-Folded Original mode
Use Z-Folded Original mode to scan folded originals without using the size detection
sensor of the RADF. See p. 9-8 for details.
Detectable original size: A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, A5R, 11”x17”,
8.5”x13”, 8.5”x11”
Original weight: Simplex: 35 g/m
2
~ 200 g/m
2
Dulpex: 50 g/m
2
~ 200 g/m
2
* Use Thin mode for 35 g/m
2
~ 49 g/m
2
paper, or Thick mode for 129 g/m
2
~ 200 g/m
2
paper.
Max. feeder capacity: 100 sheets (80 g/m
2
paper)
Curling tolerance: 10 mm or less
Original placement: Face up (see p. 3-7 for details.); orientation same as copy
paper
13
Section 13:
Maintenance & Supplies
How to Maintain the Copier
Adding Toner .................................................................. 13-2
Inserting a New Staple Cartridge into FN-120/FN-9 Finisher
.. 13-7
Empty Waste Basket of PK-5 Punch Kit....................... 13-10
Empty Waste Basket of TMG-3 Trimming Unit ............. 13-12
Exchanging Toner Recovery Box ................................. 13-14
Cleaning Image Scanning Section ............................... 13-16
Checking Copy Count................................................... 13-18
Periodic Maintenance................................................... 13-20
13-2
Adding Toner
When toner supply is low, the message “Please add toner” and the ADD TONER
icon ( ) display on the touch screen. The toner colour to be
supplied is indicated by an alphabet: C (cyan), M (magenta), Y (yellow), or K (black).
Use the toner bottle with the same color label as the one on the toner bottle
cover.
Add toner according to the procedure as follows.
color label
Adding Toner (continued)
13-3
1. Loosen toner by tapping both top and bottom of the new
toner bottle on a solid surface at least five times, then shake
the bottle at least five times.
2. Open the toner access door.
5~6cm
5~6cm
Adding Toner (continued)
13-4
3. Unlock and open the toner bottle cover of the empty toner bottle.
4. Partially withdraw the toner bottle, then turn it to set the “Up
arrow” mark at the top.
5. Fully withdraw the toner bottle straightforward to remove the
bottle.
1
2
Adding Toner (continued)
13-5
6. Remove the cap of the new toner bottle, then set the same cap to
the removed bottle.
7. While positioning the “Up arrow” mark at the top and aligning the
two hollow parts of the toner bottle with the salients on the bottle
entrance, fully insert the new toner bottle until it locks in place.
1
2
3
New toner bottle
Empty toner bottle
1
2
Adding Toner (continued)
13-6
8. Close and lock the toner bottle cover, then close the toner access
door.
The toner bottle cover cannot be locked if the toner bottle is not set in place.
Do not throw the empty toner bottle into a fire. If it is thrown into a
fire, the toner may ignite and cause a dangerous situation.
Keep the toner bottle away from children. The toner is non-toxic;
however if you inhale or contact with eyes by accident, flush with
water and seek medical advice.
13-7
Inserting a New Staple Cartridge into FN-120/FN-9 Finisher
When the staple cartridge of the Finisher is empty, the Basic Screen displays the
following message in the message area.
Follow the procedure below to replace the staple cartridge.
Use only the staples supplied by us. Please contact your service
representative to purchase.
1. Open the Finisher door.
2. Pull out the stacker unit by holding the stacker unit handle.
Inserting a New Staple Cartridge into FN-120/FN-9 Finisher
(continued)
13-8
3. Pull up the cartridge housing, then remove it while sliding it along
the stapler rail.
4. Remove the empty cartridge from the cartridge housing.
5. Insert the new cartridge into the housing.
Firmly insert the cartridge into the housing while aligning the arrow sides of
both case and housing, then remove the lock tape from the cartridge.
Do not remove the staples remaining inside the housing; otherwise, the first
sheet output after the replenishment will not be stapled.
1
2
Inserting a New Staple Cartridge into FN-120/FN-9 Finisher
(continued)
13-9
6. Insert the cartridge housing while sliding it along the stapler rail,
then push down and in to secure it in place.
7. Return the stacker unit to its original position.
8. Close the Finisher door.
1
2
13-10
Empty Waste Basket of PK-5 Punch Kit
When the waste basket becomes full, “Waste basket of Punching kit is full / Please
empty waste basket” message will be displayed on the touch screen, and the
finished set will be output without being punched even if Punch mode is selected.
Follow the procedure below to empty the waste basket.
1. Open the Finisher door.
2. Withdraw the waste basket.
Empty Waste Basket of PK-5 Punch Kit (continued)
13-11
3. Empty the waste basket.
4. Return the waste basket to its original position, then close the
Finisher door securely.
13-12
Empty Waste Basket of TMG-3 Trimming Unit
When the waste basket becomes full, “Waste basket of Trimmer is full / Please empty
waste basket” message will be displayed on the touch screen, and the finished set
will be output without being trimmed even if Trimming mode is selected.
Follow the procedure below to empty the waste basket.
1. Open the trimmer front door.
2. Withdraw the waste basket.
Empty Waste Basket of TMG-3 Trimming Unit (continued)
13-13
3. Empty the waste basket.
4. Return the waste basket to its original position, then close the
trimmer front door securely.
13-14
Exchanging Toner Recovery Box
When the toner recovery box becomes full with the used toner, “Please change toner
recovery box” message and an icon ( ) will be displayed on the touch screen.
Follow the procedure below to exchange the toner recovery box.
DO NOT THROW the toner recovery box into a fire. If it is thrown into
a fire, the toner may ignite and cause a dangerous situation.
1. Open the toner recovery box door on the rear-right side of
the machine.
2. Withdraw the toner recovery box.
Exchanging Toner Recovery Box (continued)
13-15
3. Remove the sticker on the toner recovery box, then put it on the
inlet of the used toner.
4. Set the new toner recovery box, then close the toner recover box
door.
1
2
13-16
Cleaning Image Scanning Section
In order to maintain optimum copy quality, always keep the following areas clean.
Cleaning the Platen Glass
Raise the original cover, and clean the glass with a clean soft cloth.
The glass may also clean with a soft cloth dampened slightly with water, if it is
difficult to clean.
Never use paint solvents, such as benzene or thinners, to clean the platen
glass.
Cleaning the RADF Platen Guide Cover
The RADF platen guide cover should be kept clean; otherwise soil marks may be
copied or the original size cannot be detected correctly.
Raise the original cover, and clean the RADF platen guide cover with a clean soft
cloth.
Never use paint solvents, such as benzene or thinners, to clean the RADF
platen guide cover.
Cleaning Image Scanning Section (continued)
13-17
Cleaning the Platen Cover
Keep the glass clean; otherwise soil marks may be copied, resulting in dark lines on
the copies.
Raise the original cover, and clean the left partition glass with a clean soft cloth.
Never use paint solvents, such as benzene or thinners, to clean the original
cover.
13-18
Checking Copy Count
This function allows you to view the current indication of the following items as a list
on the touch panel: Total counter, Full colour counter, Mono colour counter,
Monochrome counter, Copier counter, Printer counter, Counter start date.
Check the list, then print it from the Counter List Screen, if desired.
To Display the Counter List Screen
1. Press [P (COUNTER)] on the control panel.
The Counter List Screen will be displayed.
The Counter List Screen can be displayed even when the copying job is in
progress.
2. Touch EXIT to return to the Basic Screen.
Checking Copy Count (continued)
13-19
To Print the Counter List
1. Press [P (COUNTER)] on the control panel.
The Counter List Screen will be displayed.
2. Touch COUNTER MENU.
The Basic Screen will be displayed.
3. Touch the desired tray key to select the paper size.
4. Press [START].
The Counter list will be printed out, and the Management list mode will be
released automatically.
13-20
Periodic Maintenance
After a set number of copies have been made on your copier, Periodic Maintenance
(PM) will be required for maintaining optimal performance.
When preventive maintenance is due, a message and the icon ( ) will prompt
you to contact your service representative for maintenance.
To Check the PM Counter
Follow the procedure below to check the PM counter to estimate the time when
Periodic Maintenance is due.
1. Press [P(COUNTER)] on the control panel.
The Counter List Screen will be displayed.
Periodic Maintenance (continued)
13-21
2. Press [CHECK].
The PM counter will appear under the Printer counter on the screen.
To print the Counter list including the PM counter, see p. 13-19.
3. Touch EXIT.
The Basic Screen will be restored.
14
Section 14:
Key Operator Mode
How to Monitor Copier Activity and
Modify Machine Settings
An Outline of the Key Operator Mode............................. 14-2
[1] System Initial Setting................................................. 14-4
[2] Copier Initial Setting ................................................ 14-10
[3] User Setting Mode................................................... 14-11
[4] EKC (Electronic Key Counter) Function Setting ...... 14-12
[5] Lock/Delete Job Memory......................................... 14-20
[6] Paper Type / Special Size Set ................................. 14-21
[7] Panel Contrast / Key Sound Adjustment.................. 14-24
[8] Key Operator Data Setting....................................... 14-25
[9] Weekly Timer........................................................... 14-26
[10] Control Panel Adjustment...................................... 14-34
[11] Tray Auto Select Setting ........................................ 14-35
[12] Power Save Setting ............................................... 14-36
[13] Memory Switch Setting.......................................... 14-37
[14] Machine Management List Print............................ 14-43
[15] Call Remote Centre............................................... 14-44
[16] Finisher Adjustment............................................... 14-45
[17] Front & Back Density Setting................................. 14-47
[18] Scan Transmission Setting .................................... 14-48
[19] Non-Image Area Erase Setting.............................. 14-50
[20] AE Adjustment....................................................... 14-51
[21] Execute Adjustment Operation.............................. 14-52
[22] Magnification Adjustment ...................................... 14-53
[23] Timing Adjustment................................................. 14-54
[24] Centring Adjustment.............................................. 14-56
[25] Printer Gamma Sensor Adjustment....................... 14-57
14-2
An Outline of the Key Operator Mode
The Key Operator is trained to handle all special Key Operator functions that are not
accessible to the general user, such as monitoring overall copier activity, machine
performance, and service information, modifying machine settings as well as
controlling user activity for billing purposes.
A unique 4-digit Key Operator password is normally set by your service representative
at installation. If the unique code is not set by your service representative, the copier
will not display Key Operator Password Entry Screen when the Key Operator mode is
being accessed; a Key Operator password will not be required.
To ensure the security of Key Operator mode, it is recommended that you establish a
unique Key Operator password, and keep it in a confidential file.
How to Access the Key Operator Mode
1. Press [HELP] on the control panel to display the Help
Screen.
2. Touch KEY OPERATOR MODE on the Help Screen.
3. Enter the Key Operator Password, then touch OK.
Use the keypad on the touch screen to enter your 4-digit Key Operator
password. Touch OK to display the Key Operator Mode Screen.
The entered Key Operator password will not be displayed on the screen. If an
invalid password is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit password.
If the Key Operator password is not valid, check with your service representative.
An Outline of the Key Operator Mode (continued)
14-3
4. Make setting changes from the Key Operator Mode Screen, as
described on the following pages.
To display menus [11] to [20] of the Key Operator Mode Screen, touch the
lower arrow key to scroll.
To return the previous menu, touch the upper arrow key.
The menus [21] to [25] will be displayed and available by service setting.
Contact your service representative, if desired.
5. Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to exit the Key Operator Mode.
The Basic Screen will be restored.
14-4
[1] System Initial Setting
Set the following initial conditions of the copier.
Date & Time setting: Current date and time, Summer time, Time difference
Language select setting: Language used in LCD
IP address setting: IP address to be accessed from PC, Line speed setting
E-mail transmission setting: E-mail address to be informed of machine trouble or
request for supplies.
[1] Date & Time Setting
Set the current date and time, the summer time, and also the time difference.
Default setting: Summer time off
Procedure
1 Touch [1] System initial setting to display the System Initial Setting Menu
Screen.
2 Touch [1] Date & Time setting to display the Date & Time Setting Screen.
3 Adjust the time.
The time indicated by the copier is displayed in the upper line and ordered by
date, month, year and time (in 24-hour expression).
(1) In the lower line, the highlighted section can be changed by using the keypad
on the screen.
(2) Touch SET to move the highlighted section to the number to be changed.
4 Set the Summer time.
The Summer time is initially deactivated.
To activate the summer time (Daylight Savings Time) function, touch Summer
time to highlight it. The Present time will gain an hour.
System Initial Setting Menu Screen
Date & Time Setting Screen
Difference in Time Setting Screen
[1] System Initial Setting (continued)
14-5
5 The Difference in time setting is provided in order to give the time difference
information at the same time when E-mail is received.
To set this function, follow the procedure below.
(1) Touch Diff. time setting to display the Difference in Time Setting Screen.
(2) Touch +<->- to display “+” when the local time is earlier than the Universal
time, or “-” when the local time is later.
(3) Use the keypad on the screen to enter the time difference between the
Universal time and the local time in the machine setting area. (e.g. Enter “-
0600” for 6 hours later than the Universal time.)
(4) Touch OK to return to the Date & Time Setting Screen.
6 Touch OK to update the Present time by the Setting time and return to the
System Initial Setting Menu Screen. To restore the previous setting, touch
CANCEL.
7 Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen.
[1] System Initial Setting (continued)
14-6
[2] Language Select Setting
Select the language used in the LCD.
Default setting: English
Procedure
1 Touch [1] System initial setting to display the System Initial Setting Menu
Screen.
2 To uch [2] Language select setting to display the Language Selection Screen.
3 Select the desired English mode.
4 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the System Initial Setting Menu
Screen, or touch CANCEL to restore the previous setting.
5 Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen.
System Initial Setting Menu Screen
Language Selection Screen
[1] System Initial Setting (continued)
14-7
[3] IP Address Setting
When using the server function, this setting is required to enable a PC to gain access
to this machine. Set the line speed, if required.
NOTE:
Consult your network manager to perform this setting. Incorrect setting may
cause a trouble with other network systems.
Procedure
1 Touch [1] System initial setting to display the System Initial Setting Menu
Screen.
2 Touch [3] IP address setting to display the IP Address Setting Screen.
3 Make the required setting.
(1) Touch to highlight the address key on the left. To scroll to the next page, touch
the arrow key at the lower left corner on the screen.
(2) Enter the address numbers using the screen keypad.
(3) Touch SET to fix the numbers, or touch RESET to clear. Touching SET shifts
the cursor to the right.
4 Customize the line speed.
(1) Touch Line speed setting to display the Line Speed Setting Screen.
(2) Touch the desired key to highlight it.
(3) Touch OK to restore the IP Address Setting Screen.
5 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the System Initial Setting Menu
Screen, or touch CANCEL to restore the previous setting.
6 Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen.
System Initial Setting Menu Screen
IP Address Setting Screen
Line Speed Setting Screen
IP Address Setting Screen (next page)
[1] System Initial Setting (continued)
14-8
[4] E-Mail Transmission Setting
When the machine requires troubleshooting or maintenance such as paper or toner
supply, this setting allows several network PCs to be informed of the current machine
status by E-mail. The IP address of the mail server of the local network, E-mail
address of the machine manager and of others to be informed can be set.
The following information items are provided.
Service call
PM call Finisher tray full
•JAM Complete job Dispose of waste basket
Paper supply Non complete job
Toner supply Staple cartridge supply
NOTE:
Consult your network manager to perform this setting. Incorrect setting may
cause a trouble with other network systems.
Procedure
1 To uch [1] System initial setting to display the System Initial Setting Menu
Screen.
2 Touch [4] E-Mail Transmission Setting to display the E-Mail Transmission
Setting Screen.
3 Specify the IP address of the mail
server.
(1) Touch [1] IP address setting to
display the IP Address Setting
Screen.
(2) Enter the IP address of the mail
address in your network using
screen keypad.
Touch SET to fix the numbers, or
touch RESET to clear. Touching
SET shifts the cursor to the right.
(3) Touch OK to restore the E-Mail Transmission Setting Screen.
4 Specify the E-mail address of the network manager.
System Initial Setting Menu Screen
E-Mail Transmission Setting Screen
IP Address Setting Screen
E-Mail Set (Machine Manager) Screen
E-Mail Address Input Screen
[1] System Initial Setting (continued)
14-9
(1) Touch [2] E-Mail set <machine manager>.
(2) Touch Input key indicate, then enter the E-mail address of the network
manager using screen keypad.
Touch OK to restore the E-Mail Set (Machine Manager) Screen.
(3) Touch OK to restore the E-Mail Transmission Setting Screen.
5 Specify the E-mail address of the
network PC(s).
(1) Touch [3] E-Mail set <condition
inform>.
(2) Touch Input key indicate, then
enter the E-mail address of the
network PC using screen
keypad.
Touch OK to restore the E-Mail
Set (Condition Inform) Screen.
(3) Touch OK to restore the E-Mail Transmission Setting Screen.
6 Select the information items.
(1) Touch [4] E-Mail transmission
item set to display the
Information Setting Screen.
(2) Touch the desired item key to
highlight it. More than one item
can be selected. Touching ALL
CLEAR will release all the
selections.
(3) Touch OK to restore the E-Mail
Transmission Setting Screen.
7 Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to complete the setting and return to the System
Initial Setting Menu Screen.
8 Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen.
E-Mail Set (Condition Inform) Screen
Transmission Item Setting Screen
14-10
[2] Copier Initial Setting
Initial settings are the settings that display automatically when the copier is powered
on, when Auto Reset timer or Power Saver is operated, when the EKC password is
entered, when the key counter is set, or when [AUTO RESET] key is pressed.
Initially, i.e., at installation, the Basic Screen displays the following condition to meet
Energy Star requirements:
Colour Mode: Full colour
Copy Mode: 1-1
Paper Size: APS
Lens Mode: 1:1
Output Mode: Offset sort
NOTE:
The most commonly-used settings are established at installation. Before
changing any of the copier settings, be sure that you understand the overall
and long-range effect of the change.
Procedure
1 Touch [2] Copier initial setting to display the Copier Initial Setting Screen.
2 Make a selection for each mode as initial settings.
Touch RADF to select or deselect it.
NOTE:
The machine will restore the initial settings specified as above unless the
Memory switch No. 4 “Job memory (30) auto recall” is turned ON with the Job
memory No. 30 registered.
3 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Key Operator Mode Screen,
or touch CANCEL to restore the previous setting.
Key Operator Mode Screen
Copier Initial Setting Screen
14-11
[3] User Setting Mode
Set the user-set magnification ratio.
[1] User Lens Mode Ratio Setting
The preset and userset ratios available on the Basic Screen are used to reduce and
enlarge the original image to accommodate copy paper size.
Normally, users are allowed to change the three USERSETs in the bottom line on the
User Lens Mode Ratio Setting Screen. The preset keys in the top and middle lines
can be programmed in 2-5 DIP SW mode for special purposes, but ordinarily, it is
recommended that they remain unchanged.
Default setting: USERSET1: 4.000
USERSET2: 2.000
USERSET3: 0.500
Procedure
1 Touch [3] User setting mode to display the User Setting Mode Menu Screen.
2 Touch [1] User lens mode ratio setting to display the User Lens Mode Ratio
Setting Screen.
3 Touch the USERSET you want to change, then enter a ratio from 0.250 ~ 4.000,
using the keypad.
If a ratio under 0.250 is entered, 0.250 will be displayed.
If a ratio over 4.000 is entered, 4.000 will be displayed.
4 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the User Setting Mode Menu
Screen, or touch CANCEL to restore the previous setting.
5 Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen.
User Setting Mode Menu Screen
User Lens Mode Ratio Setting Screen
14-12
[4] EKC (Electronic Key Counter) Function Setting
The Electronic Key Counter allows you to monitor all copying activity by controlling
EKC password accounts. When the EKC is activated, copying can be performed only
after a valid EKC password is entered.
This feature can track copier usage for individual users and/or accounts as well as
limit copier access to only authorized users. Copy quantity limits for specific accounts
can also be set.
Copy quantity and copy limits for each account can be visually confirmed on the
screen.
If EKC needs to be activated on your machine, contact your service representative.
The following EKC settings can be made by the Key Operator:
[1] E.K.C. data edit:
Assign an account number to an individual user or a group, and specify an EKC
password, name, and copy limit for each. The registered EKC data will be listed on
the screen, allowing you to change the data, reset the copy count, or even delete the
individual account.
[2] E.K.C. all count reset:
Clear the copy count for all accounts.
[3] E.K.C. function setting:
Turn the EKC function on or off, and set conditions to stop immediately, stop after job
is completed or display a warning message when copy limit is reached.
[4] Scanner function setting:
Turn the EKC function on or off while the machine is in Scanner mode. This setting is
available even if the print controller is not installed in the machine.
[4] EKC (Electronic Key Counter) Function Setting (continued)
14-13
How to Access the EKC Setting Mode
Procedure
1 Touch [4] E.K.C. function setting. The EKC Master Key Code Screen displays if
a code is required.
2 Use the keypad on the touch screen to enter your 8-digit EKC master key code,
then touch OK to display the EKC Setting Menu Screen.
NOTES:
1 The EKC master key code will be specified by your service representative
and should be kept secret by the Key Operator.
2 If an invalid EKC master key code is entered, continue by entering the valid
8-digit code.
3 Touch CANCEL on the EKC Master Key Code Screen to return to the Key
Operator Mode Screen.
3 Select the desired EKC function, and make settings as required.
4 To exit the EKC mode, touch PREVIOUS SCREEN on EKC Setting Menu Screen.
The Key Operator Mode Screen will be restored.
Key Operator Mode Screen
EKC Master Key Code Screen
EKC Setting Menu Screen
[4] EKC (Electronic Key Counter) Function Setting (continued)
14-14
[1] E.K.C. Data Edit
Use this setting to display the list of copy, printer, or scanner count and limit for each
account, to change, add, or delete the EKC data, and to reset the copy count of the
individual account.
EKC No.: Designated by Key Operator
EKC Password: Unique 8-digit numeric code programmed by Key Operator for user
User Name: Max. 8 characters
Limit: Limit target, Count 0 to 999,999 copies, Permission for use
Procedure
1 Display the EKC Setting Menu Screen, referring to p. 14-13.
2 Touch [1] E.K.C. data edit. The EKC Data Edit Screen will be displayed.
NOTE:
The EKC Data Edit Screen provides three sorts of EKC data; copier, printer,
and scanner.
Touch COPY, PRINTER, or SCANNER to display the desired screen.
EKC Setting Menu Screen
EKC Data Edit Screen
EKC Data Add Screen
EKC Data Change Screen
Name Duplication Screen
Password Duplication Screen
EKC Limit Setting Popup Menu
[4] EKC (Electronic Key Counter) Function Setting (continued)
14-15
To change, add, or delete the EKC data, and to reset the copy count of an
individual account, follow the procedure for each as described below.
To Add EKC Data:
(1) Select the desired machine mode, then touch Add on the EKC Data Edit
Screen. The EKC Data Add Screen will be displayed.
(2) Note that the Password key is highlighted on the screen. Enter the password
by using the touch screen keypad. Max. 8 digits can be specified.
(3) Touch Name to highlight it, then enter the desired name using the touch
screen keypad. Max. 8 characters can be specified.
(4) Touch Limit to display the EKC Limit Setting popup menu. Select COPY or
PRINTER, then select Common set or Separate set, as desired.
Select Common set to specify a common limit for all copying jobs.
Select Separate set to specify a limit separately for colour copies and
monochrome copies.
(5) Specify the desired limit using control panel keypad. Max. 6 digits (999,999
copies) can be specified.
(6) Select PERMIT or PROHIBIT to enable or disable copying jobs in each mode.
If PROHIBIT is selected, copying job cannot be made in that mode.
(7) Touch OK to return to the EKC Data Add Screen.
NOTES:
1 We recommend that you make a list of all EKC passwords and account
numbers.
2 If an invalid user name or numeric value is entered, continue by entering
the valid one.
(8) Touch OK to complete the setting and to verify whether the same password
or name has been already used for another account number.
When a password is duplicated:
The Password Duplication Screen will be displayed. Touch YES to re-enter
new password, or NO to create duplicate password.
NOTE:
If duplicate password is created, the number of copies will be counted only for
the EKC password with the smallest number. We recommend you do not use
duplicate EKC passwords.
When a name is duplicated:
The Name Duplication Screen will be displayed. Touch OK to re-enter new
name.
(9) If any duplication has not occur, the EKC Data Edit Screen will be restored.
To Change EKC Data:
(1) Touch c or d key on the right side of the list to highlight the EKC data to be
changed, then touch Change. The EKC Data Change Screen will be
displayed.
(2) Touch the desired item key to highlight it, then enter new data by using the
touch screen keypad.
Password: 8 digits max. (See note 1.)
Name: 8 characters max. (See note 2.)
Limit: 999,999 copies max. / Limit Target / Permission for use
NOTES:
1 We recommend that you make a list of all EKC passwords and account
numbers.
2 If an invalid user name or numeric value is entered, continue by entering
the valid one.
[4] EKC (Electronic Key Counter) Function Setting (continued)
14-16
(3) Touch OK to complete the setting and to verify whether the same password
or name has been already used for another account number.
When a password is duplicated:
The Password Duplication Screen will be displayed. Touch YES to re-enter
new password, or NO to create duplicate password.
NOTE:
If duplicate password is created, the number of copies will be counted only for
the EKC password with the smallest number. We recommend you do not use
duplicate EKC passwords.
When a name is duplicated:
The Name Duplication Screen will be displayed. Touch OK to re-enter new
name.
(4) If any duplication has not occur, the EKC Data Edit Screen will be restored.
To Delete EKC Data:
(1) Touch c or d key on the right side of the list to highlight the EKC data to be
deleted, then touch Delete. The Delete Confirmation Screen will be
displayed.
(2) Touch YES to delete, or NO to cancel.
To Clear EKC Count:
(1) Touch c or d key on the right side of the list to highlight the desired EKC
data, then touch Count Reset. The Reset Confirmation Screen will be
displayed.
(2) Touch the desired colour mode key to clear the copy count of the selected
mode.
3 Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN on the EKC Data Edit Screen to return to the EKC
Setting Menu Screen.
4 Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen.
Delete Confirmation Screen
Reset Confirmation Screen
[4] EKC (Electronic Key Counter) Function Setting (continued)
14-17
[2] E.K.C. All Count Reset
Reset the count for all EKC accounts.
Procedure
1 Display the EKC Setting Menu Screen, referring to p. 14-13.
2 Touch [2] E.K.C. all count reset. The EKC All Count Reset Screen will be
displayed.
3 Touch YES to reset all counters to zero and to return to the EKC Setting Menu
Screen, or touch NO to cancel.
Touching PREVIOUS SCREEN will also cancel this function and return to the
EKC Setting Menu Screen.
4 Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN on the EKC Setting Menu Screen to restore the Key
Operator Mode Screen.
EKC Setting Menu Screen
EKC All Count Reset Screen
[4] EKC (Electronic Key Counter) Function Setting (continued)
14-18
[3] E.K.C. Function Setting
Use this function to turn EKC On or Off and to select whether the copier will stop at
the time the count limit is reached, or after the current copy job is completed.
NOTE:
If EKC Off is selected on the machine with this function previously activated,
copying operation will become available without entering an EKC password,
while the counting function will be suspended.
Procedure
1 Display the EKC Setting Menu Screen, referring to p. 14-13.
2 Touch [3] E.K.C. function setting. The EKC Function Setting Screen will be
displayed.
3 Touch EKC On to activate EKC or touch EKC Off to de-activate EKC.
The selected key will be highlighted.
4 Select the desired machine condition when the count limit is reached. The
selected key will be highlighted.
Touch Immediately to stop the machine at once when the copy limit is reached.
In this case, copy conditions selected for the current job will be cleared. To
continue the job using the same user password, change the copy limit of the
password or clear the copy count.
Touch After job to stop the machine after the current job is completed, when
copy limit is reached. Copying job will be unavailable with the message “Copy
limit reached” displayed on the screen.
Touch Warning only to display a warning message when copy limit is reached.
The message “Copy limit reached” will be displayed on the screen, while copying
job can be continued.
5 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the EKC Setting Menu Screen, or
touch CANCEL to cancel.
6 Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen.
EKC Setting Menu Screen
EKC Function Setting Screen
[4] EKC (Electronic Key Counter) Function Setting (continued)
14-19
[4] Scanner Function Setting
Use this function to turn EKC On or Off while the machine is in Scanner mode. This
setting is available even if the machine is not equipped with the optional IP-901 Print
Controller.
Procedure
1 Display the EKC Setting Menu Screen, referring to p. 14-13.
2 Touch [4] Scanner function setting. The Scanner Function Setting Screen will
be displayed.
3 Touch EKC On to activate EKC or touch EKC Off to de-activate EKC.
The selected key will be highlighted.
4 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the EKC Setting Menu Screen, or
touch CANCEL to cancel.
5 Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen.
EKC Setting Menu Screen
Scanner Function Setting Screen
14-20
[5] Lock/Delete Job Memory
Use this function to lock/unlock or delete a Job that has been programmed using Job
Memory function.
Procedure
1 Touch [5] Lock/delete job memory to display the Lock/Delete Job Memory
Screen.
2
To lock/unlock a Job memory:
(1) Touch the key on the left side of the desired Job number. Use arrow keys to
scroll to the desired Job number, if required.
(2) The lock icon will appear on the touched key to show that the selected job is
locked. The previously locked Job will be unlocked when selected, and the
lock icon on the touched key will disappear.
NOTE:
The settings of a locked Job cannot be changed.
To delete a Job memory:
(1) Touch the Job number key you want to delete. The selected key will be
highlighted.
(2) Touch Delete. Selected programs and the name will be deleted from the Job
memory.
NOTE:
A locked job can also be deleted, with the lock on it released at the same time.
Once deleted, the programs cannot be restored.
3 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Key Operator Mode Screen,
or touch CANCEL to restore the previous setting.
Key Operator Mode Screen
Lock/Delete Job Memory Screen
14-21
[6] Paper Type / Special Size Set
[1] Paper Type / Special Size Set
Use this function to indicate a specific paper type and weight, or to specify a special
paper size for main body tray keys on the Basic Screen. This is especially useful
when special paper is used on a regular basis and is always placed in a specific
paper tray.
NOTE:
Service setting is required to use the paper types Excl. A to D.
Contact your service representative, if desired.
Procedure
1 Touch [6] Paper type / Special size set to display the Paper Type / Special Size
Setting Menu Screen.
2 Touch [1] Paper type / Special size set. The Paper Type Setting Screen will be
displayed.
Key Operator Mode Screen
Paper Type Setting Screen (Main Body Trays)
Special Size Setting Screen (STD size (special)
Special Size Setting Screen (STD size)
Special Size Setting Screen (Wide size (select)
Special Size Setting Screen (Non STD size)
Special Size Setting Screen (Wide size (input)
Paper Type / Special Size Setting Menu Screen
[6] Paper Type / Special Size Set (continued)
14-22
3 Specify paper type and weight.
(1) Touch the desired tray key to highlight it.
(2) Touch the desired paper type and weight keys to highlight them. The selected
paper type and number indicating the paper weight will appear on the tray
key.
4 Specify special size.
(1) Touch Special size setting on the Paper Type Setting Screen to display the
Special Size Setting Screen.
(2) Touch the desired tray key to highlight it.
(3) Touch a paper size key to specify a paper size for the selected tray.
•Select STD size to allow the machine to automatically detect the size of
paper loaded in the tray and indicate it on the tray key.
If tray 4 is selected in step (2), selecting STD size will display the popup
menu to show available paper sizes to be specified. Use arrow keys on the
popup menu to select the desired size.
•Select STD size (special) to display the popup menu to show available
paper sizes to be specified. Use arrow keys on the popup menu to select
the desired size.
•Select Non STD size to display the popup menu to enter the paper size by
using arrow keys or touch screen keypad. The selected tray key will
indicate “SPECIAL” instead of the entered numeric value.
•Select Wide size paper to display the popup menu to show available wide
paper sizes to be specified. Use arrow keys on the popup menu to select
the desired wide size. Touch Lead edge or Rear edge to select the image
starting position.
Then, touch Input size to display the popup menu to enter the actual paper
size using arrow keys or touch screen keypad. The entered number should
fall within the range from the standard size of the selected wide size, to a
maximum of 330 mm x 487 mm.
NOTE:
When selecting Wide size paper, be sure to input the actual paper size to be
used.
5 Touch OK on the Special Size Setting Screen to complete the setting and return
to the Paper Type / Special Size Setting Menu Screen, or touch CANCEL to
restore the previous setting.
6 Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to return to the Key Operator Mode Screen.
[6] Paper Type / Special Size Set (continued)
14-23
[2] Paper Type Set (Bypass)
Use this function to specify six combinations of paper type and weight for the Multi-
sheet bypass tray. Specified combinations will be used when selecting Bypass on the
Basic Screen.
NOTE:
Service setting is required to use the paper types Excl, A to D.
Contact your service representative, if desired.
Procedure
1 Touch [6] Paper type / Special size set to display the Paper Type / Special Size
Setting Menu Screen.
2 Touch [2] Paper type set (Bypass). The Paper Type Setting Screen will be
displayed.
3 Select the paper type and weight in combination to be loaded in the Multi-sheet
bypass tray.
(1) Touch the desired key in the Special setting section to highlight it.
(2) Touch the desired paper type and weight keys to highlight them.
The selected paper type and number indicating the paper weight will appear
on the tray key.
Repeat steps (1) and (2) for all the six keys.
4 Touch OK on the Paper Type Setting Screen to complete the setting and return to
the Paper Type / Special Size Setting Menu Screen, or touch CANCEL to restore
the previous setting.
5 Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to return to the Key Operator Mode Screen.
Key Operator Mode Screen
Paper Type Setting Screen (Multi-Sheet Bypass Tray)
Paper Type / Special Size Setting Menu Scree
n
14-24
[7] Panel Contrast / Key Sound Adjustment
Use this feature to adjust the level of brightness of the touch screen portion of the
control panel, and also the volume of the touch key.
NOTE:
The control panel contrast feature can be adjusted from the Help screen.
Procedure
1 Touch [7] Panel contrast/Key sound adj. to display the Panel Contrast / Key
Sound Adjustment Screen.
2 Adjust the Backlight contrast or Buzzer volume, as desired.
Touch the Dimmer arrow key to make the backlight contrast dimmer than currently
displayed, or touch the Brighter arrow key to make the panel or backlight contrast
brighter than currently displayed.
Touch the Small or Big arrow key to regulate the buzzer volume of the touch keys.
3 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Key Operator Mode Screen.
Key Operator Mode Screen
Panel Contrast / Key Sound Adjustment Scree
n
14-25
[8] Key Operator Data Setting
Use this screen to enter the name and extension number of the Key Operator
indicated on the Help Screen that develops from the Basic Screen.
Procedure
1 Touch [8] Key operator data setting to display the Key Operator Data Setting
Screen.
2 Touch Name to highlight it, then enter the key operator name up to 8 characters
from the touch screen keypad.
3 Touch Key Operator Tel. No. to highlight it, then enter a 5-digit extension number
from the touch screen keypad. If the extension number is less than 5 digits, use a
hyphen [-] to make it five. The hyphen added in the beginning will be indicated as
a space on the Help Screen.
4 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Key Operator Mode Screen,
or touch CANCEL to restore the previous setting.
Key Operator Mode Screen
Key Operator Data Setting Screen
14-26
[9] Weekly Timer
The Weekly Timer is a copier management function that shuts down power to the
machine on a daily or hourly basis, and can be programmed specifically for lunch
breaks, weekends and holidays, or any time the copier is not required.
In addition, Timer Interrupt can be enabled (with or without a password requirement)
to allow temporary use of the machine during periods when power is shut down by
the Timer function.
This function can be accessed only by the Key Operator after a unique 4-digit
Weekly Timer password is entered.
To ensure the security of this management function, it is recommended that you
establish a unique password, and keep it in a confidential file.
The Weekly Timer is not initially activated. If this function needs to be activated on
your machine, contact your service representative.
Conditions required to use the Weekly Timer
The power plug is inserted into the socket. The Weekly Timer will not function with
the machine being unplugged, while the setting data will remain.
The power switch is turned on.
The current date and time are correctly set.
The following Weekly Timer settings can be made.
[1] Weekly timer ON/OFF setting
Enable and disable the Timer function.
[2] Timer Setting
Specify the times that the copier will turn ON and OFF for each day of the week
or the entire week.
[3] Timer action ON/OFF Setting
Specify the working days of the machine by the Timer, for all Mondays through
Sundays, and/or individually for each day of the specified month.
[4] Lunch hour off setting
Specify the lunch time interval during which the copier will turn off and on.
[5] Timer interrupt password set
Require password entry for the Timer off function and establish the amount of
usage time.
[9] Weekly Timer (continued)
14-27
How to Access the Weekly Timer Setting Mode
Procedure
1 Touch [9] Weekly timer on the Key Operator Mode Screen.
The Weekly Timer Password Setting Screen displays, if a password is required.
Otherwise, the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen displays without the password
requirement.
NOTE:
The Weekly Timer does not initially require the password setting. To ensure
the security of this management function, it is recommended that you
establish a unique password
2 If the Weekly Timer Password Setting Screen is displayed, use the keypad on the
touch screen to enter your 4-digit Weekly Timer password, then touch OK to
display the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen.
NOTE:
If an invalid Weekly Timer password is entered, continue by entering the valid
4-digit password.
3 Select the desired Weekly Timer function, and make settings, as required.
4 To exit the Weekly Timer mode, touch PREVIOUS SCREEN on the Weekly Timer
Setting Menu Screen to return to the Key Operator Mode Screen.
Key Operator Mode Screen
Weekly Timer Master Key Code Screen
Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen
[9] Weekly Timer (continued)
14-28
[1] Weekly Timer On/Off Setting
Select to activate or deactivate the Weekly Timer function.
Procedure
1 Touch [1] Weekly timer ON/OFF setting on the Weekly Timer Setting Menu
Screen to display the Weekly Timer On/Off Setting Screen.
2 Touch Weekly timer On to activate Weekly Timer, or touch Weekly timer Off to
deactivate Weekly Timer. The selected key will be highlighted.
The default setting is Weekly Timer Off.
NOTE:
If you select Weekly timer On to activate this function, be sure to keep the
power switch turned on.
3 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Weekly Timer Setting Menu
Screen, or touch CANCEL to restore the previous setting.
4 Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN on the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen to restore
the Key Operator Mode Screen.
Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen
Weekly Timer On/Off Setting Screen
[9] Weekly Timer (continued)
14-29
[2] Timer Setting
Use this function to set the On/Off times in hours and minutes for each day of the
week or set the collective time for the entire week, i.e., the same On/Off time for each
day.
Procedure
1 Touch [2] Timer setting on the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen to display the
Weekly Timer On/Off Time Setting Screen.
2 When the screen is displayed, the ON-time of Monday is always highlighted.
Enter a 2-digit ON-hour and a 2-digit ON-minute using the touch screen keypad,
and then touch SET. Monday OFF-time will be highlighted.
Repeat this procedure to set all the On/Off times from Monday through Sunday.
NOTES:
The time is set in terms of the 24 hour clock, where hour [01] is the first
hour after midnight; and hour [24] is midnight. For example, 6 a.m. is 06:00
hours; 6 p.m. is 18:00 hours.
If wrong number is entered, continue by entering the correct time.
•Touching SET repeatedly will shift the input section from Monday ON,
Monday OFF, Tuesday ON, Tuesday OFF. When setting Sunday OFF-time,
Monday ON-time is highlighted again.
If ON-time and OFF-time are the same, power will not go on.
If the setting is 00:00~00:00, you will not be able to set the copiers off/on
condition for specific days.
Be sure to enter the ON/OFF-time for a day off also, so that you can specify
the machine working days on the Weekly Timer Working Day Individual/
Collective Setting Screen.
3 To set the ON/OFF time collectively for more than one day of the week, touch
Block timer setting to display the Weekly Timer On/Off Time Collective Setting
Screen. When you open this screen, the ON and OFF times are always set at
00:00~00:00.
Touch to highlight the day(s) of the week to be set. More than one can be
selected at a time.
Enter the ON-time and OFF-time using the touch screen keypad, and then touch
SET after each entry. See step 2 for details in entering the time.
Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen
Weekly Timer On/Off Time Setting Screen
Weekly Timer On/Off Time Collective Setting Screen
[9] Weekly Timer (continued)
14-30
4 Touch OK on the Weekly Timer On/Off Time Setting Screen or on the Weekly
Timer On/Off Time Collective Setting Screen to complete the setting, and return
to the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen.
Touching CANCEL will restore the previous setting, and return to the Weekly
Timer Setting Menu Screen.
5 Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN on the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen to restore
the Key Operator Mode Screen.
[9] Weekly Timer (continued)
14-31
[3] Timer Action On/Off Setting
Use this function to set the On/Off condition of the copier for a given month. Set the
On-Off condition for specific days or collectively, for all Mondays through Sundays of
the given month.
The default setting is collective: On for Mondays through Saturdays, and Off for
Sundays.
Procedure
1 Touch [3] Timer action ON/OFF setting on the Weekly Timer Setting Menu
Screen to display the Timer Action On/Off Setting Screen.
2 The days of the current month are displayed on the left half of the screen, with
timer-active days highlighted.
To activate or deactivate the Timer for any individual day, touch the key for that
day to change its indication.
To change the month, use arrows to scroll to the desired month.
3 To collectively set the on/off data for the entire month by the day of the week,
touch the ON or OFF key for the desired day on the right half of the screen to
highlight it.
4 If any change is made in the collective setting area, the Timer Action Change
Confirmation Screen will be displayed.
Touch YES to change the timer action, or touch NO to cancel.
5 Touch OK on the Timer Action On/Off Setting Screen to complete the setting and
return to the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen, or touch CANCEL to restore
the previous setting.
6 Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN on the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen to restore
the Key Operator Mode Screen.
Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen
Timer Action On/Off Setting Screen
Timer Action Change Confirmation Screen
[9] Weekly Timer (continued)
14-32
[4] Lunch Hour Off Setting
The Weekly Timer function turns the copier ON and OFF once a day.
Use the Lunch hour off function to shut down power during the lunch break and then
turn it on again according to the Weekly Timer function setting. Only one off-time
interval can be programmed.
Procedure
1 Touch [4] Lunch hour off setting on the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen to
display the Lunch Hour Off Setting Screen.
2 Touch Function Valid to activate the Lunch hour off function. Set OFF-time and
Restart-time using the touch screen keypad, and then touch SET after each entry.
3 Touch Function Invalid to de-activate the Lunch hour off function. The time
setting area will appear grayed out and cannot be selected.
The Function Invalid setting is the factory default setting.
4 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Weekly Timer Setting Menu
Screen. If other Weekly Timer setting changes are required, select the desired
menu item, from [1]~[5].
5 Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN on the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen to restore
the Key Operator Mode Screen.
Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen
Lunch Hour Off Setting Screen
[9] Weekly Timer (continued)
14-33
[5] Timer Interrupt Password Setting
Use this password setting mode to establish a 4-digit password requirement for using
Timer Interrupt function. The default password of 0000 allows the timer function to be
interrupted without the requirement for password entry.
Procedure
1 Touch [5] Timer interrupt password set on the Weekly Timer Setting Menu
Screen to display the Timer Interrupt Password Setting Screen.
2 Use the touch screen keypad to enter a 4-digit password, and then touch OK to
complete the setting and return to the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen.
NOTE:
When the password setting is 0000, Timer Interrupt can be used simply by
turning the copier OFF, then ON. In this case, you will be asked to enter the
duration of use (a period of time to turn the copier power on).
3 If other Weekly Timer setting changes are required, select the desired menu item,
from [1]~[5].
4 Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN on the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen to restore
the Key Operator Mode Screen.
Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen
Timer Interrupt Password Setting Screen
14-34
[10] Control Panel Adjustment
Use this feature to check the LCD touch screen and realign the position of the touch
sensor that may have shifted.
Procedure
1 Touch [10] Control panel adjustment on the Key Operator Mode Screen to
display the Control Panel Adjustment Screen.
2 Touch the “+” symbol at the upper right corner, then lower left corner on the
screen. The present coordinates will be displayed in the message area of the
screen.
3 Check that the X coordinate and Y coordinate displayed in the first line of the
message area fall within the standard value displayed in the second line.
4 Touch the CHECK BUTTONs at the upper left and lower right corners on the
screen to check if the buzzer tone functions normally.
5 If the coordinates fall out of the range of the standard value in step 3, or the
buzzer tone does not sound in step 4, repeat the adjustment procedure from 2 to
4 or contact your service representative.
6 Press [1] of the control panel keypad to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen.
Key Operator Mode Screen
Control Panel Adjustment Screen
14-35
[11] Tray Auto Select Setting
Select whether the tray size setting will be detected or not detected when ATS/APS
functions. If you select it to be detected, you may also select the priority of the
detection for each tray.
Procedure
1 Touch [11] Tray auto select setting to display the Tray Auto Select Setting
Screen.
2 On the left half of the screen, touch to highlight each tray key, then select OFF or
ON to specify whether the selected tray is to be automatically detected or not
when ATS/APS functions.
Tray keys specified as ATS/APS ON will appear on the right half of the screen.
3 Specify the priority of the trays. Touch to highlight the desired tray key, then
change its priority by using Up c and Down d arrow keys.
4 Touch OK to complete the setting and restore the Key Operator Mode Screen, or
touch CANCEL to restore the previous setting.
Key Operator Mode Screen 1
Key Operator Mode Screen 2
Tray Auto Select Setting Screen
14-36
[12] Power Save Setting
Select the interval of time that must elapse before Auto Low Power and Auto Shut Off
become activated.
Procedure
1 Touch [12] Power save setting on the Key Operator Mode Screen to display the
Timer Setting Screen.
2 The periods of time currently selected for each power save function are located
on the Timer Setting Screen below the Auto Low Power and Auto Shut Off
indicators.
Touch the arrow keys (c) and (d) in each area to select a specific waiting period
before activating the Auto Low Power or Auto Shut Off.
NOTES:
The period of time selected for Auto Low Power cannot exceed the Auto
Shut Off setting.
If the same period of time as Auto Shut Off is selected for Auto Low Power,
the Auto Shut Off will function instead of Auto Low Power.
3 Touch OK on the Timer Setting Screen to complete the setting and restore the
Key Operator Mode screen, or touch CANCEL to restore the previous setting.
Key Operator Mode Screen
Power Save Setting Screen
14-37
[13] Memory Switch Setting
This function allows you to change the Memory Settings listed below. See pp. 14-
39~14-42 for details of Memory Settings.
SW No. Item Setting (default is underlined)
No. 01: Auto reset timer OFF / 30 sec. / 60 sec.
/ 90 sec. / 120 sec./
150 sec. / 180 sec. / 210 sec. / 240 sec. /
270 sec. / 300 sec.
No. 02: AUTO RESET key function Full-Auto / Initial Setting
No. 03: RADF-Original effect
RADF+AUTO RESET key selected / RADF
selected
No. 04: Job memory auto recall (30) OFF / ON
No. 05: Finisher mode by Full-auto Face down (Sub tray) / Non-sort / Sort /
Staple sort / Stitch&Fold / Fold / Face up
(Sub tray)
No. 06: Initial by Key counter insert OFF / ON
No. 07: Erasure outside area of orig. Erased for except Platen (1:1) / Area
outside of orig. erased / Erased for APS/
AMS only
No. 08: RADF frame erasure selection None / 1mm frame / 2mm frame / 3mm
frame / 4mm frame / 5mm frame
No. 09: Automatic tray switching OFF / ON
No. 10: Platen APS OFF / ON
No. 11: RADF APS OFF / ON
No. 12: Platen AMS OFF / ON
No. 13: RADF AMS OFF / ON
No. 14: Select tray when APS cancel APS preferential tray / Tray 1 / Tray 2 / Tray
3 / Tray 4 / Bypass tray
No. 15: Platen original size detect Only A series / Full size / AB series / Inch
series
No. 16: RADF original size detect Only A series / Full size / AB series / Inch
series
No. 17: Platen orig. size detect (SMALL) A5R / B6R / 5.5”x8.5”R / B5 / A4 / 8.5x11 /
A6R
No. 18: Rotation
ON-APS/AMS only / ON-APS/AMS/Reduce
only / ON-Always
No. 19: Staple mode reset-function OFF / ON
No. 20: Job offset operating OFF / ON
No. 21: Continuation print
Copier:OFF/Printer:OFF / Copier:ON/Printer:ON
/ Copier:ON/Printer:OFF / Copier:OFF/
Printer:ON
No. 22: Key click sound OFF / ON
No. 23: 1 SHOT indication time 3 seconds / 5 seconds
No. 24: Power save screen Shut off mode / Low power mode
No. 25: START key latch function OFF / ON
No. 26: STOP key function JOB momentary stop / JOB cancel
No. 27: Auto select of Booklet copy
Automatic selection / Non Automatic
selection
No. 28: E.K.C. password Under 8 digits / 8 digits
No. 29: Arrow key change (Image Shift) Decimal point off (1 STEP 1mm) / Decimal
point on (1 STEP 0.1mm)
No. 30: An interruption suspended way Division of a number of copies / During of a
number of copies
No. 31: E.K.C. password input timing Auto reset timer / Complete job
No. 32:
Sound (No paper, toner/JAM
)OFF / 3 seconds / 5 seconds / 10 seconds
[13] Memory Switch Setting (continued)
14-38
No. 33: Reserve copy function
Reserve copy by folder select / Reserve
copy by original set
No. 34: Change page no. pos. (booklet) OFF / ON (Outside page numbering)
No. 35: Trimmer (STD/Non STD size) STD size / Non STD size
No. 36: Timer which prohibits Print
OFF / 15 seconds / 30 seconds / 60
seconds / 90 seconds
No. 37: Bookmark function ON (It is cancel every JOB) / ON (It is not
cancel every JOB) / OFF
No. 38: Delete of overlay image Permission (Delete/Overwrite) / Prohibition
(Delete/Overwrite)
No. 39: Orig. direction/Binding mode It is cancel every JOB / It is not cancel
No. 40: SCREEN (Line Screen) OFF / HighReso:Use SmoothTone:Use /
HighReso:Use SmoothTone/NoUse /
HighReso:NoUse SmoothTone:Use
No. 41: SCREEN (Dot Screen) OFF / HighReso:Use SmoothTone:Use /
HighReso:Use SmoothTone/NoUse /
HighReso:NoUse SmoothTone:Use
No. 42: Side 2 drum clock adjust mode OFF / ON
No. 43: Screen (FullColour - Text/Photo)
HighCompression / LineScreen-HighResolution
/ LineScreen-SmoothTone / DotScreen-
HighResolution / DotScreen-SmoothTone
No. 44: Screen (FullColour - Photo)
HighCompression / LineScreen-HighResolution
/ LineScreen-SmoothTone / DotScreen-
HighResolution / DotScreen-SmoothTone
No. 45:
Screen (Monochrome - Text/Photo) HighCompression / LineScreen-HighResolution
/ LineScreen-SmoothTone / DotScreen-
HighResolution / DotScreen-SmoothTone
No. 46: Screen (Monochrome - Photo)
HighCompression / LineScreen-HighResolution
/ LineScreen-SmoothTone / DotScreen-
HighResolution / DotScreen-SmoothTone
No. 47:
Screen (MonoColour - Text/Photo)
HighCompression / LineScreen-HighResolution
/ LineScreen-SmoothTone / DotScreen-
HighResolution / DotScreen-SmoothTone
No. 48: Screen (MonoColour - Photo)
HighCompression / LineScreen-HighResolution
/ LineScreen-SmoothTone / DotScreen-
HighResolution / DotScreen-SmoothTone
No. 49: Colour gamut Normal / Wide
Key Operator Mode Screen
Memory Switch Setting Screen
[13] Memory Switch Setting (continued)
14-39
Procedure
1 Touch [13] Memory switch setting to display the Memory Switch Setting
Screen.
2 To select the desired item, touch the arrow keys (c) and (d) at the right of the
Memory Switch Setting Screen to highlight it.
To scroll, touch the arrow keys at the lower left corner of the screen.
3 To change the setting of the highlighted item, touch Change Setting Contents
repeatedly till the desired setting is displayed.
Repeat above steps 2 to 3 to make several changes in succession.
4 Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN on the Memory Switch Setting Screen to restore the
Key Operator Mode Screen.
The following functions can be provided by the Memory Switch settings.
[1] Auto reset timer
Set the reset interval starting from the completion of a copying job until the machine
returns to the initial condition.
[2] AUTO RESET key function
Set the condition of the following modes when [AUTO RESET] is pressed: Copy
mode, Copy density, Magnification, Tray selection.
[3] RADF-Original effect
Set the machine condition when original is set on RADF in non-RADF mode with
RADF unit closed.
[4] Job memory auto recall (30)
Job memory number 30 is automatically recalled when power is turned on or when
Auto-reset is restored.
This job recall function works only when Job number 30 is registered.
[5] Finisher mode by Full-auto
Set the Output Mode to be recalled when [AUTO RESET] is pressed.
[6] Initial by Key counter insert
Set the machine to return to the initial state when Key counter is inserted.
[7] Erasure outside area of original
Set the machine to delete the outside area of originals.
[8] RADF frame erasure selection
Set Frame erasure to function anytime in RADF mode.
[9] Automatic tray switching
When paper is depleted during a copying job, the copier continues copying by
switching to another tray that contains the same size paper.
[10] Platen APS
The copier automatically selects the same size copy paper as the original placed on
the platen glass. (In reduction or enlargement mode, an appropriate paper size is
selected according to the ratio selected.)
[11] RADF APS
The copier automatically selects the same size copy paper as the original placed on
the RADF. (In reduction/enlargement mode, an appropriate paper size is selected
according to the ratio.)
[13] Memory Switch Setting (continued)
14-40
[12] Platen AMS
The copier detects the size of the platen original and selects the appropriate
magnification ratio to correspond to the selected paper size.
[13] RADF AMS
After detecting the original size placed on the RADF the copier automatically selects
an appropriate ratio for the copy when paper size is selected manually.
[14] Select tray when APS cancel
Select the tray to be automatically selected when APS is released.
[15] Platen original size detect
Select the series of the original paper size detected from the platen glass.
[16] RADF original size detect
Select the series of the original paper size detected from the RADF.
[17] Platen orig. size detect (SMALL)
Select the minimum original size detected from the platen glass.
[18] Rotation
Select to activate the Rotation function, activate Rotation only when APS/AMS
functions, or activate Rotation only when APS/AMS/Reduce functions.
[19] Staple mode reset-function
Staple mode is automatically canceled after a job is completed with Staple sort mode
ON. (Sort mode is selected.)
[20] Job offset operating
Set the copier to offset the copies of different jobs.
[21] Continuation print
Set the copier to output multiple reserve jobs in succession.
[22] Key click sound
Activate or deactivate the sound each time a key is pressed on the touch panel.
[23] 1 SHOT indication time
Select the SHOT indication time function.
[24] Power save screen
Select the screen to display when pressing the [POWER SAVER ON/OFF] key.
[25] START key latch function
Activate or deactivate the latch function.
[26] STOP key function
Select to display or not to display the confirmation message when [STOP] key is
pressed.
[27] Auto select of Booklet copy
Set the copier with FS-215 mounted to automatically select the Booklet mode when
Stitch&Fold or Fold output mode is selected.
[13] Memory Switch Setting (continued)
14-41
[28] E.K.C. password
Select the acceptable number of digits for the EKC master key code.
[29] Arrow key change (Image Shift)
Select the 1 step unit of the touch key to specify the shift amount in Image shift.
[30] An interruption suspend way
Select the timing to stop the job in progress when [INTERRUPT] is pressed.
[31] E.K.C. password input timing
Set the input timing for the EKC password.
[32] Key click sound (No paper, toner/JAM)
Select the duration of the buzzer that alerts when the machine is out of paper or
when paper has misfed.
[33] Reserve copy function
Set the timing for the reserve job setting.
[34] Change page no. pos. (booklet)
Set the machine to position the page numbers automatically on the outside edges of
the copy when using Booklet with Page Numbering in Stamp.
[35] Trimmer (STD / Non STD size)
Set the machine to allow trimming the folded or stapled & folded sheets in non-
standard size (or wide size).
[36] Timer which prohibits Print
Set the timer to allow the printing job after operating the copying job.
[37] Bookmark function
Select to set the Bookmark function only for the current job, set for all the following
jobs, or deactivate the function.
[38] Delete of overlay image
When selecting (or storing) overlaying image data in HDD using Overlay Memory,
select to permit or prohibit deleting the selected data (or overwriting the data of the
same name previously stored in HDD).
[39] Orig. direction/Binding mode
Select to reset or save the original direction and bind position settings made on the
Special Original popup menu and Output Mode popup menu after completion of
each copying job.
[40] SCREEN (Line Screen)
Specify the initial state of the Line Screen setting in SCREEN setting of IMAGE
ADJUST.
[41] SCREEN (Dot Screen)
Specify the initial state of the Dot Screen setting in SCREEN setting of IMAGE
ADJUST.
[42] Side 2 drum clock adjust mode
Set the same magnification ratio for the reverse side as that of the front side in
double-sided copying.
[13] Memory Switch Setting (continued)
14-42
[43] Screen (FullColour - Text/Photo)
Specify the initial state of the SCREEN setting in Full Colour mode with Text/Photo
specified in Special Original setting.
[44] Screen (FullColour - Photo)
Specify the initial state of the SCREEN setting in Full Colour mode with Photo
specified in Special Original setting.
[45] Screen (Monochrome - Text/Photo)
Specify the initial state of the SCREEN setting in Black mode with Text/Photo
specified in Special Original setting.
[46] Screen (Monochrome - Photo)
Specify the initial state of the SCREEN setting in Black mode with Photo specified in
Special Original setting.
[47] Screen (MonoColour - Text/Photo)
Specify the initial state of the SCREEN setting in Single Colour mode with Text/Photo
specified in Special Original setting.
[48] Screen (MonoColour - Photo)
Specify the initial state of the SCREEN setting in Single Colour mode with Photo
specified in Special Original setting.
[49] Colour gamut
Specify the latitude of the colour in printing images.
NOTE:
•If Wide is selected, a blur may appear in high density area of the printed
image.
Be sure to select Wide before making calibration on the printer controller.
When the calibration is completed, be sure to resume the previous setting.
14-43
[14] Machine Management List Print
Use this function to print out the list selected from the following items.
Job memory list: Programmed contents of Job memory
User management list: Home position settings selected by user
E.K.C. management list: Machine information managed by EKC
Font pattern list: Font patterns used in the machine
Procedure
1 Touch [14] Machine management list print on the Key Operator Mode Screen
to display the Management List Print Menu Screen.
2 Touch the desired item on the screen. The Basic Screen will resume
automatically.
3 Press [START] to start printing the selected list.
To suspend printing, press [STOP].
Press [P] and [C] in order to return to the Management List Print Menu Screen.
4 Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN on the Management List Print Menu Screen to
restore the Key Operator Mode Screen.
Key Operator Mode Screen
Management List Print Menu Screen
14-44
[15] Call Remote Centre
When activated, the Remote Diagnostics option is automatically monitored by your
service representative. In case of the following machine trouble, select the Call
Remote Centre option. Your service representative will contact you to determine the
appropriate means for resolving the problem.
Call for JAM concerns
Call for SC concerns
Toner bottle supply call
Paper supply call
Call for Image quality
Call for others
Procedure
1 Touch [15] Call remote centre on the Key Operator Mode Screen to display the
Call Remote Service Centre Screen.
2 Touch the desired item key.
The Start Call Screen will be displayed.
3 Touch Start to call.
4 Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN on the Start Call Screen to restore the Key Operator
Mode Screen.
Key Operator Mode Screen
Call Remote Service Centre Screen
Start Call Screen
14-45
[16] Finisher Adjustment
Use this mode to make fine adjustments to each function of the finisher.
Key Operator Mode Screen
Finisher Adjustment Menu Screen
Fold Stopper Position Adjustment Screen
Stitch&Fold Stopper Position Adjustment Screen
Punch Adjustment Menu Screen
Trimming Stopper Position Adjustment Screen
Punch Kit Horizontal Position Adjustment Screen
Punch Kit Vertical Position Adjustment Screen
2 Positions Staple Pitch Adjustment Screen
Three-Fold Position Adjustment Screen
[16] Finisher Adjustment (continued)
14-46
Procedure
1 Touch [16] Finisher adjustment on the Key Operator Mode Screen to display the
Finisher Adjustment Menu Screen.
2 Touch the desired menu key to display the adjustment screen for each function.
3 Make fine adjustment on the screen.
Touch +<->- to select “+” or “-” as desired, enter the value, then touch SET.
Check the entered value on the left side of the second line in the message area.
If provided, touch
NEXT ADJUSTMENT
or
PREVIOUS ADJUSTMENT
to move to
the next or previous adjustment item.
Touch
PREVIOUS SCREEN
to restore the Finisher Adjustment Menu Screen.
4 Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen.
Output Quantity Limit Setting Screen
Finisher Output Limit Menu Screen
Permission Setting Screen
14-47
[17] Front & Back Density Setting
Use this function to make fine adjustments to the copy density of the front and back
sides individually.
Procedure
1 Touch [17] Front & Back Density setting to display the Front & Back Density
Setting Screen.
2 Touch the desired adjustment key to make an adjustment for each side.
3 Touch OK to complete the setting and restore the Key Operator Mode Screen, or
touch CANCEL to restore the previous setting.
Front&Back Density Setting Screen
Key Operator Mode Screen
14-48
[18] Scan Transmission Setting
Use this function to change or delete the address registered for transmitting the
image data scanned on the machine.
The following three address types can be registered.
E-mail (entry name, e-mail address)
HDD (entry name, box No.)
FTP (profile name, host address, file path, login, password)
NOTE:
The [18] Scan Transmission Setting key will function only when Print
Controller is installed in the machine.
Procedure
1 Touch [18] Scan transmission setting on the Key Operator Mode Screen to
display the Scan Transmission Setting Screen.
2 Select the desired address type.
Touch E-Mail, HDD, or FTP to display the registered name keys on each page.
3 Select the name key to be changed or deleted.
Touch the Lower arrow key to scroll, or Upper arrow key to return.
Key Operator Mode Screen
Scan Transmission Setting Screen
Change Box No. Screen
Change E-Mail Address Screen
Change FTP Address Screen
Input Key Screen
[18] Scan Transmission Setting (continued)
14-49
To delete the address:
Touch to highlight the desired name key, then touch DELETE.
The selected key will be deleted from the screen.
To change the address:
(1) Touch to highlight the desired name key, then touch CHANGE.
The subsequent screen according to the address type will be displayed.
(2) Touch to highlight the registered item key on the left, touch Input key
indicate to display the Input Key Screen, then change the information under
the registered item key using the alphabet keys on the screen. Touch OK to
return to the previous screen.
(3) Touch OK on each screen to complete the setting and restore the Scan
Transmission Setting Screen.
4 Touch OK on the Scan Transmission Setting Screen to restore the Key Operator
Mode Screen, or touch CANCEL to restore the previous setting.
14-50
[19] Non-Image Area Erase Setting
Select the original density level of Non-Image Area Erase function to be in effect
when this feature is selected on the Application Selection Screen after power is
turned on or after Auto Reset occurs.
Procedure
1 Touch [19] Non-image area erase setting on the Key Operator Mode Screen to
display the Non-Image Area Erase Setting Screen.
2 Touch AUTO to let the machine select the density level automatically, or manually
select the density level from the five exposure levels provided on the screen.
3 Touch OK to complete the setting and restore the Key Operator Mode Screen, or
touch CANCEL to restore the previous setting.
Non-Image Area Erase Setting Screen
Key Operator Mode Screen
14-51
[20] AE Adjustment
Use this function to set the adjustment level of the automatic exposure (AE) suitable
for either text originals or photo originals. Different setting is available for each of the
colour mode and monochrome mode.
Procedure
1 Touch [20] AE adjustment on the Key Operator Mode Screen to display the AE
Adjustment Screen.
2
To uch
NEXT ADJUSTMENT
or
PREVIOUS ADJUSTMENT
to select the mode to
be adjusted.
The selected mode will be displayed in the message area.
3 Specify the adjustment level.
Touch +<->- to select “+” or “-” as desired, enter the value, then touch SET.
Check the entered value on the left side of the second line in the message area.
The AE will function suitable for text originals if specified value is positive, or for
photo originals if negative value is entered.
4 Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to complete the setting and return to the Key
Operator Mode Screen.
AE Adjustment Screen
Key Operator Mode Screen
14-52
[21] Execute Adjustment Operation
Select the desired item to execute an adjustment operation.
Auto gamma adjustment should be performed if reproducibility of the whole image is
not satisfactory.
Colour Regist auto adjustment should be performed if CMY colour layers show any
gap compared with the original during successive copying.
Toner refresh mode should be performed if you find the following conditions:
Printed image shows a rough texture.
White lines appear along with the paper feeding direction.
Small dots appear randomly on the printed paper.
Small white spot appears in the printed image.
NOTE:
The Toner refresh mode is effective only when the above conditions appear in
cyan or magenta colour layer. If you find them in yellow or black layer, please
contact your service representative to change the setting of this function.
Procedure
1 Touch [21] Execute adjust operation on the Key Operator Mode Screen to
display the Execute Adjustment Operation Screen.
2 Touch the desired item key to highlight it.
3 Touch OK to complete the setting and restore the Key Operator Mode Screen.
4 Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to restore the Basic Screen. The machine will
execute the adjustment operation of the selected item automatically, with the
executing adjustment message displayed in the message area (approx. 2’ 30”).
5 When the adjustment is completed, “Position original in the RADF face up”
message will be displayed on the Basic Screen.
Execute Adjustment Operation Screen
Key Operator Mode Screen
14-53
[22] Magnification Adjustment
Use this mode to make various adjustments concerning the magnification function.
Printer vertical mag. adj.: adjusts the vertical magnification of the printer system.
Printer horizontal mag. adj.: adjusts the horizontal magnification of the printer system.
Scanner vertical mag. adj.; adjusts the vertical magnification of the scanner system.
Procedure
1 Touch [22] Magnification adjustment on the Key Operator Mode Screen to
display the Magnification Adjustment Menu Screen.
2 Touch the desired menu key to display the adjustment screen for each function.
3 Make fine adjustment on the screen.
Touch +<->- to select “+” or “-” as desired, enter the value, then touch SET.
Check the entered value on the left side of the second line in the message area.
If provided, touch
NEXT ADJUSTMENT
or
PREVIOUS ADJUSTMENT
to move to
the next or previous adjustment item.
Touch
PREVIOUS SCREEN
to restore the Magnification Adjustment Menu
Screen.
4 Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen.
Key Operator Mode Screen
Magnification Adjustment Menu Screen
Printer Horizontal Adjustment Screen
Printer Drum Clock Adjustment Screen
Scanner Drum Clock Adjustment Screen
14-54
[23] Timing Adjustment
Use this mode to make fine adjustments of the timing for printing or scanning
function.
Printer lead edge timing adj.: adjusts the lead edge timing.
Printer registration loop adj.: adjusts the paper loop amount in the registration
roller section.
Printer pre-registration adj.: adjusts the paper loop amount in each tray and ADU
pre-registration roller section.
Printer erasure amount adj.: conducts a leading edge erasure amount adjustment.
Scanner re-start timing adj.: adjusts re-start timing for original scanning.
RADF registration loop adj.: adjusts the original loop amount in the RADF
registration roller section.
Procedure
1 Touch [23] Timing adjustment on the Key Operator Mode Screen to display the
Timing Adjustment Menu Screen.
2 Touch the desired menu key to display the adjustment screen for each function.
Key Operator Mode Screen Timing Adjustment Menu Screen
Printer Registration Loop Adjustment Screen
Printer Lead Edge Timing Adjustment Screen
Printer Erasure Amount Adjustment Screen
Printer Pre-registration Adjustment Screen
RADF Registration Loop Adjustment Screen
Scanner Re-start Timing Adjustment Screen
[23] Timing Adjustment (continued)
14-55
3 Make fine adjustment on the screen.
Touch +<->- to select “+” or “-” as desired, enter the value, then touch SET.
Check the entered value on the left side of the second line in the message area.
If provided, touch
NEXT ADJUSTMENT
or
PREVIOUS ADJUSTMENT
to move to
the next or previous adjustment item.
Touch
PREVIOUS SCREEN
to restore the Timing Adjustment Menu Screen.
4 Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen.
14-56
[24] Centring Adjustment
Use this mode to make various adjustments concerning the image centring function.
Printer centring adjustment: adjusts the mis-centring of images vertical to paper
feed direction.
• Scanner centring adjustment: adjusts the centring when scanning the platen
original.
RADF centring adjustment: adjusts the centring when scanning the RADF original.
Procedure
1
Touch
[24] Centring adjustment
on the Key Operator Mode Screen to display the
Centring Adjustment Menu Screen.
2 Touch the desired menu key to display the adjustment screen for each function.
3 Make fine adjustment on the screen.
Touch +<->- to select “+” or “-” as desired, enter the value, then touch SET.
Check the entered value on the left side of the second line in the message area.
If provided, touch
NEXT ADJUSTMENT
or
PREVIOUS ADJUSTMENT
to move to
the next or previous adjustment item.
Touch
PREVIOUS SCREEN
to restore the Centring Adjustment Menu Screen.
4 Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen.
Key Operator Mode Screen
Centring Adjustment Menu Screen
Scanner (Platen) Centring Adjustment Screen
Printer Centring Adjustment Screen
RADF Centring Adjustment Screen
14-57
[25] Printer Gamma Sensor Adjustment
Use this function to make various adjustments concerning the gamma sensor.
Procedure
1
To uch
[25] Printer Gamma Sensor adjustment
on the Key Operator Mode Screen
to display the Printer Gamma Sensor Adjustment Screen.
2 Select the desired adjustment item on the screen. Six items are provided: LS200,
LS150, DS200, DS150, CONTONE, and ED.
Touch
NEXT ADJUSTMENT
or
PREVIOUS ADJUSTMENT
to move to the next or
previous adjustment item.
NOTE:
Some adjustment items cannot be displayed if the screen is specified as OFF
state in the Memory Switch setting.
Touching Adj. data reset will display the Reset Confirmation Screen. Touch YES
to reset the adjustment value to the initial state, or touch NO to cancel.
3 Touch COPY SCREEN to move to the Basic Screen to print a chart.
Load several sheets of A4 paper on the Multi-sheet bypass tray, then press
[START] to output the test chart.
When output is completed, the Printer Gamma Sensor Adjustment Screen will be
restored, with the message “Please load output paper in Platen and push
[START] button” displayed.
4 Place the test chart face down on the platen glass with green arrow “b” pointing
at the left side as shown below, and put about 10 sheets of blank copy paper on
top of the chart.
Printer Gamma Sensor Adjustment Screen
Key Operator Mode Screen
Place the chart
FACE DOWN
Green
arrow
[25] Printer Gamma Sensor Adjustment (continued)
14-58
5
Touch the
Start
key on the screen. The machine starts the adjustment automatically.
NOTE:
If no paper is left in the Multi-sheet bypass tray, the adjustment will not start
even if the Start key is touched.
The message “Completed” will be displayed when the adjustment is completed
normally.
NOTE:
If an error code (Error 1, 2, or 10) is displayed, check that the test chart is placed
properly.
If any other error code is displayed, please contact your service representative.
6 Repeat the steps 2 to 5 as desired.
7 Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen.
Index
i
Index
Symbols
[C] (CLEAR QTY.) key 2-6
[P] (COUNTER) key 2-6
Numerics
1.000 magnification mode 3-22
1-2 copying 3-25
2 in 1 copying 10-10
2-1 copying 3-31
2-2 copying 3-25
4 in 1 copying 10-10
8 in 1 copying 10-10
A
About Colours 7-2
ACCESS key 2-7
ADD PAPER key 5-8
ADD TONER icon 2-8, 13-2
AE Adjustment 14-51
AFR-20 Duplexing Document Feeder 2-3
AMS (Automatic Magnification Selection)
3-16
APPLICATION key 2-9
Application Selection Screen 10-2
Applying Filters 7-13
APS (Automatic Paper Selection) 3-14
AUTO Layout 10-43
Auto Low Power 2-19
AUTO mode (Repeat) 10-37
AUTO RESET key 2-6
Auto Shut-Off 2-19
B
Background Whiteness 7-15
Basic Screen 2-8
Binding mode 3-52
BLACK mode 3-2
Black print counter 2-4
Booklet 10-13
Booklet tray 2-10
Brightness (B) 7-3
C
Call for Service Screen 5-2
Call Remote Centre 14-44
Cartridge housing 2-11
CAUTION 1-5
Caution indicator 1-2
Caution label 1-2
Centring Adjustment 14-56
Chapter 10-7
CHECK key 2-6
Check Mode 4-4
Cleaning Image Scanning Section 13-16
Clearing Mishandled Paper 5-4
CMYK Model 7-2
CMYK value 7-24
Colour Adjustment 7-19
Colour Balance Adjustment 7-24
Colour Mode 3-2
Combination 10-10
Contrast 7-13, 7-29
Contrast Adjustment Dial 2-6
Control panel 2-3
Control Panel Adjustment 14-34
Control Panel Layout 2-6
Copier Initial Setting 14-10
Copy count 13-18
Copy Density 7-15
COPY key 2-6
Count/Set indicator 2-9
Counter List Screen 13-18
Cover inserter control panel 2-12
Cover sheet feeding 8-19
D
DANGER 1-5
Date & Time Setting 14-4
Density Shift 7-17
Dither (Error Diffustion) method 7-11
Dot Screen 7-11, 7-26
Double-sided copies 3-25
Dual Page 10-20
Index (continued)
ii
E
E.K.C. All Count Reset 14-17
E.K.C. Data Edit 14-14
E.K.C. Function (Web Utilities) 11-9
E.K.C. Function Setting 14-18
EKC (Electronic Key Counter) 14-12
EKC master key code 14-13
EKC password 2-21, 14-14
EKC Setting Menu Screen 14-13
Electronic Key Counter (EKC) 2-21
E-Mail Transmission Setting 14-8
E-Mail Transmission Setting (Web Utili-
ties) 11-7
Environment 1-7
Execute Adjustment Operation 14-52
External Machine Items 2-2
F
Face down group exit 3-46
Face down non-sort exit 3-46
Face up group exit 3-46
Face up mode (with Finisher) 3-45
Face up mode (without Finisher) 3-41
Face up non-sort exit 3-46
Finisher Adjustment 14-45
Finisher door 2-10
Fixed magnification mode 3-23
Fixing unit 2-4
FN-120/FN-9 Finisher 2-10
Fold mode 8-8
Frame/Fold Erasure 10-40
FREE JOB key 2-8
Front & Back Density Setting 14-47
Front door 2-3
FULL COLOUR mode 3-2
G
Gloss Mode 7-14, 7-29
Group mode (with Finisher) 3-45
Group mode (without Finisher) 3-41
H
HELP key 2-6
Help Mode 4-16
Help Screen 4-16
High Compression 7-26
High Resolution 7-26
HSB Model 7-3
HSB value 7-21
Hue (H) 7-3
I
Image adjust icon 2-8
IMAGE ADJUST key 2-9
Image Detection 7-12
Image Insert 10-17
Image Shift 10-45
Improving Colour Copy Quality 7-14
Inserting a New Staple Cartridge 13-7
Installation space 1-8
Internal Machine Items 2-4
Interrupt Copying 4-8
INTERRUPT key 2-6
IP Address Setting 14-7
J
Jam Position Screen 5-4, 5-7
Job Memory 4-11
JOB MEMORY key 2-7
Job Recall 4-14
Job Status (Web Utilities) 11-5
Job Status Screen 3-38
Job Store 4-11
K
Key counter 2-3
Key Operator Data Setting 14-25
Key Operator Mode Screen 14-3
Key Operator password 14-2
Keypad 2-6
L
Language Select Setting 14-6
LCD touch screen 2-6
Lens Mode 3-22
Line Screen 7-11, 7-26
Index (continued)
iii
Loading Paper 2-22
Lock/Delete Job Memory 14-20
Lunch Hour Off Setting 14-32
M
Machine Management List Print 14-43
Machine setting file (Web Utilities) 11-23
Magnification Adjustment 14-53
Main Body Specifications 6-2
Main Page 11-3
Main power switch 2-4
Manual Low Power 2-20
Manual Shut-Off 2-20
Memory indicator 2-9
Memory Overflow 5-9
Memory Switch Setting 14-37
Message area 2-8
Mixed Original 9-6
Modifying Colours 7-4
Multi-Page Enlargement 10-27
Multi-sheet bypass tray 2-3, 3-18
Munsell colour system 7-3
N
Non STD size mode 9-4
Non-Image Area Erase 10-30
Non-Image Area Erase Setting 14-50
Non-sort mode (with Finisher) 3-45
Non-sort mode (without Finisher) 3-41
O
OC-2 Original cover 2-3
Off-Line Finishing 8-22
Option Specifications 6-4
Original count 2-9
Original Direction 9-2
Original direction icon 2-8
Original Form 9-4
Original Image 7-34
Original Information 12-9
Original Thickness 9-10
Original Type 7-34
Output icon area 2-9
Output Mode 3-41, 3-45
Overlay 10-62
Overlay Memory 10-65
P
Panel Contrast / Key Sound Adjustment
14-24
Paper indicator 2-22
Paper Information 12-2
Paper loading button 2-13
Paper Size 3-14, 12-6
Paper Type / Special Size Set 14-21
Paper Type Set (Bypass) 14-23
Paper Weight 12-2
Periodic Maintenance (PM) 13-20
PK-5 Punch kit 2-11
Platen cover 13-17
Platen glass 3-8, 13-16
Platen Glass Originals 12-9
Platen store mode 3-33
PM counter 13-20
PM icon 2-8
Positioning Originals 3-4
Power OFF/ON Screen 5-11
Power Save Setting 14-36
POWER SAVER ON/OFF key 2-6
Power Source 1-6
Power switch 2-3
Precautions for Routine Handling 1-10
Primary (Main) tray 2-10
PRINT JOB key 2-8
Print quantity 3-10
Printer Gamma Sensor Adjustment 14-
57
PRINTER key 2-6
Program Job 10-24
Proof Copy 4-2
PROOF COPY key 2-6
Punch mode 8-11
R
RADF (AFR-20 Duplexing Document
Feeder) 2-3
RADF Originals 12-10
RADF platen guide cover 13-16
RADF store mode 3-33
Index (continued)
iv
Recalling Previous Job Settings 4-15
Reduce & Shift 10-48
Repeat 10-34, 10-37
Repeat mode (Repeat) 10-37
Reproducing Images 7-11
Reserve 3-35
Reverse Image 10-32
RGB Model 7-2
RGB value 7-19
Right & Left bind 3-52
Right side door 2-3
Rotation 8-4
Rotation group mode 3-41
Rotation icon 2-8
ROTATION OFF key 2-9
Rotation sort mode 3-41
S
Saturation (S) 7-3
SCAN JOB key 2-8
Scan Transmission Setting 14-48
Scan Transmission Setting (Web Utili-
ties) 11-19
Scanner Function Setting 14-19
SCANNER key 2-6
Screen Setting 7-26
Secondary (Sub) tray 2-10
Sharpness 7-13, 7-29
Sheet/Cover Insertion 10-3
SINGLE COLOUR mode 3-2
Smooth Tone 7-26
Sort mode 3-45
SPECIAL ORIGINAL key 2-9
Special paper 3-18, 12-8
Stamp 10-51
Standard/Optional Equipment 2-5
Staple mode 3-45
START key 2-6
STATUS key 2-9
Stitch & Fold mode 8-8
STOP key 2-6
STORE key 2-9
Store mode 3-33
System Initial Setting 14-4
T
Tab paper mode 9-4
Thick original mode 9-10
Thin original mode 9-10
Three primary colours of light 7-2
Three primary colours of pigment 7-2
Three-Fold mode 8-14
Timer Action On/Off Setting 14-31
TIMER indicator 2-6
Timer Interrupt Password Setting 14-33
Timer Setting 14-29
Timing Adjustment 14-54
TMG kit A 2-14
TMG-3 Trimming Unit 2-14
Toner access door 2-3
Toner recovery box 2-3, 13-14
Toner recovery box icon 2-8
Top bind 3-52
Total counter 2-4
Tray Auto Select Setting 14-35
Tray/ Exit Tray Capacity 12-4
Trimmer unit tray 2-14
Trimming mode 8-16
Troubleshooting Tips 5-12
TYPE/SIZE key 2-9
U
Unsuitable RADF Originals 12-9
User Lens Mode Ratio Setting 14-11
User Setting Mode 14-11
V
Vert./Horiz. mode (Repeat) 10-34
Vertical/Horizontal zoom mode 8-5
W
Wake-up Screen 2-16
Warm-up Screen 2-16
WARNING 1-5
Waste basket 2-11, 2-15, 13-10, 13-12
Watermark 10-58
Web Utilities 11-2
Weekly Timer 8-2
Index (continued)
v
Weekly Timer (Key Operator Mode) 14-
26
Weekly Timer On/Off Setting 14-28
Weekly Timer password 14-26
Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen 14-
27
Work table 2-3
Z
Z-Folded Original 9-8
Zoom mode 3-23
65AN97100-01
2003. 9 4969-7707-01
Copyright
2003
Printed in China
The information contained in this manual
is subject to change without notice to
incorporate improvements made on the
product or products the manual covers.
Marunouchi Center Building, 1-6-1 Marunouchi, Chiyoda-ku, Tokyo 100-0005, JAPAN
2

Hulp nodig? Stel uw vraag in het forum

Spelregels

Misbruik melden

Gebruikershandleiding.com neemt misbruik van zijn services uitermate serieus. U kunt hieronder aangeven waarom deze vraag ongepast is. Wij controleren de vraag en zonodig wordt deze verwijderd.

Product:

Bijvoorbeeld antisemitische inhoud, racistische inhoud, of materiaal dat gewelddadige fysieke handelingen tot gevolg kan hebben.

Bijvoorbeeld een creditcardnummer, een persoonlijk identificatienummer, of een geheim adres. E-mailadressen en volledige namen worden niet als privégegevens beschouwd.

Spelregels forum

Om tot zinvolle vragen te komen hanteren wij de volgende spelregels:

Belangrijk! Als er een antwoord wordt gegeven op uw vraag, dan is het voor de gever van het antwoord nuttig om te weten als u er wel (of niet) mee geholpen bent! Wij vragen u dus ook te reageren op een antwoord.

Belangrijk! Antwoorden worden ook per e-mail naar abonnees gestuurd. Laat uw emailadres achter op deze site, zodat u op de hoogte blijft. U krijgt dan ook andere vragen en antwoorden te zien.

Abonneren

Abonneer u voor het ontvangen van emails voor uw Konica Minolta CF5001 bij:


U ontvangt een email met instructies om u voor één of beide opties in te schrijven.


Ontvang uw handleiding per email

Vul uw emailadres in en ontvang de handleiding van Konica Minolta CF5001 in de taal/talen: Engels als bijlage per email.

De handleiding is 9,34 mb groot.

 

U ontvangt de handleiding per email binnen enkele minuten. Als u geen email heeft ontvangen, dan heeft u waarschijnlijk een verkeerd emailadres ingevuld of is uw mailbox te vol. Daarnaast kan het zijn dat uw internetprovider een maximum heeft aan de grootte per email. Omdat hier een handleiding wordt meegestuurd, kan het voorkomen dat de email groter is dan toegestaan bij uw provider.

Stel vragen via chat aan uw handleiding

Stel uw vraag over deze PDF

Andere handleiding(en) van Konica Minolta CF5001

Konica Minolta CF5001 Snelstart handleiding - Nederlands - 48 pagina's

Konica Minolta CF5001 Snelstart handleiding - Deutsch - 428 pagina's


Uw handleiding is per email verstuurd. Controleer uw email

Als u niet binnen een kwartier uw email met handleiding ontvangen heeft, kan het zijn dat u een verkeerd emailadres heeft ingevuld of dat uw emailprovider een maximum grootte per email heeft ingesteld die kleiner is dan de grootte van de handleiding.

Er is een email naar u verstuurd om uw inschrijving definitief te maken.

Controleer uw email en volg de aanwijzingen op om uw inschrijving definitief te maken

U heeft geen emailadres opgegeven

Als u de handleiding per email wilt ontvangen, vul dan een geldig emailadres in.

Uw vraag is op deze pagina toegevoegd

Wilt u een email ontvangen bij een antwoord en/of nieuwe vragen? Vul dan hier uw emailadres in.



Info